Alvarion Technologies BA-4900 High Speed Broadband Wireless Access System User Manual BreezeACCESS 4900 System Manual

Download:
Mirror Download [FCC.gov]
Document ID	590731
Application ID	e3aQN+deh5Y7QioLwuBvSA==
Document Description	System User Manual
Short Term Confidential	No
Permanent Confidential	No
Supercede	No
Document Type	User Manual
Display Format	Adobe Acrobat PDF - pdf
Filesize	264.56kB (3306998 bits)
Date Submitted	2005-10-12 00:00:00
Date Available	2005-10-11 00:00:00
Creation Date	2005-07-25 16:33:38
Producing Software	Acrobat Distiller 6.0 (Windows)
Document Lastmod	2005-07-25 16:48:45
Document Title	BreezeACCESS 4900 System Manual
Document Creator	(Acrobat PDFMaker 6.0 for Word)
Document Author:	Alvarion Ltd.

BreezeACCESS® 4900
System Manual
S/W Version 3.2
July 2005
P/N 214151
Legal Rights
Legal Rights
© Copyright 2005 Alvarion Ltd. All rights reserved.
The material contained herein is proprietary, privileged, and confidential and
owned by Alvarion or its third party licensors. No disclosure thereof shall be
made to third parties without the express written permission of Alvarion Ltd.
Alvarion Ltd. reserves the right to alter the equipment specifications and
descriptions in this publication without prior notice. No part of this publication
shall be deemed to be part of any contract or warranty unless specifically
incorporated by reference into such contract or warranty.
Trade Names
Alvarion®, BreezeCOM®, WALKair®, WALKnet®, BreezeNET®, BreezeACCESS®,
BreezeMANAGE™, BreezeLINK®, BreezeCONFIG™, BreezeMAX™, AlvariSTAR™,
MGW™, eMGW™, WAVEXpress™, MicroXpress™, WAVEXchange™, WAVEView™,
GSM Network in a Box and TurboWAVE™ and/or other products and/or services
referenced here in are either registered trademarks, trademarks or service marks
of Alvarion Ltd.
All other names are or may be the trademarks of their respective owners.
Statement of Conditions
The information contained in this manual is subject to change without notice.
Alvarion Ltd. shall not be liable for errors contained herein or for incidental or
consequential damages in connection with the furnishing, performance, or use of
this manual or equipment supplied with it.
Warranties and Disclaimers
All Alvarion Ltd. (“Alvarion”) products purchased from Alvarion or through any of
Alvarion’s authorized resellers are subject to the following warranty and product
liability terms and conditions.
Exclusive Warranty
(a) Alvarion warrants that the Product hardware it supplies and the tangible
media on which any software is installed, under normal use and conditions, will
be free from significant defects in materials and workmanship for a period of
fourteen (14) months from the date of shipment of a given Product to Purchaser
(the “Warranty Period”). Alvarion will, at its sole option and as Purchaser’s sole
remedy, repair or replace any defective Product in accordance with Alvarion’
standard R&R procedure.
(b) With respect to the Firmware, Alvarion warrants the correct functionality
according to the attached documentation, for a period of fourteen (14) month
from invoice date (the "Warranty Period")". During the Warranty Period, Alvarion
may release to its Customers firmware updates, which include additional
BreezeACCESS 4900 System Manual
iii
Legal Rights
performance improvements and/or bug fixes, upon availability (the “Warranty”).
Bug fixes, temporary patches and/or workarounds may be supplied as Firmware
updates.
Additional hardware, if required, to install or use Firmware updates must be
purchased by the Customer. Alvarion will be obligated to support solely the two
(2) most recent Software major releases.
ALVARION SHALL NOT BE LIABLE UNDER THIS WARRANTY IF ITS TESTING
AND EXAMINATION DISCLOSE THAT THE ALLEGED DEFECT IN THE PRODUCT
DOES NOT EXIST OR WAS CAUSED BY PURCHASER’S OR ANY THIRD
PERSON'S MISUSE, NEGLIGENCE, IMPROPER INSTALLATION OR IMPROPER
TESTING, UNAUTHORIZED ATTEMPTS TO REPAIR, OR ANY OTHER CAUSE
BEYOND THE RANGE OF THE INTENDED USE, OR BY ACCIDENT, FIRE,
LIGHTNING OR OTHER HAZARD.
Disclaimer
BreezeACCESS 4900 (the “Product”) is intended as a non-critical public safety
communication channels and is provided subject to and on condition of this
Disclaimer. If the communication channel is CRITICAL, customer shall provide
for backup. Alvarion is neither an insurer nor guarantor and does not guarantee
that the Product will reduce the time it takes for emergency personnel to respond
to or locate the source of any emergency call. Nor does Alvarion guarantee that
the Product will be error-free or work all of the time or, in all cases, provide
access to emergency services. The Product may be subject to compromise, error
or failure due to a variety of reasons, including, but not limited to:
Signals sent by wireless transmitters may be blocked or reflected before
reaching their destination.
The equipment, like any other electrical device, is subject to component
failure.
Although the Product works on radio frequencies and telephone lines, there
may be interference on the radio frequency.
ACCORDINGLY, THE PRODUCT IS PROVIDED “AS IS” WITHOUT WARRANTIES
OF ANY KIND, AND ALVARION EXPRESSLY DISCLAIMS ALL WARRANTIES WITH
RESPECT TO THE PRODUCT, AND TO ALL COMPONENTS THEREOF,
WHETHER EXPRESS, IMPLIED OR STATUTORY, INCLUDING WITHOUT
LIMITATION, ANY WARRANTY OF MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS FOR A
PARTICULAR USE, NON-INFRINGEMENT OF THIRD PARTY RIGHTS, OR BASED
ON COURSE OF CONDUCT OR TRADE CUSTOM OR USAGE. Alvarion shall not
be liable for any damages arising from or related to the use of the Product,
including, but not limited to, any emergency calls placed via the Product, or any
BreezeACCESS 4900 System Manual
iv
Legal Rights
other cause related to the use or inability to use the Product. Alvarion shall not
have any liability for any personal injury, property damage or other loss based on
any claim arising from or related to the Product, the use of or inability to use
such Product or any other cause related to the Product. Alvarion shall have no
liability whatsoever for any direct, indirect, punitive, special, incidental or other
consequential damages arising directly or indirectly from the use of or inability to
use the Product, including, but not limited to, any damages or injury caused by
any error, omission, deletion, defect, interruption, failure of performance, delay in
operation or transmission, computer virus, communication line failure, theft or
destruction or unauthorized access to, alteration of whether for breach of
contract, negligence, tortious behavior, or under any other cause of action.
YOUR SOLE REMEDY AND ALVARION’S SOLE LIABILITY IS, IN ALVARION’S
DISCRETION, EITHER (i) THE REPLACEMENT OR REPAIR OF THE PRODUCT;
OR (ii) THE REFUND OF THE PURCHASE PRICE FOR THE PRODUCT.
All use the Product is at your sole risk. You assume all risks of use of this
Product and hereby waive and release, to the full extent permitted by law,
Alvarion and its subsidiaries and affiliated companies, and their respective
employees, officers, directors and agents, from any and all claims, damages,
demands, and any other liability relating to or arising from the use of the Product
and agree to defend, indemnify and hold harmless Alvarion and its subsidiaries
and affiliated companies, and their respective employees, officers, directors and
agents against any and all claims resulting from or arising out of any use of or
inability to use the Product.
Limitation of Liability
(a) ALVARION SHALL NOT BE LIABLE TO THE PURCHASER OR TO ANY THIRD
PARTY, FOR ANY LOSS OF PROFITS, LOSS OF USE, INTERRUPTION OF
BUSINESS OR FOR ANY INDIRECT, SPECIAL, INCIDENTAL, PUNITIVE OR
CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES OF ANY KIND, WHETHER ARISING UNDER
BREACH OF CONTRACT, TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE), STRICT LIABILITY
OR OTHERWISE AND WHETHER BASED ON THIS AGREEMENT OR
OTHERWISE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES.
(b) TO THE EXTENT PERMITTED BY APPLICABLE LAW, IN NO EVENT SHALL
THE LIABILITY FOR DAMAGES HEREUNDER OF ALVARION OR ITS
EMPLOYEES OR AGENTS EXCEED THE PURCHASE PRICE PAID FOR THE
PRODUCT BY PURCHASER, NOR SHALL THE AGGREGATE LIABILITY FOR
DAMAGES TO ALL PARTIES REGARDING ANY PRODUCT EXCEED THE
PURCHASE PRICE PAID FOR THAT PRODUCT BY THAT PARTY (EXCEPT IN THE
CASE OF A BREACH OF A PARTY’S CONFIDENTIALITY OBLIGATIONS).
BreezeACCESS 4900 System Manual
Legal Rights
Electronic Emission Notices
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC rules.
Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
This device may not cause harmful interference.
This device must accept any interference received, including interference that
may cause undesired operation.
FCC Radio Frequency Interference Statement
The Subscriber Unit equipment has been tested and found to comply with the
limits for a class B digital device, pursuant to part 15 of the FCC rules and to
ETSI EN 301 489-1 rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable
protection against harmful interference when the equipment is operated in a
residential environment notwithstanding use in commercial, business and
industrial environments. This equipment generates, uses, and can radiate radio
frequency energy and, if not installed and used in accordance with the
instruction manual, may cause harmful interference to radio communications.
The Base Station equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits
for a class A digital device, pursuant to part 15 of the FCC rules and to EN 301
489-1 rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against
harmful interference when the equipment is operated in commercial, business
and industrial environments. This equipment generates, uses, and can radiate
radio frequency energy and, if not installed and used in accordance with the
instruction manual, may cause harmful interference to radio communications.
Operation of this equipment in a residential area is likely to cause harmful
interference in which case the user will be required to correct the interference at
the user’s own expense.
FCC Radiation Hazard Warning
To comply with FCC RF exposure requirement, the antenna used for this
transmitter must be fixed-mounted on outdoor permanent structures with a
separation distance of at least 2 meter from al persons for antennas with a gain
up to 28 dBi, and must not be co-located or operating in conjunction with any
other antenna or transmitter.
R&TTE Compliance Statement
This equipment complies with the appropriate essential requirements of Article 3
of the R&TTE Directive 1999/5/EC.
Safety Considerations
For the following safety considerations, “Instrument” means the BreezeACCESS
4900 units’ components and their cables.
BreezeACCESS 4900 System Manual
vi
Legal Rights
Caution
To avoid electrical shock, do not perform any servicing unless you are qualified to
do so.
Line Voltage
Before connecting this instrument to the power line, make sure that the voltage of
the power source matches the requirements of the instrument.
Radio
The instrument transmits radio energy during normal operation. To avoid
possible harmful exposure to this energy, do not stand or work for extended
periods of time in front of its antenna. The long-term characteristics or the
possible physiological effects of Radio Frequency Electromagnetic fields have not
been yet fully investigated.
Outdoor Unit and Antenna Installation and Grounding
Ensure that outdoor units, antennas and supporting structures are properly
installed to eliminate any physical hazard to either people or property. Make sure
that the installation of the outdoor unit, antenna and cables is performed in
accordance with all relevant national and local building and safety codes. Even
where grounding is not mandatory according to applicable regulation and
national codes, it is highly recommended to ensure that the outdoor unit and the
antenna mast (when using external antenna) are grounded and suitable lightning
protection devices are used so as to provide protection against voltage surges and
static charges. In any event, Alvarion is not liable for any injury, damage or
regulation violations associated with or caused by installation, grounding or
lightning protection.
BreezeACCESS 4900 System Manual
vii
Important Notice
Important Notice
This user manual is delivered subject to the following conditions and restrictions:
This manual contains proprietary information belonging to Alvarion Ltd. Such
information is supplied solely for the purpose of assisting properly authorized
users of the respective Alvarion products.
No part of its contents may be used for any other purpose, disclosed to any
person or firm or reproduced by any means, electronic and mechanical,
without the express prior written permission of Alvarion Ltd.
The text and graphics are for the purpose of illustration and reference only.
The specifications on which they are based are subject to change without
notice.
The software described in this document is furnished under a license. The
software may be used or copied only in accordance with the terms of that
license.
Information in this document is subject to change without notice.
Corporate and individual names and data used in examples herein are
fictitious unless otherwise noted.
Alvarion Ltd. reserves the right to alter the equipment specifications and
descriptions in this publication without prior notice. No part of this
publication shall be deemed to be part of any contract or warranty unless
specifically incorporated by reference into such contract or warranty.
The information contained herein is merely descriptive in nature, and does
not constitute an offer for the sale of the product described herein.
Any changes or modifications of equipment, including opening of the
equipment not expressly approved by Alvarion Ltd. will void equipment
warranty and any repair thereafter shall be charged for. It could also void the
user’s authority to operate the equipment.
Some of the equipment provided by Alvarion and specified in this manual, is
manufactured and warranted by third parties. All such equipment must be
installed and handled in full compliance with the instructions provided by such
manufacturers as attached to this manual or provided thereafter by Alvarion or
the manufacturers. Non compliance with such instructions may result in serious
damage and/or bodily harm and/or void the user’s authority to operate the
equipment and/or revoke the warranty provided by such manufacturer.
BreezeACCESS 4900 System Manual
viii
About This Manual
This manual describes the BreezeACCESS 4900 Broadband Wireless Access
System Release 3.2 and how to install, operate and manage the system
components.
This manual is intended for technicians responsible for installing, setting up and
operating the BreezeACCESS 4900 system, and for system administrators
responsible for managing the system.
This manual contains the following chapters and appendices:
Chapter 1 – System description: Describes the BreezeAccess 4900 system and
its components.
Chapter 2 – Installation: Describes how to install the system components.
Chapter 3 – Commissioning: Describes how to configure basic parameters,
align the Subscriber Unit antenna and validate unit operation.
Chapter 4 – Operation and Administration: Describes how to use the
BreezeACCESS 4900 Monitor application for configuring parameters, checking
system status and monitoring performance.
Appendix A – Software Version Loading Using TFTP: Describes how to load a
new software version using TFTP.
Appendix B – File Download and Upload Using TFTP: Describes how to
download and upload configuration files using TFTP. This procedure is also
applicable for uploading country code and feature license files.
Appendix C – Using the Restore Link Parameters Utility: Describes how to use
the special Restore Link Parameters utility to enable management access to
units where wrong or unknown configuration disables regular access to the
unit for management purposes.
Appendix D – Preparing the indoor to outdoor cable: Provides details on
preparation of the indoor to outdoor Ethernet cable.
About This Manual
Appendix E – Supported MIBs and Traps: Provides a brief description of the
parameters contained in the private MIB agent incorporated into the
BreezeACCESS 4900 devices. In addition, a description of all traps relevant to
the BreezeACCESS 4900 devices is provided.
Appendix F – Parameters Summary: Provides an at a glance summary of the
configuration parameters, value ranges and default values.
Appendix G – Using the Feature License Web application: Describes how to
use the Feature License web application for getting License Keys.
Appendix H – Troubleshooting.
BreezeACCESS 4900 System Manual
Contents
Chapter 1 - System Description ...............................................................1
1.1 Introducing BreezeACCESS 4900 ............................................................................... 2
1.2 Base Station Equipment............................................................................................... 3
1.2.1 Modular Base Station Equipment ........................................................................ 3
1.2.2 Standalone “Micro-cell” Access Unit.................................................................... 4
1.3 Subscriber Unit ............................................................................................................. 6
1.4 Networking Equipment................................................................................................. 7
1.5 Management Systems .................................................................................................. 8
1.5.1 BreezeCONFIG™ ................................................................................................ 8
1.5.2 AlvariSTAR™ ....................................................................................................... 8
1.6 Specifications ............................................................................................................. 10
1.6.1 Radio ................................................................................................................. 10
1.6.2 Data Communication ......................................................................................... 11
1.6.3 Configuration and Management ........................................................................ 12
1.6.4 Standards Compliance, General........................................................................ 13
1.6.5 Physical and Electrical....................................................................................... 14
Chapter 2 - Installation ..........................................................................21
2.1 Installation Requirements .......................................................................................... 22
2.1.1 Packing List ....................................................................................................... 22
2.1.2 Indoor-to-Outdoor Cables .................................................................................. 24
2.2 Equipment Positioning Guidelines ........................................................................... 26
Contents
2.3 Installing the Outdoor Unit......................................................................................... 27
2.3.1 Pole Mounting the Outdoor Unit......................................................................... 27
2.3.2 Connecting the Grounding and Antenna Cables ............................................... 29
2.3.3 Connecting the Indoor-to-Outdoor Cable........................................................... 30
2.4 Installing the Universal IDU Indoor Unit ................................................................... 32
2.4.1 RESET Button Functionality .............................................................................. 33
2.5 Installing the Modular Base Station Equipment....................................................... 34
2.5.1 BS-SH Slot Assignment ..................................................................................... 34
2.5.2 BS-PS-AC Power Supply Module ...................................................................... 35
2.5.3 BS-PS-DC Power Supply Module ...................................................................... 36
2.5.4 BS-AU Network Interface Module ...................................................................... 37
2.5.5 Installing the BS-SH Chassis and Modules........................................................ 38
Chapter 3 - Commissioning ....................................................................41
3.1 Configuring Basic Parameters................................................................................... 42
3.2 Aligning the Subscriber Unit Antenna ...................................................................... 45
3.3 Configuring the Subscriber Unit’s Maximum Modulation Level............................. 46
3.4 Operation Verification................................................................................................. 48
3.4.1 Outdoor Unit Verification.................................................................................... 48
3.4.2 Indoor Unit Verification....................................................................................... 51
3.4.3 Verifying the Ethernet Connection (Modular Base station) ................................ 52
3.4.4 Verifying the Indoor-to-Outdoor Connection (Modular Base Station)................. 52
3.4.5 Verifying Data Connectivity................................................................................ 52
Chapter 4 - Operation and Administration.............................................53
4.1 Working with the Monitor Program ........................................................................... 54
4.1.1 Accessing the Monitor Program Using Telnet.................................................... 54
4.1.2 Common Operations.......................................................................................... 55
BreezeACCESS 4900 System Manual
xii
Contents
4.2 Menus and Parameters .............................................................................................. 57
4.2.1 Main Menu ......................................................................................................... 57
4.2.2 Info Screens Menu............................................................................................. 57
4.2.3 Unit Control Menu.............................................................................................. 62
4.2.4 Basic Configuration Menu.................................................................................. 74
4.2.5 Site Survey Menu .............................................................................................. 77
4.2.6 Advanced Configuration Menu .......................................................................... 90
Appendix A - Software Version Loading Using TFTP...........................145
Appendix B - File Download and Upload Using TFTP ..........................149
Appendix C - Using the Set Factory Defaults Utility ...........................153
Appendix D - Preparing the Indoor to Outdoor SU Cable.....................155
Appendix E - Supported MIBS and Traps .............................................159
E.1 System Object Identifiers......................................................................................... 160
E.2 breezeAccessVLMib ................................................................................................. 162
E.2.1 System Information Parameters ...................................................................... 162
E.2.2 Unit Control Parameters .................................................................................. 165
E.2.3 Network Management Parameters .................................................................. 168
E.2.4 IP Parameters.................................................................................................. 170
E.2.5 Bridge Parameters........................................................................................... 171
E.2.6 Air Interface Parameters.................................................................................. 174
E.2.7 Service Parameters ......................................................................................... 188
E.2.8 User Filtering Parameters................................................................................ 193
E.2.9 Security Parameters ........................................................................................ 195
E.2.10 Performance Parameters................................................................................. 196
E.2.11 Site Survey Parameters................................................................................... 198
BreezeACCESS 4900 System Manual
xiii
Contents
E.3 Supported Traps ....................................................................................................... 209
E.3.1 Trap Variables.................................................................................................. 209
E.3.2 Private Traps.................................................................................................... 210
Appendix F - Parameters Summary ..................................................... 213
F.1 Unit Control Parameters........................................................................................... 214
F.2 IP Parameters ............................................................................................................ 216
F.3 Air Interface Parameters........................................................................................... 217
F.4 Network Management Parameters .......................................................................... 219
F.5 Bridge Parameters .................................................................................................... 220
F.6 Performance Parameters.......................................................................................... 222
F.7 Service Parameters................................................................................................... 223
F.8 Security Parameters ................................................................................................. 225
Appendix G - Using the Feature License Web Application ................. 227
G.1 The Feature License Web Application .................................................................... 228
G.1.1 Loading License Strings to Devices ................................................................. 230
Appendix H - Troubleshooting ............................................................. 233
H.1 Ethernet Port Connection Problems ....................................................................... 234
H.2 SU Association Problems ........................................................................................ 235
H.3 Low Throughput Problems ...................................................................................... 236
BreezeACCESS 4900 System Manual
xiv
Figures
Figure 2-1: 3" Pole Installation Using Special Brackets.............................................................................. 28
Figure 2-2: Bottom Panel of the Outdoor Unit (without the seal assembly)................................................ 29
Figure 2-3: The Waterproof Seal ................................................................................................................ 30
Figure 2-4: IDU PS 1073 Front Panel ......................................................................................................... 32
Figure 2-5: BS-SH Chassis Slot Assignment.............................................................................................. 34
Figure 2-6: BS-PS-AC Front Panel ............................................................................................................. 35
Figure 2-7: BS-PS-DC Front Panel............................................................................................................. 36
Figure 2-8: BS-AU Front Panel ................................................................................................................... 37
Figure 4-1: Main Menu (Administrator Level) ............................................................................................. 55
Figure D-1: Ethernet Connector Pin Assignments.................................................................................... 156
Tables
Table 1-1: AU Detached Antennas ............................................................................................................... 4
Table 1-2: Subscriber Unit ODU Types ........................................................................................................ 6
Table 1-3: Radio Specifications .................................................................................................................. 10
Table 1-4: Data Communication ................................................................................................................. 11
Table 1-5: Configuration and Management ................................................................................................ 12
Table 1-6: Standards Compliance, General................................................................................................ 13
Table 1-7: Mechanical Specifications, Subscriber Unit............................................................................... 14
Table 1-8: Connectors, Subscriber Unit...................................................................................................... 14
Table 1-9: Electrical Specifications, Subscriber Unit .................................................................................. 15
Table 1-10: Mechanical Specifications, Modular Base Station Equipment ................................................ 16
Table 1-11: Connectors, Modular Base Station Equipment........................................................................ 17
Table 1-12: Electrical Specifications, Modular Base Station Equipment .................................................... 17
Table 1-13: Mechanical Specifications, Stand Alone Access Unit ............................................................. 18
Table 1-14: Connectors, Stand Alone Access Unit..................................................................................... 18
Table 1-15: Electrical Specifications, Stand Alone Access Unit ................................................................. 19
Table 1-16: Environmental Specifications................................................................................................... 19
Table 2-1: Approved Category 5E Ethernet Cables ................................................................................... 25
Table 2-2: BS-PS LED Functionality........................................................................................................... 36
Table 3-1: Basic Parameters ...................................................................................................................... 42
Table 3-2: Recommended Maximum Modulation Level ............................................................................. 47
Table 3-3: AU-ODU LEDs ........................................................................................................................... 48
Table 3-4: SU-ODU LEDs ........................................................................................................................... 49
Table 3-5: SU-ODU SNR Bar LED Functionality ........................................................................................ 50
Table 3-6: BS-AU LEDs .............................................................................................................................. 51
Tables
Table 3-7: PS1073 SU IDU / AU-SA IDU LEDs ..........................................................................................52
Table 4-1: Default Passwords .....................................................................................................................54
Table 4-2: Sub-Band Dependent Parameters .............................................................................................61
Table 4-3: Parameters not reset after Set Complete Factory/Operator Defaults........................................64
Table 4-4: Parameters that are not reset after Set Partial Factory/Operator Defaults................................65
Table 4-5: Authentication and Association Process ....................................................................................85
Table 4-6: VLAN Management Port Functionality .....................................................................................114
Table 4-7: VLAN Data Port Functionality - Access Link ............................................................................115
Table 4-8: VLAN Data Port Functionality - Trunk Link ..............................................................................116
Table 4-9: VLAN Data Port Functionality - Hybrid Link .............................................................................116
Table 4-10: Recommended Maximum Modulation Level ..........................................................................128
BreezeACCESS 4900 System Manual
xviii
1
Chapter 1 - System Description
In This Chapter:
Introducing BreezeACCESS 4900, page 2
Base Station Equipment, page 3
Subscriber Unit, page 6
Networking Equipment, page 7
Management Systems, page 8
Specifications, page 10
Chapter 1 - System Description
1.1
Introducing BreezeACCESS 4900
BreezeACCESS 4900 is a high capacity, IP services oriented Broadband Wireless
Access system operating in the 4.9 GHz licensed spectrum band allocated for
public safety. The system employs wireless packet switched data technology to
support high-speed IP services with a network connection that is always on. The
system is designed for both Point-to-Point and Point-to Multipoint configurations,
supporting data, VoIP and video applications.
The system supports Virtual LANs based on IEEE 802.1Q, enabling secure
operation and Virtual Private Network (VPN) services. The system supports layer2 traffic prioritization based on IEEE 802.1p and layer-3 traffic prioritization
based on either IP ToS Precedence (RFC791) or DSCP (RFC2474). It also supports
traffic prioritization based on UDP and/or TCP port ranges. BreezeACCESS 4900
uses advanced security mechanisms, including WEP128, AES128 and FIPS
compliance.
Using OFDM modem technology and high power radios, BreezeACCESS 4900
offers an unmatched combination of wide coverage, high capacity and valueadded features to provide wireless connectivity that works also in near and
non-line-of-site (NLOS) conditions.
Alvarion’s Complete Spectrum solution enables the BreezeACCESS 4900 to
integrate seamlessly into other BreezeACCESS networks. Supporting both fixed
and mobile platforms at multiple frequency bands, the Complete Spectrum
enables simultaneous deployment of systems at 900 MHz, 2.4 GHz, 3.5 GHz,
4.9 GHz, and the entire 5 GHz band.
A BreezeACCESS 4900 system comprises the following:
Customer Premise Equipment (CPE): BreezeACCESS 4900 Subscriber Units
(SUs).
Base Station Equipment (BS): BreezeACCESS 4900 Access Units and
supporting equipment.
Networking Equipment: Standard Switches/Routers supporting connections
to the backbone and/or Internet.
Management Systems: SNMP-based Management, Billing and Customer
Care, and other Operation Support Systems.
BreezeACCESS 4900 System Manual
Base Station Equipment
1.2
Base Station Equipment
The Access Units, installed at the Base Station site, provide all the functionality
necessary to communicate with the Subscriber Units and to connect to the
backbone of the network.
There are 2 lines of Access Units with different architectures:
Modular Base Station Equipment
Standalone “Micro-Cell” Access Unit
1.2.1
Modular Base Station Equipment
The Base Station Equipment is based on the BS-SH 3U chassis, which is suitable
for installation in 19-inch racks. The chassis contains one or two Power Supply
modules and has 8 slots that can accommodate BS-AU Network Interface
modules. These slots can also
accommodate various combinations of
other modules, including Network
Interface (BS-AU) modules for Access
Units operating in any of the bands
supported by BreezeACCESS VL
equipment or BreezeACCESS equipment using GFSK modulation, including
BreezeACCESS 900, BreezeACCESS II, BreezeACCESS XL and BreezeACCESS V.
It can also accommodate a BS-GU GPS and Alarms module to support GPS-based
synchronization of BreezeACCESS systems using Frequency Hopping radios.
Two different types of power supply modules are available for the BreezeACCESS
4900 chassis: The BS-PS-DC that is powered from a -48 VDC power source, and
the BS-PS-AC, powered from the 110/220 VAC mains. The optional use of two
power supply modules ensures fail-safe operation through power supply
redundancy. When the same chassis is used also for Access Unit modules
belonging to other BreezeACCESS families using GFSK modulation, then one
BS-PS power supply (AC or DC) should be used to provide power to the
BreezeACCESS 4900 Access Units, and a different power supply module, suitable
for GFSK equipment, is required for powering the BreezeACCESS GFSK Access
Units.
Each BS-AU module, together with its outdoor AU-D/E-BS-ODU radio unit and
an antenna comprise an AU-D/E-BS Access Unit that serves a single sector/cell.
One AU-BS Access Unit can serve up to 512 Subscriber Units (124 when Data
Encryption is used).
System Description
Chapter 1 - System Description
The AU-D/E-BS-ODU outdoor unit contains the processing and
radio modules and connects to an external antenna using a short
RF cable.
E model units, such as the AU-E-BS-4900, are supplied without an
antenna and are primarily intended for Point-to-Point applications.
D model units, namely AU-D-BS-4900-360 and AU-D-BS-4900-120,
are supplied with a detached antenna, as listed in Table 1-1:
Table 1-1: AU Detached Antennas
Unit
Antenna
Band (GHz)
Horizontal
Gain
Beam Width
(dBi)
AU-D-BS-4900-120
AU-Ant-4.9G-15-120
4.900-5.100
120°
15
AU-D-BS-4900-360
AU-Ant-4.9G-9-Omni
4.900-5.100
360°
The BS-AU indoor module connects to the network through a standard IEEE
802.3 Ethernet 10/100BaseT (RJ 45) interface. The indoor module is connected
to the outdoor unit via a Category 5E Ethernet cable. This cable carries Ethernet
traffic between the indoor module and the outdoor unit, and also transfers power
(54 VDC) and control from the indoor module to the outdoor unit.
1.2.2
Standalone “Micro-cell” Access Unit
The standalone AU-D/E-SA Access Unit is very similar to the AU-D/E-BS unit.
The AU-D/E-SA-ODU outdoor unit is very similar to the
AU-D/E-BS-ODU outdoor unit (identical functionality, but the
units are not interchangeable). Units are differentiated based
on the availability of an antenna: E model units are supplied
without an antenna, while D model units are supplied with a
detached antenna.
Available units are:
AU-D-SA-4900-360 (Standalone AU with a 9 dBi omni antenna)
AU-D-SA-4900-120 (Standalone AU with a 15 dBi, 120° sector antenna)
AU-E-SA-4900 (Standalone AU)
The available antennas for D model units are the same as those of the AU-D-BS
Access Unit. The main difference is in the structure of the indoor part; in the AUD/E-SA Access Unit the indoor unit is a standalone desktop or wall-mountable
BreezeACCESS 4900 System Manual
Base Station Equipment
unit (the same Universal IDU that is also used in the SU) rather than a 19”
module.
The AU-SA Access Unit can serve up to 512 Subscriber Units (124 when Data
Encryption is used).
The IDU connects to the network through a standard IEEE 802.3 Ethernet
10/100BaseT (RJ 45) interfaces and is powered from the 110/220 VAC mains.
The indoor unit is connected to the outdoor unit via a Category 5E Ethernet
cable. This cable carries Ethernet traffic between the indoor and the outdoor
units, and also transfers power (54 VDC) and control from the indoor unit to the
outdoor unit.
NOTE
The AU-D/E-SA-ODU and the AU-D/E-BS-ODU are not interchangeable:
The AU-D/E-SA-ODU cannot be used with the BS-AU; the AU-D/E-BS-ODU cannot be used with
the standalone IDU.
System Description
Chapter 1 - System Description
1.3
Subscriber Unit
The Subscriber Unit (SU) installed at locations that require service, enables the
customer data connection to the Access Unit. The Subscriber Unit provides an
efficient platform for high speed Internet and Intranet
services, supporting single or multiple end users. The
use of packet switching technology provides the user
with a connection to the network that is always on,
enabling immediate access to services.
The Subscriber Unit comprise a desktop or wallmountable Indoor Unit (IDU) and an outdoor unit that
contains the processing and radio modules. Several ODU types are available to
support different requirements, as detailed in Table 1-2:
Table 1-2: Subscriber Unit ODU Types
SU Type
Antenna Description
SU-A-ODU
Vertically polarized high-gain flat antenna integrated on the front panel
SU-E-ODU
A connection to an external antenna
The Subscriber Unit supports a gross rate of up to 27 Mbps and can bridge a full
LAN.
The IDU provides the interface to the user’s equipment and is powered from the
110/220 VAC mains. The customer's data equipment is connected via a standard
IEEE 802.3 Ethernet 10/100BaseT (RJ 45) interface. The indoor unit is
connected to the outdoor unit via a Category 5E Ethernet cable. This cable
carries Ethernet traffic between the indoor and the outdoor units, and also
transfers power (54 VDC) and control from the indoor unit to the outdoor unit.
BreezeACCESS 4900 System Manual
Networking Equipment
1.4
Networking Equipment
The Base Station equipment is connected to the backbone through standard data
communication and telecommunication equipment. The 10/100BaseT ports of
the AU modules can be connected directly to a multi-port router or to an Ethernet
switch connected to a router.
The point-to-point link from the Base Station to the backbone can be either wired
or wireless. Data to the Internet is routed to the backbone through standard
routers.
System Description
Chapter 1 - System Description
1.5
Management Systems
The end-to-end IP-based architecture of the system enables full management of
all components, from any point in the system. BreezeACCESS 4900 components
can be managed using standard management tools through SNMP agents that
implement standard and proprietary MIBs for remote setting of operational modes
and parameters. The same SNMP management tools can also be used to manage
other system components including switches, routers and transmission
equipment. Security features incorporated in BreezeACCESS 4900 units restrict
access for management purposes to specific IP addresses and/or directions, that
is, from the Ethernet and/or wireless link.
In addition, the Ethernet WAN can be used to connect to other Operation Support
Systems including servers, Customer Care systems and AAA (Authentication,
Authorization and Admission) tools.
1.5.1
BreezeCONFIG™
The BreezeCONFIG for BreezeACCESS 4900 utility is an SNMP-based application
designed to manage BreezeACCESS 4900 system components and upgrade unit
software versions. The system administrator can use the BreezeCONFIG utility to
control a large number of units from a single location. In addition, BreezeCONFIG
enables you to load an updated configuration file to multiple units
simultaneously, thus radically reducing the time spent on unit configuration
maintenance.
1.5.2
AlvariSTAR™
AlvariSTAR is a comprehensive Carrier-Class network management system for
Alvarion’s Broadband Wireless Access products-based Networks. AlvariSTAR is
designed for today’s most advanced Network Operation Centers (NOCs), providing
the network Operation, Administration and Maintenance (OA&M) staff and
managers with all the network surveillance, monitoring and configuration
capabilities that they require in order to effectively manage the BWA network
while keeping the resources and expenses at a minimum.
AlvariSTAR is designed to offer the network’s OA&M staff with a unified, scalable
and distributable network management system. The AlvariSTAR system uses a
distributed client-server architecture, which provides a robust, scalable and fully
redundant network management system in which all single points of failure can
be avoided.
BreezeACCESS 4900 System Manual
Management Systems
AlvariSTAR provides the following BWA network management functionality:
Device Discovery
Device Inventory
Topology
Fault Management
Configuration Management
Performance Monitoring
Device embedded software upgrade
Security Management
Northbound interface to other Network Management Systems or OSS.
System Description
Chapter 1 - System Description
1.6
Specifications
1.6.1
Radio
Table 1-3: Radio Specifications
Item
Description
Frequency
4.940 – 4.990 GHz
Operation Mode
Time Division Duplex (TDD)
Channel Bandwidth
10 MHz / 5 MHz
Central Frequency Resolution
5 MHz
Antenna Port
(AU-D-BS/SA-ODU)
N-Type, 50 ohm
Max. Input Power
-40 dBm typical
(at antenna port)
Maximum Output Power
TBD
SU-A-ODU Integral Antenna
20 dBi, 10.5o horizontal x 10.5o vertical,
vertical or horizontal polarization, compliant with EN 302 085
V1.1.1 Range 1, Class TS 1, 2, 3, 4, 5
AU-D Detached Antennas
AU-Ant-4.9G-15-120: 15 dBi, 4.900-5.100 GHz,
124o horizontal x 6.5o vertical sector antenna, vertical
polarization, compliant with EN 302 085 V1.1.2 CS3.
AU-Ant-4.9G-9-Omni: 9 dBi, 4.900-5.100 GHz,
360o horizontal x 8o vertical, vertical polarization.
BreezeACCESS 4900 System Manual
10
Specifications
Table 1-3: Radio Specifications
Item
Description
Sensitivity, typical (dBm at
antenna port, PER<10%)
Modulation
Level1
Sensitivity
5 MHz bandwidth
Sensitivity
10 MHz bandwidth
Min. SNR
-93 dBm
-92 dBm
6 dB
-92 dBm
-91 dBm
7 dB
-91 dBm
-89 dBm
9 dB
-89 dBm
-87 dBm
11 dB
-86 dBm
-84 dBm
14 dB
-82 dBm
-80 dBm
18 dB
-77 dBm
-76 dBm
22 dB
-75 dBm
-74 dBm
23 dB
Modulation
OFDM modulation, 64 FFT points; BPSK, QPSK, QAM16, QAM64
Modulation Level indicates the radio transmission rate and the modulation scheme. Modulation Level 1 is for the
lowest radio rate and modulation scheme.
1.6.2
Data Communication
Table 1-4: Data Communication
Item
Description
Standard compliance
IEEE 802.3 CSMA/CD
VLAN Support
Based on IEEE 802.1Q
Layer-2 Traffic Prioritization
Based on IEEE 802.1p
Layer-3 Traffic Prioritization
IP Precedence ToS (RFC791)
DSCP (RFC2474)
Layer 4 Traffic Prioritization
UDP/TCP destination ports
System Description
11
Chapter 1 - System Description
1.6.3
Configuration and Management
Table 1-5: Configuration and Management
Type
Management
Standard
Monitor program via Telnet
SNMP
Configuration upload/download
Management Access
Management access protection
From Wired LAN, Wireless Link
Multilevel password
Configuration of remote access direction (from
Ethernet only, from wireless link only or from both)
Configuration of IP addresses of authorized stations
Security
Authentication messages encryption option
Data encryption option
Selection between WEP, AES/OCB and AES/CCM
128-bit encryption standards
ESSID
SNMP Agents
SNMP ver 1 client
MIB II, Bridge MIB, Private BreezeACCESS MIB
Allocation of IP parameters
Software upgrade
Configurable or automatic (DHCP client)
FTP
TFTP
Configuration upload/download
FTP
TFTP
BreezeACCESS 4900 System Manual
12
Specifications
1.6.4
Standards Compliance, General
Table 1-6: Standards Compliance, General
Type
Standard
EMC
FCC Part 15 class B
Safety
UL 60950-1
Radio
FCC Part 90
FCC Part 15
System Description
13
Chapter 1 - System Description
1.6.5
Physical and Electrical
1.6.5.1
Subscriber Unit
1.6.5.1.1
Mechanical
Table 1-7: Mechanical Specifications, Subscriber Unit
Unit
Structure
General
An IDU indoor unit and an SU-A-ODU
outdoor unit with an integral antenna
IDU PS1073
Plastic box (black), desktop or wall
Dimensions (cm)
Weight (kg)
14 x 6.6 x 3.5
0.3
43.2 x 30.2 x 5.9
1.85
mountable
SU-A-ODU
Metal box plus an integral antenna in
a cut diamond shape in a plastic
enclosure, poll or wall mountable
1.6.5.1.2
Connectors
Table 1-8: Connectors, Subscriber Unit
Unit
Connector
IDU
ETHERNET
Description
10/100BaseT Ethernet (RJ-45)
Cable connection to a PC: crossed
Cable connection to a hub: straight
SU-A-ODU
RADIO
10/100BaseT Ethernet (RJ-45)
2 embedded LEDs in PS1036
AC IN
3 pin AC power plug
INDOOR
10/100BaseT Ethernet (RJ-45), protected by a
waterproof sealing assembly
BreezeACCESS 4900 System Manual
14
Specifications
1.6.5.1.3
Electrical
Table 1-9: Electrical Specifications, Subscriber Unit
Unit
Details
General
Power consumption: 25W
IDU
AC power input: 85-265 VAC, 50-60 Hz
SU-A-ODU
54 VDC from the IDU over the indoor-outdoor Ethernet cable
System Description
15
Chapter 1 - System Description
1.6.5.2
Modular Base Station Equipment
1.6.5.2.1
Mechanical
Table 1-10: Mechanical Specifications, Modular Base Station Equipment
Unit
Structure
Dimensions (cm)
Weight (kg)
BS-SH
19" rack (3U) or
13 x 48.2 x 25.6
4.76
desktop
BS-PS-DC
DC power supply
module
12.9 x 7.0 x 25.3
1.2
BS-PS-AC
AC power supply
module
12.9 x 7.0 x 25.3
1.2
BS-AU
Indoor module of the
AU-D-BS access unit
12.9 x 3.5 x 25.5
0.15
AU-D-BS-ODU
pole or wall mountable
30.6 x 12.0 x 4.7
1.85
AU-Ant-4.9G-15-120
2"-4" pole mountable
55 x 25 x 1.7
1.5
BreezeACCESS 4900 System Manual
16
Specifications
1.6.5.2.2
Connectors
Table 1-11: Connectors, Modular Base Station Equipment
Unit
Connector
Description
BS-AU
10/100 BaseT
10/100BaseT Ethernet (RJ-45) with 2 embedded
LEDs.
Cable connection to a PC: crossed
Cable connection to a hub: straight
RADIO
10/100BaseT Ethernet (RJ-45) with 2 embedded
LEDs
INDOOR
10/100BaseT Ethernet (RJ-45), protected by a
waterproof sealing assembly
ANT
N-Type jack, 50 ohm, lightning protected
BS-PS-AC
AC-IN
3-PIN AC power plug
BS-PS-DC
-48 VDC
3 pin DC D-Type 3 power pins plug
Amphenol 717TWA3W3PHP2V4RRM6
Antenna
RF
N-Type jack (on a 1.5m cable in the Omni-8-5.8)
AU-D-BS-ODU
1.6.5.2.3
Electrical
Table 1-12: Electrical Specifications, Modular Base Station Equipment
Unit
Details
General
240W max. for a fully equipped chassis (1 PS, 6 AU)
BS-PS-AC
AC power input: 85-265 VAC, 47-65 Hz
DC power output: 54 V; 3.3 V
BS-PS-DC
DC power input: -48 VDC nominal (-34 to -72), 10 A max
DC power output: 54 V; 3.3 V
BS-AU
3.3 VDC, 54 VDC from the power supply module(s) via the back plane
AU-D-BS-ODU
54 VDC from the BS-AU over the indoor-outdoor Ethernet cable
AU-D-BS
(IDU+ODU)
Power consumption: 30W
System Description
17
Chapter 1 - System Description
1.6.5.3
Standalone Access Unit
1.6.5.3.1
Mechanical
Table 1-13: Mechanical Specifications, Stand Alone Access Unit
Unit
Structure
Dimensions (cm)
Weight (kg)
General
An IDU indoor unit and an
AU-D-BS-ODU outdoor unit
connected to a detached
antenna
IDU PS1073
Plastic box (black), desktop
or wall mountable
14 x 6.6 x 3.5
0.3
AU-D-SA-ODU
Poll or wall mountable
30.6 x 12 x 4.7
1.85
AU-Ant-4.9G-15-120
2"-4" pole mountable
55 x 25 x 1.7
1.5
AU-Ant-4.9G-9-Omni
1.5”-3” pole mountable
46 cm high, 5.5 cm
0.6
base diameter
1.6.5.3.2
Connectors
Table 1-14: Connectors, Stand Alone Access Unit
Unit
Connector
Description
IDU
ETHERNET
10/100BaseT Ethernet (RJ-45)
Cable connection to a PC: crossed
Cable connection to a hub: straight
RADIO
10/100BaseT Ethernet (RJ-45).
2 embedded LEDs in the PS1036
AU-D-SA-ODU
Antenna
AC IN
3-PIN AC power plug
INDOOR
10/100BaseT Ethernet (RJ-45), protected by a
waterproof sealing assembly
ANT
N-Type jack, 50 ohm, lightning protected
RF
N-Type jack
BreezeACCESS 4900 System Manual
18
Specifications
1.6.5.3.3
Electrical
Table 1-15: Electrical Specifications, Stand Alone Access Unit
Unit
Details
General
Power consumption: 25W
IDU
AC power input: 85-265 VAC, 50-60 Hz
AU-D-SA-ODU
54 VDC from the IDU over the indoor-outdoor Ethernet cable
1.6.5.4
Environmental
Table 1-16: Environmental Specifications
Type
Unit
Details
Operating
temperature
Outdoor units
-40 o C to 55 o C
Indoor equipment
0 o C to 40 o C
Operating
Outdoor units
5%-95% non condensing, weather protected
Indoor equipment
5%-95% non condensing
humidity
System Description
19
2
Chapter 2 - Installation
In This Chapter:
Installation Requirements, page 22
Equipment Positioning Guidelines, page 26
Installing the Outdoor Unit, page 27
Installing the Universal IDU Indoor Unit, page 32
Installing the Modular Base Station Equipment, page 34
Chapter 2 - Installation
2.1
Installation Requirements
This section describes all the supplies required to install the BreezeACCESS 4900
system components and the items included in each installation package.
2.1.1
Packing List
2.1.1.1
Subscriber Unit
The SU installation kit includes the following components:
IDU indoor unit with a wall mounting kit
Mains power cord
Outdoor Unit:
SU-A-ODU outdoor unit with an integrated vertically polarized antenna
OR
SU-E-ODU outdoor unit with a connection to an external antenna
Pole mounting kit for the ODU
20m Category 5E indoor-to-outdoor Ethernet cable with shielded RJ-45
connectors
2.1.1.2
Modular Base Station Equipment
This section describes the items included in the installation packages for each
Modular Base Station system component.
2.1.1.2.1
BS-SH Base Station Chassis
The BS-SH installation kit includes the following components:
BS-SH chassis with blank panels
Rubber legs for optional desktop installation
2.1.1.2.2
AU-D/E-BS Access Unit
The AU-D/E-BS and installation kit includes the following components:
BS-AU Network Interface module
BreezeACCESS 4900 System Manual
22
Installation Requirements
AU-D/E-BS-ODU outdoor unit
Pole mounting kit for the AU-D/E-BS-ODU
In AU-D-BS kits: Antenna, including pole mounting hardware
RF cable
2.1.1.2.3
BS-PS-AC Power Supply
Up to two BS-PS-AC power supply modules can be included in each Base Station
chassis. The BS-PS-AC installation kit includes the following components:
BS-PS-AC power supply module
Mains power cord
2.1.1.2.4
BS-PS-DC Power Supply
Up to two BS-PS-DC power supply modules can be included in each Base Station
chassis. The BS-PS-DC installation kit includes the following components:
BS-PS-DC power supply module
DC power cable
2.1.1.3
AU-D/E-SA Standalone Access Unit
The AU-D/E-SA installation kit includes the following components:
IDU indoor unit with a wall mounting kit
Mains power cord
AU-D/E-SA-ODU outdoor unit with an integrated antenna
Pole mounting kit for the AU-D/E-SA-ODU
In AU-D-SA kits: Antenna, including pole mounting hardware
RF cable
2.1.1.4
Additional Installation Requirements
The following items are also required to install the BreezeACCESS 4900 system
components:
Installation
23
Chapter 2 - Installation
Indoor-to-outdoor Category 5E Ethernet cable with shielded RJ-45 connectors
* (available in different lengths. For more details refer to section 2.1.2)
Ethernet cable (straight for connecting to a hub/switch etc., crossed for
connecting directly to a PC’s NIC)
Crimping tool for RJ-45 connectors
Antenna, for E model units supplied without an antenna
Ground cables with an appropriate termination
Mains plug adapter or termination plug (if the power plug on the supplied AC
power cord does not fit local power outlets)
Portable PC with Ethernet card and Telnet software or BreezeCONFIG for
BreezeACCESS 4900* application and a crossed Ethernet cable
Installation tools and materials, including appropriate means (e.g. a pole) for
installing the outdoor unit.
NOTE
Items marked with an asterisk (*) are available from Alvarion.
2.1.2
Indoor-to-Outdoor Cables
NOTE
The length of the Ethernet cable connecting the indoor unit to the user's equipment, together with
the length of the Indoor-to-Outdoor cable, should not exceed 100 meters.
Use only Category 5E Ethernet cables from approved manufacturers, listed in
Table 2-1. Consult with Alvarion specialists on the suitability of other cables.
BreezeACCESS 4900 System Manual
24
Installation Requirements
Table 2-1: Approved Category 5E Ethernet Cables
Manufacturer
Part Number
Superior Cables Ltd.
www.cvalim.co.il
612098
HES Cabling Systems
www.hescs.com
H5E-00481
Teldor
www.teldor.com
8393204101
Southbay Holdings Limited
TSM2404A0D
11th Fl., 15, Lane 347, Jong Jeng Rd.
Shin Juang City, Taipei County
Taiwan, R.O.C
Attn: Eva Lin
Tel. 886-2-2832 3339
Fax. 886-2-2206 0081
E-mail: eva@south-bay.com.tw
Installation
25
Chapter 2 - Installation
2.2
Equipment Positioning Guidelines
This section provides key guidelines for selecting the optimal installation
locations for the various BreezeACCESS 4900 system components.
CAUTION
ONLY experienced installation professionals who are familiar with local building and safety codes
and, wherever applicable, are licensed by the appropriate government regulatory authorities should
install outdoor units and antennas.
Failure to do so may void the BreezeACCESS 4900 product warranty and may expose the end
user or Service Provider to legal and financial liabilities. Alvarion and its resellers or distributors are
not liable for injury, damage or regulation violations associated with the installation of Outdoor Units
or antennas.
Select the optimal locations for the equipment using the following guidelines:
The outdoor unit can be either pole or wall mounted. Its location should
enable easy access to the unit for installation and testing.
The higher the placement of the antenna, the better the achievable link
quality.
AU-ODU units should be installed as close as possible to the antenna.
The antenna connected to the AU-ODU unit, should be installed so as to
provide coverage to all Subscriber Units (SUs) within its service area.
NOTE
The recommended minimum distance between any two antennas serving adjacent sectors is 2
meters. The recommended minimum distance between two antennas serving opposite cells
(installed back-to-back) is 5 meters.
The antenna of the SU (integrated on the front side of SU-A-ODU and SU-A-HODU unit) should be installed to provide a direct, or near line of sight with the
Base Station antenna. The antenna should be aligned to face the Base
Station.
The indoor equipment should be installed as close as possible to the location
where the indoor-to-outdoor cable enters the building. The location of the
indoor equipment should take into account its connection to a power outlet
and the CPE.
BreezeACCESS 4900 System Manual
26
Installing the Outdoor Unit
2.3
Installing the Outdoor Unit
The following sections describe how to install the outdoor units, including pole
mounting the ODU, and connecting the indoor-to-outdoor, grounding and RF
cables.
NOTE
Ensure that outdoor units, antennas and supporting structures are properly installed to eliminate
any physical hazard to either people or property. Make sure that the installation of the outdoor unit,
antenna and cables is performed in accordance with all relevant national and local building and
safety codes. Even where grounding is not mandatory according to applicable regulation and
national codes, it is highly recommended to ensure that the outdoor unit and the antenna pole
(when using external antenna) are grounded and suitable lightning protection devices are used so
as to provide protection against voltage surges and static charges. In any event, Alvarion is not
liable for any injury, damage or regulation violations associated with or caused by installation,
grounding or lightning protection.
2.3.1
Pole Mounting the Outdoor Unit
The Outdoor Unit can be mounted on a pole using one of the following options:
Special brackets and open-ended bolts are supplied with each unit. There are
two pairs of threaded holes on the back of the unit, enabling the special
brackets to be mounted on diverse pole diameters.
Special grooves on the sides of the unit enable the use of metal bands to
secure the unit to a pole. The bands must be 9/16 inches wide and at least 12
inches long. The metal bands are not included with the installation package.
NOTE
Be sure to mount the unit with the bottom panel, which includes the LED indicators, facing
downward.
Installation
27
Chapter 2 - Installation
Figure 2-1 illustrates the method of mounting an outdoor unit on a pole, using
the brackets and open-ended bolts.
Figure 2-1: 3" Pole Installation Using Special Brackets
NOTE
Be sure to insert the open ended bolts with the grooves pointing outward, as these grooves enable
you to use a screwdriver to fasten the bolts to the unit.
BreezeACCESS 4900 System Manual
28
Installing the Outdoor Unit
2.3.2
Connecting the Grounding and Antenna
Cables
The Grounding screw (marked ╤) is located on the bottom panel of the outdoor
unit. The Antenna RF connector (marked
) is located on the top panel of the
AU-ODU.
To connect the grounding cable:
Connect one end of a grounding cable to the grounding terminal and tighten
the grounding screw firmly.
Connect the other end of the grounding cable to a good ground (earth)
connection.
To connect the RF cable (units with external antenna):
Connect one end of the coaxial RF cable to the RF connector on the top panel
of the unit
Connect the other end of the RF cable to the antenna.
The RF connectors should be properly sealed to protect against rain and
moisture.
Figure 2-2: Bottom Panel of the Outdoor Unit (without the seal assembly)
NOTE
The MAC Address of the unit is marked on both the ODU and the indoor unit (on the print side of
the BS-AU module or on the bottom side of the Universal IDU). If for any reason the ODU is not
used with the IDU with which it was shipped, the MAC Address of the system is in accordance with
the marking on the ODU.
Installation
29
Chapter 2 - Installation
2.3.3
Connecting the Indoor-to-Outdoor Cable
2.3.3.1
Units with an Installed Waterproof Seal
To connect the indoor-to-outdoor cable:
Remove the two screws holding the waterproof seal to the outdoor unit and
remove the waterproof seal.
Unscrew the top nut from the waterproof seal.
Figure 2-3: The Waterproof Seal
Route a straight Category 5E Ethernet cable (8-wire, 24 AWG) through both
the top nut and the waterproof seal.
NOTE
Use only Category 5E 4x2x24# FTP outdoor cables from an approved manufacturer. See list of
approved cables and length limitations in section 2.1.2.
Insert and crimp the RJ-45 connector. Refer to Appendix C for instructions on
preparing the cable.
Connect the Ethernet cable to the outdoor unit RJ-45 connector.
Replace the waterproof seal and then the top nut. Make sure that the external
jack of the cable is well inside the waterproof seal to guarantee a good seal.
Route the cable to the location selected for the indoor equipment.
Assemble an RJ-45 connector with a protective cover on the indoor end of the
indoor-to-outdoor cable.
BreezeACCESS 4900 System Manual
30
Installing the Outdoor Unit
2.3.3.2
Units with a Waterproof Seal Supplied with the Ethernet
Cable
To connect the indoor-to-outdoor cable:
Verify that the o-ring supplied with the cable kit is in place.
Connect the RJ-45 connector of the Ethernet cable to the outdoor unit.
Attach the waterproof seal to the unit. Tighten the top nut.
Route the cable to the location selected for the indoor equipment.
Assemble an RJ-45 connector with a protective cover on the indoor end of the
indoor-to-outdoor cable.
See Appendix C for instructions on preparing the cable.
Installation
31
Chapter 2 - Installation
2.4
Installing the Universal IDU Indoor Unit
The unit can be placed on a desktop or a shelf. Alternatively, it may be wallmounted. The drilling template included with the unit can be used to facilitate
the wall installation process.
The equipment is shipped with a PS1073 IDU, shown in the following figure:
Figure 2-4: IDU PS 1073 Front Panel
The RADIO connector and RESET button are located on the front panel, the
ETHERNET connector is located on the side panel and LEDs are located on the
top panel.
CAUTION
Do not connect the data equipment to the RADIO port. The RADIO port supplies DC power to the
ODU, and this may harm other equipment connected to it.
To install the IDU:
Connect the Indoor-to-Outdoor cable to the RADIO connector, located on the
front panel of the indoor unit.
Connect the power cord to the unit's AC socket, located on the rear panel.
Connect the other end of the power cord to the AC mains. The unit can
operate with AC mains of 100-240 VAC, 50-60 Hz.
NOTE
The color codes of the power cable are as follows:
Brown
Phase
Blue
Neutral
Yellow/Green
Ground
Verify that the POWER LED is lit, indicating that power is supplied to the
unit.
Configure the basic parameters as described in section 3.1.
Connect the 10/100 BaseT ETHERNET connector to the network. The cable
connection should be a straight Ethernet if connecting the indoor unit to a
BreezeACCESS 4900 System Manual
32
Installing the Universal IDU Indoor Unit
hub/switch and a crossed cable if connecting it directly to a PC Network
Interface Card (NIC).
NOTE
The length of the Ethernet cable connecting the indoor unit to the user's equipment, together with
the length of the Indoor-to-Outdoor cable, should not exceed 100 meters.
2.4.1
RESET Button Functionality
Using a sharp object, press the recessed RESET button for a short time to reset
the unit and reboot from the Main version.
The RESET button can also be used for setting the unit to its factory defaults.
Press the button for at least 5 seconds (until the ETH LED of the IDU stops
blinking): the unit will reboot with the factory default configuration.
NOTE
Reset the ODU using the RESET button on the IDU after connecting or reconnecting the indoor
and outdoor units with the indoor-to-outdoor cable.
Installation
33
Chapter 2 - Installation
2.5
Installing the Modular Base Station
Equipment
The following sections describe the slot assignment for the Base Station chassis,
provide illustrated descriptions of the power supply modules and Access Unit
network interface modules, and describe how to install the Base Station
equipment.
2.5.1
BS-SH Slot Assignment
The Base Station chassis comprises ten slots, as shown in Figure 2-5.
Figure 2-5: BS-SH Chassis Slot Assignment
To enable power supply redundancy, two BS-PS power supply modules can be
installed in the wider side slots. If a single power supply module is used, it can be
inserted into either one of the two available slots.
The remaining eight slots can hold up to six BS-AU modules. Unused slots
should remain covered until required.
The design of the BS-SH supports collocation of BreezeACCESS 4900 Access
Units with Access Units belonging to BreezeACCESS VL family or other
BreezeACCESS families using GFSK modulation. It supports any mixture of
BS-AU 4900 modules with BreezeACCESS VL or BreezeACCESS GFSK BS-AU
modules, including an optional BS-GU-GPS module. If Access Units belonging to
BreezeACCESS GFSK families are used, then it is necessary to use two power
supply modules: one BS-PS (AC or DC) power supply for the BreezeACCESS 4900
Access Units and one BS-PS GFSK (AC or DC) for the BreezeACCESS GFSK
BreezeACCESS 4900 System Manual
34
Installing the Modular Base Station Equipment
Access Units. The same BS-PS power supply modules can be used to power also
BreezeACCESS VL BS-AU modules.
2.5.2
BS-PS-AC Power Supply Module
The BS-PS-AC is an AC to DC converter that provides power to all the BS-AU
modules installed in the BS-SH chassis. Figure 2-6 shows the BS-PS-AC front
panel.
Figure 2-6: BS-PS-AC Front Panel
The BS-PS-AC includes a power input connector, marked AC IN, for connecting
the AC power cord to the mains.
The ON/OFF Power Switch controls the flow of mains power to the power supply
module.
Installation
35
Chapter 2 - Installation
Table 2-2: BS-PS LED Functionality
Name
Description
54V
Green LED. Indicates that the 54V power supply module is OK
3.3V
Green LED. Indicates that the 3.3V power supply module is OK
OVER TEMP
Red LED. Indicates an over temperature condition in the power supply
module
2.5.3
BS-PS-DC Power Supply Module
The BS-PS-DC is a DC-to-DC converter that provides power to all the BS-AU
modules installed in the BS-SH chassis. Figure 2-7 shows the BS-PS-DC front
panel.
Figure 2-7: BS-PS-DC Front Panel
The BS-PS-DC provides a power input connector, marked -48VDC, for connecting
the -48 VDC power source to the module.
The color codes of the cable wires are as follows:
Black (pin 2): 48 VDC
BreezeACCESS 4900 System Manual
36
Installing the Modular Base Station Equipment
Red (pin 1): + (Return)
Shield (pin 3)
The ON/OFF Power Switch controls the flow of mains power to the power supply
module.
The functionality of the LEDs is described in Table 2-2.
2.5.4
BS-AU Network Interface Module
Figure 2-8 shows the front panel of the BS-AU Access Unit Network Interface
module.
Figure 2-8: BS-AU Front Panel
The BS-AU provides the following interfaces:
10/100 BaseT: A 10/100BaseT Ethernet connector for connecting the BS-AU
to the network. A straight Ethernet cable should be used to connect the
module to a hub, router or switch.
RADIO: A 10/100BaseT Ethernet connector for connecting the BS-AU to an
AU-ODU outdoor unit.
Installation
37
Chapter 2 - Installation
CAUTION
Do not connect the data equipment to the RADIO port. The RADIO port supplies DC power to the
ODU, and this may harm other equipment connected to it.
The recessed RESET switch on the front panel is for resetting the outdoor unit.
2.5.5
Installing the BS-SH Chassis and Modules
This section describes how to install the power supply and Access Unit network
interface modules in the Base Station chassis.
To install the BS SH chassis and modules:
Install the BS-SH chassis in a 19” cabinet. To prevent over-heating, leave a
free space of at least 1U between the upper/lower covers of the BS-SH chassis
and other units in the cabinet.
OR
Place the BS-SH chassis on an appropriate shelf or table. When mounting the
BS-SH on a shelf or table, attach the rubber legs supplied with the unit.
Connect one end of a grounding cable to the ground terminal located on the
rear panel of the BS-SH chassis and firmly tighten the grounding screw.
Connect the opposite end of the grounding cable to a ground connection or to
the cabinet, if applicable.
Carefully insert the BS-PS power supply and the BS-AU modules into the
relevant slots and push firmly until they are securely locked. Before insertion,
verify that the switches of all BS-PS modules are in the OFF position. Refer to
section 2.5.1 for a description of the slot assignment.
Close the captive screws attached to each module.
Place blank covers over all of the unused slots.
Connect the indoor-to outdoor cable(s) to the RADIO connector(s) of the
BS-AU module(s).
If a BS-PS-DC power supply is used, connect the DC power cord to the -48
VDC IN jack of the BS-PS-DC power supply. If a redundant power supply
module is installed, connect a DC power cord also to the second DC power
module. Connect the power cord(s) to the -48 VDC power source, as follows:
Connect the black wire to the 48 VDC contact of the power source.
Connect the red wire to the + (Return) contact.
Connect the shield to the ground.
BreezeACCESS 4900 System Manual
38
Installing the Modular Base Station Equipment
If a BS-PS-AC power supply is used, connect the AC power cord to the AC IN
jack of the BS-PS-AC power supply. If a redundant power supply module is
installed, connect an AC power cord also to the second AC power module.
Connect the power cord(s) to the mains outlet.
10 Switch the BS-PS-AC/DC power supplies to ON. Verify that all power
indicator LEDs on the BS-PS-AC/DC front panel are ON and that the
OVERTEMP alarm indicator is off. Refer to Table 2-2 for a description of these
LEDs.
11 Configure the basic parameters in all BS-AU modules as described in section
3.1.
12 Connect the 10/100 BaseT LAN connector(s) to the network. The cable
connection should be straight Ethernet if connecting the indoor unit to a
hub/switch and a crossed cable if connecting it directly to a PC Network
Interface Card (NIC).
NOTE
The length of each of the Ethernet cables (the cable connecting the indoor unit to the user's
equipment and the Indoor-to-Outdoor cable) should not exceed 100 meters.
Reset the unit using the RESET button after connecting or reconnecting the indoor and outdoor
units with the indoor-to-outdoor cable.
Installation
39
3
Chapter 3 - Commissioning
About This Chapter:
Configuring Basic Parameters, page 42
Aligning the Subscriber Unit Antenna, page 45
Configuring the Subscriber Unit’s Maximum Modulation Level, page 46
Operation Verification, page 48
Chapter 3 - Commissioning
3.1
Configuring Basic Parameters
After completing the installation process, as described in the preceding chapter,
the basic parameters must be configured to ensure that the unit operates
correctly. After the basic parameters have been configured, additional parameters
can be remotely configured via the Ethernet port or the wireless link using Telnet
or SNMP management, or by loading a configuration file.
Refer to section 4.1 for information on how to access the Monitor program using
Telnet and how to use it.
The Basic Configuration menu includes all the parameters necessary for the
initial installation and operation of Subscriber and Access Units. In many
installations, most of these parameters should not be changed from their default
values. The basic parameters and their default values are listed in Table 3-1.
Refer to Chapter 4 for detailed information on the applicable parameters.
Table 3-1: Basic Parameters
Parameter
Default Value
Comment
Ethernet Port Negotiation Mode (in
Unit Control Parameters)
Auto Negotiation
IP Address
10.0.0.1
Subnet Mask
255.0.0.0
Default Gateway Address
0.0.0.0
DHCP Options
Disable
Access to DHCP
AU: From Ethernet Only
SU: From Wireless Only
ESSID
ESSID1
Sub-Band Select
Frequency Subset Definition (SU)
A (All)
42
The list of frequencies is
in accordance with the
Sub-Band.
BreezeACCESS 4900 System Manual
Configuring Basic Parameters
Table 3-1: Basic Parameters
Parameter
Default Value
Comment
Tx Power for Modulation Levels 1
to 5,
Dependent on Sub-Band
Tx Power cannot be
higher than the applicable
Maximum Tx Power
parameter.
Dependent on Sub-Band
Max Tx Power cannot be
Tx Power for Modulation Level 6,
Tx Power for Modulation Level 7,
Tx Power for Modulation Level 8
Maximum Tx Power for Modulation
higher than the upper
limit according to the
Sub-Band in use.
Levels 1 to 5 (SU),
Maximum Tx Power for Modulation
Level 6 (SU),
Maximum Tx Power for Modulation
Level 7 (SU)
Maximum Tx Power for Modulation
Level 8 (SU)
Tx Power (AU)
On
Antenna Gain (units with external
antenna)
According to the antenna
supplied with the unit and
the Sub-Band.
ATPC Option
Enable
Best AU Support (SU)
Disable
Preferred AU MAC Address (SU)
00-00-00-00-00-00 (none)
Cell Distance Mode (AU)
Automatic
Maximum Cell Distance (AU)
0 (No Compensation)
Maximum Modulation Level (SU)
VLAN ID-Management
65535
Authentication Algorithm
Open System
If set to “Not Set Yet”,
must be configured
according to actual value,
taking into account
cable’s attenuation.
Applicable only when
Best AU Support is
enabled.
Refer to section 3.3.
Commissioning
43
Chapter 3 - Commissioning
Table 3-1: Basic Parameters
Parameter
Default Value
Data Encryption Option
Disable
Security Mode
WEP
Default Multicast Key (AU)
Key 1
Promiscuous Authentication (AU)
Disable
Default Key (SU)
Key 1
Key 1 to Key 4
00……0 (32 zeros,
meaning no key)
Comment
NOTE
Some parameters are changed to their new values only after reset (refer to Appendix E for more
details). After the basic parameters are configured, the unit should be reset in order to activate the
new configuration.
44
BreezeACCESS 4900 System Manual
Aligning the Subscriber Unit Antenna
3.2
Aligning the Subscriber Unit Antenna
The SNR bar display is located on the bottom panel of the outdoor unit. The ten
LEDs indicate the quality of the received signal. The higher the number of green
LEDs indicating On, the higher the quality of the received signal. This section
describes how to align the Subscriber Unit antenna using the SNR bar display.
NOTE
Antenna alignment using the SNR bar display is possible only after the Subscriber Unit is
associated with an Access Unit. The associated Access Unit must be operational and the basic
Subscriber Unit parameters must be correctly configured. Otherwise, the unit will not be able to
synchronize with the Access Unit. As the SNR measurement is performed on received frames, its
results are meaningless unless the Subscriber Unit is associated with an Access Unit.
To align the Subscriber Unit antenna:
Align the antenna by pointing it in the general direction of the Base Station.
Verify that the power indication of the unit is On.
Verify that the W-LINK LED of the ODU is On, indicating that the unit is
associated with an Access Unit. If the W-LINK LED is Off, check that the
ESSID and Frequency parameters are correctly configured. If the SU is still
not associated with the AU, increase the transmit power level to its maximum
value. If the unit is still not associated with the AU, improve the quality of the
link by changing the direction of the antenna or by placing the antenna at a
higher or alternate location.
Rotate the antenna until the maximum SNR reading is achieved, where at
least 1 green LED is on. If you encounter prolonged difficulty in illuminating
the minimum required number of green LEDs, try to improve the reception
quality by placing the antenna at a higher point or in an alternate location.
Ensure that the front of the antenna is always facing the Base Station.
However, in certain conditions, such as when the line of site to the Base
Station is hampered, better reception may be achieved using a reflected
signal. In this case, the antenna is not always directed toward the Base
Station.
Secure the unit firmly to the pole.
NOTE
In some cases, the antenna may need to be tilted to ensure that the level at which the SU receives
transmissions from the AU (and vice versa) is not too high. As a rule of thumb, if the SU is located
at a distance of less than 300 meters from the AU, it is recommended to up-tilt the antenna by
approximately 10° to 15°. To guarantee a safety margin from the saturation level (received signal
of –40 dBm at the antenna port), the SNR should not be higher than 50 dB. The orange LED of the
SNR bar indicates that the SNR is higher than 50 dB.
Commissioning
45
Chapter 3 - Commissioning
3.3
Configuring the Subscriber Unit’s
Maximum Modulation Level
This section describes how to configure the maximum modulation level for
Subscriber Units.
NOTE
If the unit is associated with the AU, then the final configuration of the Maximum Modulation Level
parameter may be performed remotely, for example, from the site of the AU or from another site.
To configure the Maximum Modulation Level:
If the SNR of the SU at the AU is too low, it is recommended that you
configure the Maximum Modulation Level parameter to a value that is lower
than the maximum supported by the unit. This can decrease the number of
retransmissions due to attempts to transmit at modulation levels that are too
high for the actual quality of the link.
Check the SNR of the SU at the AU. You can use Telnet to view the SNR
values in the MAC Address Database, which can be accessed from the Site
Survey menu. If the ATPC algorithm is not enabled in both AU and SU, the
test should be done with the Initial Power Level at the SU configured to its
maximum value. If the SNR is lower than the values required for the
maximum modulation level according to Table 3-2, it is recommended that
you decrease the value of the Maximum Modulation Level.
NOTE
The SNR measurement at the AU is accurate only when receiving transmissions from the
applicable SU. If necessary, use the Ping Test utility in the Site Survey menu to verify data
transmission.
46
Configure the Maximum Modulation Level according to Table 3-2, using the
typical SNR values. It is recommended that a 2 dB margin be added to
compensate for possible measurement inaccuracy or variance in the quality of
the link.
BreezeACCESS 4900 System Manual
Configuring the Subscriber Unit’s Maximum Modulation Level
Table 3-2: Recommended Maximum Modulation Level
SNR
Maximum Modulation Level
SNR > 23 dB
21 dB < SNR < 23 dB
16 dB < SNR < 21 dB
13 dB < SNR < 16 dB
10 dB < SNR < 13 dB
8 dB < SNR < 10 dB
7 dB < SNR < 8 dB
6 dB < SNR < 7 dB
Commissioning
47
Chapter 3 - Commissioning
3.4
Operation Verification
The following sections describe how to verify the correct functioning of the
Outdoor Unit, Indoor Unit, Ethernet connection and data connectivity.
3.4.1
Outdoor Unit Verification
To verify the correct operation of the Outdoor Unit, examine the LED indicators
located on the bottom panel of the outdoor unit.
The following tables list the provided LEDs and their associated indications.
NOTE
Verifying the correct operation of the Outdoor Unit using the LEDs, as described below, is only
possible after the configuration and alignment processes are completed.
Table 3-3: AU-ODU LEDs
Name
Description
W-LINK
Wireless Link
Indictor
Functionality
Green – Unit is associated with one or
more SUs
Blinking red – No associations
Off – Wireless link is disabled
Status
Self-test and power
indication
Green – Power is available and
self-test passed.
Blinking Amber – Testing (not ready for
operation)
Red – Self-test failed – fatal error
ETH
48
Ethernet activity/
connectivity
indication
Green –Ethernet link detected.
Amber – No Ethernet connectivity between
the indoor and outdoor units.
BreezeACCESS 4900 System Manual
Operation Verification
Table 3-4: SU-ODU LEDs
Name
Description
W-LINK
Wireless Link
Indictor
Functionality
Green – Unit is associated with an AU,
no wireless link activity
Blinking Green – Data received or
transmitted on the wireless link.
Blinking rate is proportional to wireless
traffic rate
Off – Wireless link is disabled
Status
Self-test and power
indication
Green – Power is available and
self-test passed.
Blinking Amber – Testing (not ready for
operation)
Red – Self-test failed – fatal error
ETH
Ethernet activity/
connectivity
indication
Green – Ethernet link between the
indoor and outdoor units is detected,
no activity
Blinking Green – Ethernet connectivity
is OK, with traffic on the port. Blinking
rate proportional to traffic rate.
Red – No Ethernet connectivity
between the indoor and outdoor units.
SNR BAR
(SU-RA)
Received signal
strength Indication
Red LED: Signal is too low
(SNR<4 dB)
8 green LEDs: Quality of the received
signal
Orange LED: Signal is too high
(SNR > 50 dB)
Commissioning
49
Chapter 3 - Commissioning
Table 3-5: SU-ODU SNR Bar LED Functionality
SNR Bar LEDs
SNR (typical)
LED 1 (red) is On
Signal is too low (SNR < 4 dB)
LED 2 (green) is On
SNR > 4 dB
LEDs 2 to 3 (green) are On
SNR > 8 dB
LEDs 2 to 4 (green) are On
SNR > 13 dB
LEDs 2 to 5 (green) are On
SNR > 19 dB
LEDs 2 to 6 (green) are On
SNR > 26 dB
LEDs 2 to 7 (green) are On
SNR > 31 dB
LEDs 2 to 8 (green) are On
SNR > 38 dB
LEDs 2 to 9 (green) are On
SNR > 44 dB
LEDs 2 to 9 (green) and 10 (orange) are On
Signal is too high (SNR > 50 dB)
50
BreezeACCESS 4900 System Manual
Operation Verification
3.4.2
Indoor Unit Verification
To verify the correct operation of the indoor equipment, examine the LED
indicators located on the top panel of the SU IDU and AU IDU units, or on the
front panel of the BS-AU module.
Table 3-6 provides information for the BS-AU IDU LEDs. Table 3-7 lists the LEDs
of the PS1073 IDU and their associated indications.
Table 3-6: BS-AU LEDs
Name
Description
W-LINK
Wireless link activity
Functionality
Green - At least one SU is associated.
Blinking Red - No SU is associated.
Off - Wireless link is disabled.
ODU CURRENT
CONSUMPTION
Current Consumption of
the Outdoor Unit
Red - over current.
Blinking Red - open circuit or below
anticipated current consumption.
Green - within tolerance.
ODU STATUS
Outdoor Unit Self-test
Green - Self test passed and ODU
ready for operation.
Blinking Amber - Testing (not ready
for operation)
Red - fatal failure.
IDU PWR
ALARM
Power indication for the
Indoor Unit
Green - IDU power is OK.
Indoor Unit Alarm
Red - a fatal failure indication.
Indication
Off - IDU is functioning properly.
Off - no power is supplied to the IDU.
Commissioning
51
Chapter 3 - Commissioning
Table 3-7: PS1073 SU IDU / AU-SA IDU LEDs
Name
Description
POWER
Power Indication
Functionality
Green - IDU power is OK
Off - No power or power failure
ETH
Self test and end-toend Ethernet
connectivity
Off - No Ethernet connectivity has
been detected between the outdoor
unit and the device connected to the
indoor unit.
Green - Self-test passed and Ethernet
connection confirmed by the outdoor
unit (Ethernet integrity check passed).
3.4.3
Verifying the Ethernet Connection (Modular
Base station)
After connecting the unit to an Ethernet outlet, verify that the Ethernet Integrity
Indicator, which is the yellow LED embedded in the 10/100 BaseT connector, is
on. This indicates that the unit is connected to an Ethernet segment. The
Ethernet Activity Indicator, which is the green embedded LED, should blink
whenever the unit receives or transmits traffic on the 10/100 BaseT port.
3.4.4
Verifying the Indoor-to-Outdoor Connection
(Modular Base Station)
After connecting the unit to an Ethernet outlet, verify that the Ethernet Integrity
Indicator, which is the yellow LED embedded in the RADIO connector, is on. This
indicates that the unit has detected an Ethernet link connection. The Ethernet
Activity Indicator, which is the green embedded LED, should blink whenever the
unit receives or transmits traffic on the RADIO port.
3.4.5
Verifying Data Connectivity
To verify data connectivity, from the end-user’s PC or from a portable PC
connected to the unit, ping the Access Unit, or try to connect to the Internet.
52
BreezeACCESS 4900 System Manual
4
Chapter 4 - Operation and Administration
In This Chapter:
Working with the Monitor Program, page 54
Menus and Parameters, page 57
Chapter 4 - Operation and Administration
4.1
Working with the Monitor Program
4.1.1
Accessing the Monitor Program Using Telnet
Connect a PC to the Ethernet port, using a crossed cable.
Configure the PC's IP parameters to enable connectivity with the unit. The
default IP address is 10.0.0.1.
Run the Telnet program. The Select Access Level menu is displayed.
Select the required access level, depending on your specific access rights. A
password entry request is displayed. Table 4-1 lists the default passwords for
each of the access levels.
Table 4-1: Default Passwords
Access Rights
Password
Read-Only
public
Installer
user
Administrator
private
NOTE
Following three unsuccessful login attempts (using incorrect passwords), the monitor program is
blocked for several minutes. To enable access to the monitor program during that time, the unit
must be reset via SNMP or by disconnecting/reconnecting power.
Enter your password and press Enter. The Main Menu is displayed as shown
in Figure 4-1. The unit type, SW version number and SW release date
displayed in the Main Menu vary according to the selected unit and SW
version.
BreezeACCESS 4900 System Manual
54
Working with the Monitor Program
BreezeACCESS 4900/AU-SA-4900
Official Release Version – 3.2.3
Release Date: June 14 2005, 17:10:21
Main Menu
==========
1 – Info Screens
2 – Unit Control
3 - Basic Configuration
4 – Site Survey
5 - Advanced Configuration
x - Exit
>>>
Figure 4-1: Main Menu (Administrator Level)
NOTE
If the Telnet session is not terminated properly; for example, if you simply close the window, the
monitor program is blocked for several minutes. To enable access to the monitor program during
that time, the unit must be reset via SNMP or by disconnecting/reconnecting power.
The display of the Main Menu varies depending on the user's access level, as
follows.
For users with read only access rights, only the Info Screens option is
displayed. Users with this access level are not able to access the Unit Control,
Basic Configuration, Site Survey and Advanced Configuration menus.
For users with Installer access rights, the first four menu items, Info Screens,
Unit Control, Basic Configuration and Site Survey, are displayed. Users with
this access level are not able to access the Advanced Configuration menu.
For users with Administrator access rights, the full Main Menu is displayed.
These users can access all menu items.
4.1.2
Common Operations
The following describes the standard operations used when working with the
Monitor program.
Type an option number to open or activate the option. In certain cases you
may need to click Enter.
Click Esc to exit a menu or option.
Operation and Administration
55
Chapter 4 - Operation and Administration
NOTE
The program is automatically terminated following a determined period of inactivity. The default
time out is 5 minutes and is configured with the Log Out Timer parameter.
In some cases, to activate any configuration changes, you must reset the unit.
Certain settings are automatically activated without having to reset the unit.
Refer to Appendix E for information on which parameters are run time
configurable, which means that the unit need not be reset for the parameter to
take effect, and which parameters do require that the unit be reset.
BreezeACCESS 4900 System Manual
56
Menus and Parameters
4.2
Menus and Parameters
The following sections describe the menus and parameters provided by the
Monitor program.
4.2.1
Main Menu
The Main Menu enables to access the following menus, depending on your access
level, as described in section 4.1.
Info Screens: Provides a read only display of current parameter values.
Available at all access levels.
Unit Control: Enables to access general operations, such as resetting the
unit, reverting to factory default parameters, changing passwords and
switching between software versions. Available at the Installer and
Administrator access levels.
Basic Configuration: Enables to access the set of parameters that are
configured during the installation process. These parameters are also
available in the Advanced Configuration menu. Available at the Installer and
Administrator access levels.
Site Survey: Enables to activate certain tests and view various system
counters. Available at the Installer and Administrator access levels.
Advanced Configuration: Enables to access all system parameters, including
the Basic Configuration parameters. Available only at the Administrator access
level.
4.2.2
Info Screens Menu
The Info Screens menu enables you to view the current values of various
parameter sets. The parameter sets are identical to the main parameter groups in
the configuration menus. You can view a specific parameter set or choose to view
all parameters at once. While this menu is available at all access levels, some
security related parameters including the encryption Keys, ESSID and Operator
ESSID are only displayed to users with Administrator access rights.
The Info Screens menu includes the following options:
Show Unit Status
Show Basic Configuration
Operation and Administration
57
Chapter 4 - Operation and Administration
Show Advanced Configuration
Show Country Dependent Parameters
Show All Parameters
4.2.2.1
Show Unit Status
The Show Unit Status menu is a read only menu that displays the current values
of the following parameters:
Unit Name: As defined in the Unit Control menu.
Unit Type: Identifies the unit's function: AU-BS (a modular access unit), AUSA (a stand-alone access unit), or SU-BD (a subscriber unit that supports a
gross CPE rate of 27 Mbps and a full LAN).
Unit MAC Address: The unit's unique IEEE MAC address.
Current Number of Associations (AU only): The total number of SUs
associated with this AU. This number may include units that are not
currently active as there is no aging algorithm for associated SUs.
NOTE
An SU is only removed from the list of associated SUs under the following conditions:
A SNAP frame is received from another AU indicating that the SU is now associated with the
other AU.
The SU failed to respond to a certain number of consecutive frames transmitted by the AU and
is considered to have "aged out".
Number of Associations Since Last Reset: For SUs - displays the total
number of associations with any AU since the last reset, including duplicate
associations with the same AU. For AUs - displays the number of SUs that
have associated with the AU since the last reset, including duplicate
associations with the same SU.
Unit Status (SU only): The current status of the SU. There are two status
options:
SCANNING: The SU is searching for an AU with which to associate.
ASSOCIATED: The SU is associated with an AU.
BreezeACCESS 4900 System Manual
58
Menus and Parameters
AU MAC Address (SU only): The MAC address of the AU with which the unit
is currently associated. If the unit is not associated with any AU, the address
defaults to the IEEE broadcast address, which is FF-FF-FF-FF-FF-FF.
Unit Hardware Version: The version of the outdoor unit hardware.
Unit BOOT Version: The version of the BOOT SW.
Time Since Last Reset
Flash Versions:
Running from: Shows whether the unit is running from the Main or from
the Shadow Version.
Main Version File Name: The name of the compressed file (with a “.bz”
extension) of the version currently defined as the main version.
Main Version Number: The software version currently defined as the main
version.
Shadow Version File Name: The name of the compressed file (with a “.bz”
extension) of the version currently defined as the shadow (backup) version.
Shadow Version Number: The software version currently defined as the
shadow (backup) version.
Radio Band: The radio band of the unit.
Log Out Timer: The value of the Log Out Timer as defined in the Unit Control
menu.
Ethernet Port Negotiation Mode: The Ethernet port negotiation mode as
defined in the Unit Control menu.
Ethernet Port State: The actual state of the Ethernet port.
Operation and Administration
59
Chapter 4 - Operation and Administration
FTP Parameters: General FTP parameters (common to SW Version Download,
Configuration File Upload/Download and Event File Upload using FTP):
FTP Client IP Address
FTP Client IP Mask
FTP Server IP Address
FTP Gateway IP Address
FTP User Name
FTP Password
FTP Software Download Parameters: The parameters for SW download
using FTP, as defined in Unit Control menu.
FTP Source Directory
FTP SW Version File Name
Configuration File Download/Upload Parameters: The parameters for
Configuration file upload/download using FTP, as defined in the Unit Control
menu.
Configuration File Name
Configuration File Source Directory
Operator Defaults File Name
FTP Log File Upload Parameters: The parameters for Event Log file upload
using FTP, as defined in the Unit Control menu.
FTP Log File Name
FTP Log File Destination Directory
Event Log Policy
4.2.2.2
Show Basic Configuration
The Show Basic Configuration menu is a read only menu that displays the
current values of the parameters included in the Basic Configuration menu.
BreezeACCESS 4900 System Manual
60
Menus and Parameters
4.2.2.3
Show Advanced Configuration
The Show Advanced Configuration menu enables to access the read only sub
menus that display the current values of the parameters included in the
applicable sub menus of the Advanced Configuration menu.
4.2.2.4
Show Country Dependent Parameters
The Country Dependent Parameters displays the parameters that are afftected by
applicable regulations. BreezeACCESS 4900 supports two sets of frequencies
(Sub-Bands). For each of these Sub-Bands, there is a set of parameters that
reflects the applicable radio regulations. In addition, there are several general
parameters that reflect availability of various security options. The Country
Dependent Parameters include the following:
Country Code: 1022 – FCC 4.9 GHz.
Data Encryption Support: Supported.
AES Encryption Support: Supported.
Authentication Encryption Support: Supported.
Sub-Band Dependent Parameters:
Table 4-2: Sub-Band Dependent Parameters
Parameter
Sub-Band 1
Sub-Band 2
Sub-Band ID
Frequencies
4947.5 - 4982.5 MHz,
5 MHz steps
4947.5 - 4982.5 MHz,
5 MHz steps
Allowed Bandwidth
10 MHz
5 MHz
Regulation Max Tx Power at
Antenna Port
20 dBm
17 dBm
Regulation Max EIRP
AU: 46 dBm
AU: 43 dBm
SU: No Limit
SU: No Limit
Min Modulation Level
Max Modulation Level
Burst Mode
Enabled
Enabled
Operation and Administration
61
Chapter 4 - Operation and Administration
Table 4-2: Sub-Band Dependent Parameters
Parameter
Sub-Band 1
Sub-Band 2
Maximum Burst Duration
10 milliseconds
10 milliseconds
DFS Option
Not Supported
Not Supported
Minimum HW Revision Support
New Country Code files can be uploaded remotely using TFTP (see Appendix B).
4.2.2.5
Show All Parameters
The Show All Parameters menu is a read only menu that displays the current
values of all status and configuration parameters.
NOTE
The values of some security related parameters, including the encryption Keys, ESSID and
Operator ESSID, are available only with Administrator access rights.
4.2.3
Unit Control Menu
The Unit Control menu enables configuring control parameters for the unit. The
Unit Control menu includes the following options:
Reset Unit
Default Settings
Change Unit Name
Change Password
Flash Memory Control
SW Version Download
Configuration File Upload/Download
Log Out Timer
Ethernet Port Negotiation Mode
Change System Location
BreezeACCESS 4900 System Manual
62
Menus and Parameters
Event Log Menu
Feature Upgrade
4.2.3.1
Reset Unit
The Reset Unit option enables resetting the unit. After reset, any modifications
made to the system parameters are applied.
4.2.3.2
Default Settings
The Set defaults submenu enables resetting the system parameters to a
predefined set of defaults or saving the current configuration as the set of
Operator Defaults.
The Default Setting options are available only to users with Administrator access
rights.
The available options are:
Set Defaults
Save Current Configuration As Operator Defaults
4.2.3.2.1
Set Defaults
The Set Defaults submenu enables reverting the system parameters to a
predefined set of defaults. There are two sets of default configurations:
A Factory Defaults: This is the standard default configuration.
B Operator Defaults: Operator Defaults configuration can be defined by the
Administrator using the Save Current Configuration As Operator Defaults
option in this menu. It may also be defined at the factory according to specific
operator's definition. The default Operator Defaults configuration is the
Factory Defaults configuration.
The current configuration file and the Operator Defaults configuration file can be
uploaded/downloaded by the unit using FTP. For more information, see section
4.2.3.7 option. These files can also be uploaded/downloaded remotely using TFTP
(see Appendix B).
The available options in the Set Defaults submenu are:
Set Complete Factory Defaults
Set Partial Factory Defaults
Set Complete Operator Defaults
Operation and Administration
63
Chapter 4 - Operation and Administration
Set Partial Operator Defaults
Cancel Current Pending Request
4.2.3.2.1.1 Set Complete Factory Defaults
Select this option to reset the unit to the standard Factory Defaults configuration,
excluding several parameters that are listed in Table 4-3.
Table 4-3: Parameters not reset after Set Complete Factory/Operator Defaults
Parameters Group
Parameter
Unit Control Parameters
All Passwords
FTP Server IP address* (see note below)
FTP Gateway IP address* (see note below)
FTP Client IP address* (see note below)
FTP Client IP Mask* (see note below)
FTP User Name* (see note below)
FTP Password* (see note below)
Ethernet Port Negotiation Mode
Air Interface Parameters
Selected Sub-Band
Frequency (AU)
Frequency Subset (AU)
Antenna Gain (AU)
NOTE
The FTP parameters are not set to their default values after Set Complete Operator Defaults.
However, they are set to their default value after Set Complete Factory Defaults. Note that in this
case they are set to the default values immediately upon selecting the Set Complete Factory
Default option (even before the next reset).
4.2.3.2.1.2 Set Partial Factory Defaults
Select this option to reset the unit to the standard Factory Default configuration,
excluding the parameters that are required to maintain connectivity and
management access. The parameters that do not change after Set Partial Factory
Defaults are listed in Table 4-4.
BreezeACCESS 4900 System Manual
64
Menus and Parameters
Table 4-4: Parameters that are not reset after Set Partial Factory/Operator Defaults
Parameters Group
Parameter
Unit Control parameters
Passwords
Ethernet Port Negotiation Mode
FTP Server IP address
FTP Gateway IP Address
FTP Client IP address
FTP Client IP Mask
FTP User Name
FTP Password
IP Parameters
IP Address
Subnet Mask
Default Gateway Address
DHCP Option
Access to DHCP
Security Parameters
Authentication Algorithm
Default Key (SU)
Data Encryption Mode
Default Multicast Key (AU)
Security Mode
Key # 1 to Key # 4
Air Interface Parameters
ESSID
Operator ESSID Option (AU)
Operator ESSID (AU)
Cell Distance Mode (AU)
Maximum Cell Distance (AU)
Selected Sub-Band
Operation and Administration
65
Chapter 4 - Operation and Administration
Table 4-4: Parameters that are not reset after Set Partial Factory/Operator Defaults
Parameters Group
Parameter
Frequency (AU)
Frequency Subset (SU)
ATPC Option (AU)
Transmit Power
Tx Control (AU)
Best AU Support (SU)
Preferred AU MAC Address (SU)
Performance Parameters
Adaptive Modulation Decision Thresholds
Bridge Parameters
VLAN ID – Management
MAC Address Deny List (AU)
4.2.3.2.1.3 Set Complete Operators Defaults
Select this option to reset the unit to the Operator Defaults configuration,
excluding several parameters that are listed in Table 4-3.
4.2.3.2.1.4 Set Partial Operator Defaults
Select this option to reset the unit to the Operator Defaults configuration,
excluding the parameters that are required to maintain connectivity and
management access. The parameters that do not change after Set Partial
Operator Defaults are listed in Table 4-4.
4.2.3.2.1.5 Cancel Current Pending Request
After selecting one of the Set defaults options, it will be executed after the next
reset. This option enables you to cancel the pending request before execution
(provided the unit has not been reset yet).
4.2.3.2.2
Save Current Configuration As Operator Defaults
The Save Current Configuration As Operator Defaults enables defining the
current configuration of the unit as the Operator Defaults configuration.
BreezeACCESS 4900 System Manual
66
Menus and Parameters
4.2.3.3
Change Unit Name
The Change Unit Name option enables changing the name of the unit, which is
also the system's name in the MIB2. The name of the unit is also used as the
prompt at the bottom of each Monitor window.
Valid values: A string of up to 32 printable ASCII characters.
The default unit name is an empty string.
4.2.3.4
Change Password
The Change Password submenu enables changing the access password(s). The
Change Password submenu is available only to users with Administrator access
rights.
Valid values: A string of up to 8 printable ASCII characters.
Refer to section 4.1 for a list of the default passwords for each of the access levels.
4.2.3.5
Flash Memory Control
The Flash Memory Control submenu enables selecting the active software version
for the unit.
The flash memory can store two software versions. One version is called Main and
the other is called Shadow. New software versions are loaded as the shadow
version. You can select the shadow version as the new active version by selecting
Reset and Boot from Shadow Version. However, after the next reset, the main
version is re-activated. To continue using the currently active version after the
next reset, select Use Running Version After Reset: The previous shadow
version will be the new main version, and vice versa.
The parameters configured in the unit are not changed as a result of loading new
software versions unless the new version includes additional parameters or
additional changes in the list of parameters. New parameters are loaded with
their default values.
Select from the following options:
Reset and Boot from Shadow Version: Activates the shadow (backup)
software version. The unit is reset automatically. Following the next reset the
unit will switch to the main version.
Use Running Version After Reset: Defines the current running version as
the new main version. This version will also be used following the next reset.
Operation and Administration
67
Chapter 4 - Operation and Administration
4.2.3.6
SW Version Download
The SW Version Download submenu enables the optional downloading of a SW
Version file from a remote FTP server. The SW Version Download submenu
includes the following options:
Execute FTP GET SW Version: The Execute FTP GET SW Version option
executes the SW Version FTP download according to the parameters defined
below.
FTP SW Source Dir: The FTP SW Source Dir option enables defining the
source directory of the SW version file.
Valid values: A string of up to 80 printable ASCII characters. To clear the field
press "."
The default is an empty string.
FTP SW Version File Name: The FTP SW Version File Name option enables
defining the name of the SW version file in the FTP server.
Valid values: A string of up to 20 printable ASCII characters. An empty string
is not allowed.
The default is VxWorks.bz.
FTP Client IP Address: The FTP Client IP Address option enables defining the
IP address of the FTP client in the unit. This secondary IP address is required
only to support the optional FTP process.
The default is: 1.1.1.3
FTP Client IP Mask: The FTP Client IP Mask option enables defining the IP
Mask for the FTP client mask in the unit.
The default is: 255.255.255.0
FTP Server IP Address: The FTP Server IP Address option enables defining
the IP address of the FTP server that is hosting the SW Version file.
The default is: 1.1.1.4.
FTP Gateway IP Address: The FTP Gateway IP Address option enables
defining the FTP default gateway address.
The default is: 0.0.0.0.
BreezeACCESS 4900 System Manual
68
Menus and Parameters
FTP User Name: The FTP User Name option enables defining the user name
to be used for accessing the FTP server that is hosting the SW Version file.
Valid values: A string of up to 18 printable ASCII characters.
The default is: vx
FTP Password: The FTP Password option enables defining the password to be
used for accessing the FTP server that is hosting the SW Version file.
Valid values: A string of up to 18 printable ASCII characters.
The default is: vx
Show SW Version Download Parameters and Status: Displays the current
values of the SW Version Download parameters, the current SW version and
the SW versions stored in the Flash memory.
NOTE
There is one set of general FTP parameters (FTP Server IP Address, FTP Gateway IP Address,
FTP Client IP Address, FTP Client IP Mask, FTP User Name and FTP Password). This set (or
relevant parts of the set) serves the SW Download Procedure, the Configuration File
Upload/Download procedure and the Event Log File Upload procedure. Changing any of these
parameters in the menu for any procedure will automatically change its value in the menu for the
other procedures.
4.2.3.7
Configuration File Upload/Download
The Configuration File Upload/Download submenu enables the optional
uploading or downloading of a configuration or an Operator Defaults file from a
remote FTP server. The Configuration File Upload/Download submenu includes
the following options:
Execute FTP GET/PUT Configuration File: The Execute FTP GET/PUT
Configuration File executes the upload/download of a Configuration file or an
Operator Defaults file according to the parameters defined below. The
following options are available:
Execute FTP Get Configuration File (cfg)
Execute FTP Put Configuration File (cfg)
Execute FTP Get Operator Defaults File (cmr)
Execute FTP Put Operator Defaults File (cmr)
Operation and Administration
69
Chapter 4 - Operation and Administration
FTP Configuration File Source Dir: The FTP Configuration File Source Dir
option enables defining the source directory of the configuration/Operator
Defaults file.
Valid values: A string of up to 80 printable ASCII characters. To clear the field
press "."
The default is an empty string.
Configuration File FTP File Name: The Configuration File FTP File Name
option enables defining the name of the configuration file to be
uploaded/downloaded.
Valid values: A string of up to 20 printable ASCII characters. An empty string
is not allowed.
The default is config.cfg.
Operator Defaults FTP File Name: The Operator Defaults File Name option
enables defining the name of the Operator Defaults file to be
uploaded/downloaded.
Valid values: A string of up to 20 printable ASCII characters. An empty string
is not allowed.
The default is operator.cmr.
FTP Client IP Address: The FTP Client IP Address option enables defining the
IP address of the FTP client in the unit. This secondary IP address is required
only to support the optional FTP process.
The default is: 1.1.1.3
FTP Client IP Mask: The FTP Client IP Mask option enables defining the IP
Mask for the FTP client mask in the unit.
The default is: 255.255.255.0
FTP Server IP Address: The FTP Host IP Address option enables defining the
IP address of the FTP server that is hosting the file.
The default is: 1.1.1.4
FTP Gateway IP Address: The FTP Gateway IP Address option enables
defining the FTP default gateway address.
BreezeACCESS 4900 System Manual
70
Menus and Parameters
The default is: 0.0.0.0.
FTP User Name: The FTP User Name option enables defining the user name
to be used for accessing the FTP server that is hosting the file.
Valid values: A string of up to 18 printable ASCII characters.
The default is: vx
FTP Password: The FTP Password option enables defining the password to be
used for accessing the FTP server that is hosting the file.
Valid values: A string of up to 18 printable ASCII characters.
The default is: vx
Show Configuration File Upload/Download Parameters: Displays the
current values of the Configuration File Upload/Download parameters.
NOTE
There is one set of general FTP parameters (FTP Server IP Address, FTP Gateway IP Address,
FTP Client IP Address, FTP Client IP Mask, FTP User Name and FTP Password). This set (or
relevant parts of the set) serves the SW Download procedure, the Configuration File
Upload/Download procedure and the Event Log File Upload procedure. Changing any of these
parameters in the menu for any procedure will automatically change its value in the menu for the
other procedures.
4.2.3.8
Log Out Timer
The Log Out Timer parameter determines the amount of inactive time following
which the unit automatically exits the Monitor program.
The time out duration can range from 1 to 999 minutes.
The default value is 5 minutes.
4.2.3.9
Ethernet Port Negotiation Mode
The Ethernet Port Negotiation Mode submenu displays the current Ethernet port
state and enables defining the negotiation mode of the Ethernet port. The
available options are:
Force 10 Mbps and Half-Duplex
Force 10 Mbps and Full-Duplex
Force 100 Mbps and Half-Duplex
Force 100 Mbps and Full-Duplex
Operation and Administration
71
Chapter 4 - Operation and Administration
Auto Negotiation (10/100 Mbps and Half/Full Duplex)
The default is Auto Negotiation (10/100 Mbps and Half/Full Duplex)
4.2.3.10
Change System Location
The Change System Location option enables changing the system location of the
unit, which is also the sys location in MIB2. The System Location is also
displayed as a part of the Monitor menu’s header.
Valid values: A string of up to 35 printable ASCII characters.
The default system location is an empty string.
4.2.3.11
Event Log Menu
The Event Log Menu enables controlling the event log feature. The event log is an
important debugging tool and a flash memory sector is dedicated for storing it.
Events are classified according to their severity level: Message (lowest severity),
Warning, Error or Fatal (highest severity).
The severity at which events are saved in the Event Log is configurable. Events
from the configured severity and higher are saved and may be displayed upon
request. Log history can be displayed up to the full number of current active
events. In the log, an event is defined as active as long as it has not been erased
(a maximum of 1000 events may be stored). The Event Log may be read using
TFTP, with remote file name .log (the default SNMP
Read Community is “public”). The Event Log may also be uploaded to a remote
FTP server.
The Event Log Menu includes the following options:
Event Log Policy
Display Event Log
Erase Event Log
Event Load Upload
4.2.3.11.1 Event Log Policy
The Event Log Policy determines the minimal severity level. All events whose
severity is equal to or higher than the defined severity are logged.
Valid values are: Message (MSG) Level, Warning (WRN) Level, Error (ERR) Level,
Fatal (FTL) Level, Log None.
The default selection is Warning Level severity.
BreezeACCESS 4900 System Manual
72
Menus and Parameters
4.2.3.11.2 Display Event Log
The Display Event Log option enables viewing how many events are logged and
selecting the number of events to be displayed (up to 1000). The display of each
event includes the event time (elapsed time since last reset), the severity level and
a message string. The events are displayed in descending order, with the most
recent event displayed first.
4.2.3.11.3 Erase Event Log
The Erase Event Log option enables clearing the event log.
4.2.3.11.4 Event Log Upload
The Event Log Upload submenu enables the optional uploading of the event log
file to a remote FTP server. The Event Log Upload submenu includes the following
options:
FTP Event Log Upload Execute: The FTP event Log Upload Execute executes
the upload of the Event Log file according to the parameters defined below.
Event Log Destination Directory: The Event Log Destination Directory
enables defining the destination directory for the Event Log File.
Valid values: A string of up to 80 printable ASCII characters. To clear the field
press "."
The default is an empty string.
Event Log File Name: The Event Log File Name option enables defining the
name of the event log file to be uploaded.
Valid values: A string of up to 20 printable ASCII characters.
The default is logfile.log.
FTP Server IP Address: The FTP Host IP Address option enables defining the
IP address of the FTP server that is hosting the file.
The default is: 1.1.1.4
FTP Gateway IP Address: The FTP Gateway IP Address option enables
defining the FTP default gateway address.
The default is: 0.0.0.0.
FTP User Name: The FTP User Name option enables defining the user name
to be used for accessing the FTP server that is hosting the file.
Operation and Administration
73
Chapter 4 - Operation and Administration
Valid values: A string of up to 18 printable ASCII characters.
The default is: vx
FTP Password: The FTP Password option enables defining the password to be
used for accessing the FTP server that is hosting the file.
Valid values: A string of up to 18 printable ASCII characters.
The default is: vx
Show FTP Event Log File Upload Parameters: Displays the current values
of the Event Log Upload parameters.
NOTE
There is one set of general FTP parameters (FTP Server IP Address, FTP Gateway IP Address,
FTP Client IP Address, FTP Client IP Mask, FTP User Name and FTP Password). This set (or
relevant parts of the set) serves the SW Download procedure, the Configuration File
Upload/Download procedure and the Event Log File Upload procedure. Changing any of these
parameters in the menu for any procedure will automatically change its value in the menu for the
other procedures.
4.2.3.12
Feature Upgrade
The Feature Upgrade option enables to enter a license string for upgrading the
unit to support new features and/or options. Upon selecting the Manual Feature
Upgrade option the user will be requested to enter the license string. Each license
string is associated with a unique MAC Address and one feature/option. If the
encrypted MAC Address in the license string does not match the unit’s MAC
Address, the string will be rejected. If there is a match, a message notifying of the
new feature/option will be displayed. The unit must be reset for the change to
take effect.
The license string should comprise 32 to 64 hexadecimal digits.
New Feature License files can be uploaded remotely using TFTP (see Appendix B).
4.2.4
Basic Configuration Menu
The Basic Configuration menu includes all parameters required for the initial
installation and operation of the unit. After the unit is properly installed and
operational, additional parameters can be configured either locally or remotely
using Telnet or SNMP management.
NOTE
All parameters in the Basic Configuration menu are also available in the relevant sub menus of the
Advanced Configuration menu.
The Basic Configuration menu enables to access the following parameter sets:
BreezeACCESS 4900 System Manual
74
Menus and Parameters
4.2.4.1.1
IP Parameters
IP Address
Subnet Mask
Default Gateway Address
DHCP Client
DHCP Option
Access to DHCP
Refer to section 4.2.6.1 for a description of these parameters.
4.2.4.1.2
Air Interface Parameters
ESSID
Operator ESSID Parameters (AU)
Operator ESSID Option
Operator ESSID
Frequency Definition
Select Sub-Band (if more than one is available)
Frequency (AU)
Sub-Band Definition
Best AU Parameters (SU)
Best AU Support
Preferred AU MAC Address
Cell Distance Parameters
Cell Distance Mode (AU)
Maximum Cell Distance (AU)
Operation and Administration
75
Chapter 4 - Operation and Administration
ATPC
ATPC Option
Transmit Power parameters
Maximum Transmit Power parameters (SU)
Tx Control (AU)
Antenna Gain (AU)
Refer to section 4.2.6.2 for a description of these parameters.
4.2.4.1.3
Performance Parameters
Maximum Modulation Level (SU)
Refer to section 4.2.6.5 for a description of these parameters.
4.2.4.1.4
Bridge Parameters
VLAN ID – Management
MAC Address Deny List
Refer to section 4.2.6.4 for a description of these parameters.
4.2.4.1.5
Security Parameters
Authentication Algorithm
Data Encryption Option
Security Mode
Default Multicast Key (AU)
Default Key (SU)
Key 1 to Key 4
Promiscuous Authentication (AU)
BreezeACCESS 4900 System Manual
76
Menus and Parameters
Some or all of the security parameters may not be available in units that do not
support the applicable features. Refer to section 4.2.6.7 for a description of these
parameters.
4.2.5
Site Survey Menu
The Site Survey menu displays the results of various tests and counters for
verifying the quality of the wireless link. These tests can be used to help
determine where to position the units for optimal coverage, antenna alignment
and troubleshooting. The counters can serve for evaluating performance and
identifying potential problems. In the AU, there is also an extensive database for
all SUs served by it.
The Site Survey menu includes the following options:
Traffic Statistics
Ping Test
Continuous Link Quality display (SU only)
MAC Address Database
Per Modulation Level Counters
Link Capability
4.2.5.1
Traffic Statistics
The traffic statistics are used to monitor, interpret and analyze the performance
of the wired and wireless links. The counters display statistics relating to wireless
link and Ethernet frames. The Traffic Statistics menu includes the following
options:
Display Counters: Select this option to display the current value of the
Ethernet and wireless link (WLAN) counters.
Reset Counters: Select this option to reset the counters.
4.2.5.1.1
Ethernet Counters
The unit receives Ethernet frames from its Ethernet port and forwards the frames
to its internal bridge, which determines whether each frame should be
transmitted to the wireless medium. Frames discarded by the unit's hardware
filter are not counted by the Ethernet counters. The maximum length of a regular
Operation and Administration
77
Chapter 4 - Operation and Administration
IEEE 802.1 Ethernet frame that can be accepted from the Ethernet port is 1518
bytes. For tagged IEEE 802.1Q frames the maximum size is 1522 bytes.
The unit transmits valid data frames received from the wireless medium to the
Ethernet port, as well as internally generated frames, such as responses to
management queries and pings received via the Ethernet port.
The Ethernet Counters include the following statistics:
Total received frames via Ethernet: The total number of frames received
from the Ethernet port. This counter includes both invalid frames (with errors)
and valid frames (without errors).
Transmitted wireless to Ethernet: The number of frames transmitted by the
unit to the Ethernet port. These are generally frames received from the
wireless side, but also include frames generated by the unit itself.
4.2.5.1.2
WLAN Counters
The unit submits data frames received from the Ethernet port to the internal
bridge, as well as self generated control and wireless management frames. After a
unicast data frame is transmitted, the unit waits for an acknowledgement (ACK)
message from the receiving unit. Some control and wireless management frames,
as well as broadcast and multicast frames sent to more than one unit, are not
acknowledged. If an ACK is not received after a predefined time, which is
determined by the Maximum Cell distance parameter, the unit retransmits the
frame until an ACK is received. If an ACK is not received before the number of
retransmissions has reached a maximum predefined number, which is
determined by the Number of HW Retries parameter, the frame is dropped.
Each packet to be transmitted to the wireless link is transferred to one of three
queues: Low, Medium and High. Packets in the High queue have the highest
priority for transmission, and those in the Low queue have the lowest priority.
The packets in the High queue will be transmitted first. When this queue is
emptied, the packets in the Medium queue will be sent. Finally, when both the
High and Medium queues are empty, the packets in the Low queue will be sent.
Data packets are routed to either the High or Low queue, according to the queue
selected for them before the MIR/CIR mechanism (for more information see
section 4.2.6.6.3).
Broadcasts/multicasts are routed to the Medium queue (applicable only for AU).
Control and wireless management frames generated in the unit are routed to the
High queue.
Any frame coming from the Ethernet port, which is meant to reach another
BreezeACCESS 4900 unit via the wireless port (as opposed to messages intended
BreezeACCESS 4900 System Manual
78
Menus and Parameters
for stations behind other BreezeACCESS 4900 units), is sent to the High queue,
regardless of the priority configuration.
The Wireless Link Counters include the following statistics:
Total transmitted frames to wireless: The number of frames transmitted to
the wireless medium. The total includes one count for each successfully
transmitted unicast frame (excluding retransmissions), and the number of
transmitted multicast and broadcast frames, including control and wireless
management frames. In the AU, there are also separate counters for the
following:
Beacons (AU only)
Management and Other Data frames, including successfully transmitted
unicast frames and multicast/broadcast data frames (excluding
retransmissions, excluding Beacons in AU)
Total Transmitted Unicasts (AU only): The number of unicast frames
successfully transmitted to the wireless medium, excluding retransmissions.
This count is useful for calculating the rates of retransmissions or dropped
frames, as only unicast frames are retransmitted if not acknowledged.
Total submitted frames (bridge): The total number of data frames submitted
to the internal bridge for transmission to the wireless medium. The count
does not include control and wireless management frames, or
retransmissions. There are also separate counts for each priority queue
through which the frames were routed (High, Mid and Low).
Frames dropped (too many retries): The number of dropped frames, which
are unsuccessfully retransmitted without being acknowledged until the
maximum permitted number of retransmissions. This count includes dropped
data frames as well as dropped control and wireless management frames.
Total retransmitted frames: The total number of retransmissions, including
all unsuccessful transmissions and retransmissions.
Total transmitted concatenated frames: The total number of concatenated
frames transmitted successfully to the wireless medium, excluding
retransmissions. There are also separate counts for concatenated frames that
include one frame (Single), two frames (Double) or more than two frames
(More). For more details refer to section 4.2.6.5.10.
Total Tx events: The total number of transmit events. Typically, transmission
events include cases where transmission of a frame was delayed or was
Operation and Administration
79
Chapter 4 - Operation and Administration
aborted before completion. The following additional counters are displayed to
indicate the reason for and the nature of the event:
Dropped: The number of dropped frames, which are unsuccessfully
retransmitted without being acknowledged until the maximum permitted
number of retransmissions.
Underrun: The number of times that transmission of a frame was aborted
because the rate of submitting frames for transmission exceeds the
available transmission capability.
Others: The number of frames whose transmission was not completed or
delayed due to a problem other than those represented by the other
counters.
Total received frames from wireless: The total number of frames received
from the wireless medium. The count includes data frames as well as control
and wireless management frames. The count does not include bad frames and
duplicate frames. For a description of these frames, refer to Bad frames
received and Duplicate frames discarded below.
Total received data frames: The total number of data frames received from
the wireless medium, including duplicate frames. Refer to Duplicate frames
discarded below.
Total Rx events: The total number of frames that were not received properly.
The following additional counters are displayed to indicate the reason for the
failure:
Phy: The number of unidentified signals.
CRC: The number of frames received from the wireless medium containing
CRC errors.
Overrun: The number of frames that were discarded because the receive
rate exceeded the processing capability or the capacity of the Ethernet
port.
Decrypt: The number of frames that were not received properly due to a
problem in the data decryption mechanism.
Total received concatenated frames: The total number of concatenated
frames received from the wireless medium, including duplicate frames. There
are also separate counts for concatenated frames that include one frame
BreezeACCESS 4900 System Manual
80
Menus and Parameters
(Single), two frames (Double) or more than two frames (More). For more details
refer to section 4.2.6.5.10.
Bad fragments received: The number of fragments received from the wireless
medium containing CRC errors.
Duplicate frames discarded: The number of data frames discarded because
multiple copies were received. If an acknowledgement message is not received
by the originating unit, the same data frame can be received more than once.
Although duplicate frames are included in all counters that include data
frames, only the first copy is forwarded to the Ethernet port.
Internally discarded MIR\CIR: The number of data frames received from the
Ethernet port that were discarded by the MIR/CIR mechanism to avoid
exceeding the maximum permitted information rate.
4.2.5.2
Ping Test
The Ping Test submenu is used to control pinging from the unit and includes the
following options:
Destination IP Address: The destination IP address of the device being
pinged. The default IP address is 192.0.0.1.
Number of Pings to Send: The number of ping attempts per session. The
available range is from 0 to 9999. The default value is 1. Select 0 for
continuous pinging.
Ping Frame Length: The ping packet size. The available range is from 60 to
1472 bytes. The default value is 64 bytes.
Ping Frame Timeout: The ping frame timeout, which is the amount of time
(in ms) between ping attempts. The available range is from 100 to 60,000 ms.
The default value is 200 ms.
Start Sending: Starts the transmission of ping frames.
Stop Sending: Stops the transmission of ping frames. The test is
automatically ended when the number of pings has reached the value
specified in the No. of Pings parameter, described above. The Stop Sending
option can be used to end the test before completing the specified number of
pings, or if continuous pinging is selected.
Show Ping Test Values: Displays the current values of the ping test
parameters, the transmission status, which means whether it is currently
Operation and Administration
81
Chapter 4 - Operation and Administration
sending or not sending pings, the number of pings sent, and the number of
pings received, which means the number of acknowledged frames.
4.2.5.3
Link Quality (SU only)
The Link Quality submenu enables viewing continuously updated information on
the quality of the wireless link. The Link quality submenu includes the following
options:
4.2.5.3.1
Continuous Average SNR Display
The Continuous Average SNR Display option displays continuously updated
information regarding the average quality of the received signal, using Signal to
Noise Ratio (SNR) measurements.
Click the Esc key to abort the test.
4.2.5.3.2
Continuous UpLink Quality Indicator Display
The Continuous UpLink Quality Indicator Display option displays continuously
updated information regarding the average quality of the wireless link to the AU,
using the dynamically updated average modulation level measurements. The Link
Quality Indicator (LQI) calculation is performed using the formula:
LQI = (0.9 x ”Previous LQI”) + (0.1 x ”Last Successful Modulation Level”).
Each successful transmit will be included in this average, by using the
modulation level in which the frame was successfully transmitted as the “Last
Successful Modulation Level”.
In order to receive quick and reliable LQI measurements, there should be
sufficient traffic between the SU and the AU. It is recommended to have traffic of
at least 100 packets per second. The traffic can be generated either by an
external utility (FTP session, ping generator, etc.) or by the Ping Test option in the
Site Survey menu with the appropriate settings (see section 4.2.5.2).
NOTE
If Limited Test is indicated next to the LQI results, it means that the results may not indicate the true
quality, as not all modulation levels from 1 to 8 are available. The limitation may be due to the
configurable Maximum Modulation Level parameter.
Click the Esc key to abort the test.
4.2.5.4
MAC Address Database
The MAC Address Database submenu includes the following options:
MAC Address Database in AU
MAC Address Database in SU
BreezeACCESS 4900 System Manual
82
Menus and Parameters
4.2.5.4.1
MAC Address Database in AU
The MAC Address Database option in the AU displays information regarding the
Subscriber Units associated with the AU, as well as bridging (forwarding)
information. The following options are available:
Display Bridging and Association Info: The Display Bridging and
Association Info option displays a list of all the Subscriber Units and stations
in the AU's Forwarding Database. For stations behind an SU, the SU's MAC
address is also displayed (SU Address).
Each MAC address entry is followed by a description, which may include the
following:
Et (Ethernet): An address learned from the Ethernet port.
Vp (Virtual port): An address of a node behind an associated SU. For
these addresses, learned from the wireless port, the address of the
applicable SU is also displayed (in parenthesis).
St (Static): An associated SU. For these entries, the following details are
also displayed: SU Unit Name, SU SW version, SU Unit Type and SU’s
Distance from the AU.
X: An SU that is included in the Deny List.
Sp (Special): 7 addresses that are always present, including:
The MAC address of the AU, which appears twice as it is learned from
both the Ethernet and wireless ports.
The MAC address of the internal Operating System stack, which also
appears twice.
Alvarion's Multicast address (01-20-D6-00-00-01, which also appears
twice. The system treats this address as a Broadcast address.
The Ethernet Broadcast address (FF-FF-FF-FF-FF-FF).
In addition, a summary table displays information about the Forwarding
Database (Bridging Info) and the Associated Subscriber Units Database
(Association Info). Each database includes the following information:
The current number of entries. For Bridging Info this includes the Et
(Ethernet) and the Vp (Virtual ports) entries. For Association Info this is
the number of the currently associated SUs.
Operation and Administration
83
Chapter 4 - Operation and Administration
NOTE
There is no aging algorithm for associated SUs. An SU is only removed from the list of associated
SUs under the following conditions:
A SNAP frame is received from another AU indicating that the SU is now associated with the
other AU.
The SU failed to respond to 50 consecutive frames transmitted by the AU and is considered to
have "aged out".
The aging time specified for entries in these tables. The aging time for
Bridging Info is as specified by the Bridge Aging Time parameter. The
default is 300 seconds. There is no aging time for Association Info entries.
The maximum number of entries permitted for these tables, which are
1017 (1024 minus the number of special Sp addresses as defined above)
for Bridging Info and as specified by the Maximum Number of
Associations parameter for Association Info. The default value of the
Maximum Number of Associations parameter is 512.
BreezeACCESS 4900 System Manual
84
Menus and Parameters
NOTE
When Data Encryption is enabled, the actual maximum number of associations is limited to 124.
The displayed number is the value configured for the Maximum Number of Associations parameter,
which might be higher than the actual limit.
Display Association Info: Displays information regarding the Subscriber
Units associated with the AU. Each list entry includes the following
information:
The MAC Address of the associated Subscriber Unit
Age in seconds, indicating the elapsed time since receiving the last packet
from the Subscriber Unit.
The value configured for the Maximum Modulation Level parameter of the
Subscriber Unit
The Status of the Subscriber Unit. There are three options:
Associated
Authenticated
Not Authenticated (a temporary status)
The various status states are described below (this is a simplified
description of the association process without the effects of the Best AU
algorithm).
Table 4-5: Authentication and Association Process
Message
Direction
Status in AU
AU → SU
Authentication Request
SU → AU
Not authenticated
Authentication Successful
AU → SU
Authenticated
SU → AU
Authenticated
SU Status: Scanning
A Beacon with correct ESSID
SU Status: Synchronized
SU Status: Authenticated
Association Request
Operation and Administration
85
Chapter 4 - Operation and Administration
Table 4-5: Authentication and Association Process
Message
Direction
Status in AU
Association Successful
AU → SU
Associated
ACK
SU → AU
Associated
Data Traffic
SU ↔ AU
Associated
SU Status: Associated
The SNR measured at the SU
The Unit Name of the SU.
The SW version of the SU.
The Unit Type of the SU.
Distance.
In addition, a summary table displays information about the Forwarding
Database (Bridging Info). The database includes the following information:
The current number of entries. This is the number of currently associated
SUs.
NOTE
There is no aging algorithm for associated SUs. An SU is only removed from the list of associated
SUs under the following conditions:
A SNAP frame is received from another AU indicating that the SU is now associated with the
other AU.
The SU failed to respond to 50 consecutive frames transmitted by the AU and is considered to
have "aged out".
The aging time specified for entries in these table. There is no aging time
for Association Info entries.
The maximum number of entries permitted for this table, which is
specified by the Maximum Number of Associations parameter. The
default value of the Maximum Number of Associations parameter is 512.
BreezeACCESS 4900 System Manual
86
Menus and Parameters
Show MIR/CIR Database: Displays information on the MIR/CIR support for
associated Subscriber Units.
Each entry includes the following information:
The MAC address of the associated Subscriber Unit
The values of the MIR and CIR parameters configured in the applicable SU
for the downlink (AU to SU) and for the uplink (SU to AU).
The value configured in the applicable SU for the Maximum Delay
parameter.
The maximum data rate of the Subscriber Unit
Display MAC Pinpoint Table: The MAC Pinpoint table provides for each of
the Ethernet stations (identified by the MAC Address) connected to either the
AU or to any of the SUs served by it, the identity (MAC Address) of the
wireless device to which they are connected.
4.2.5.4.2
MAC Address Database in SU
The MAC Address Database option in the SU displays information regarding the
Subscriber Units bridging (forwarding) information. The following option is
available:
Display Bridging Info: The Display Bridging Info option displays a list of all
the stations in the SU's Forwarding Database.
Each MAC address entry is followed by a description, which may include the
following:
Et (Ethernet): An address learned from the Ethernet port.
Wl (Wireless): An address of a node behind the associated AU, learned via
the wireless port.
Sp (Special): 8 addresses that are always present, including:
The MAC address of the SU, which appears twice as it is learned from
both the Ethernet and wireless ports.
The MAC address if the internal Operating System stack, which also
appears twice.
Operation and Administration
87
Chapter 4 - Operation and Administration
Alvarion's Multicast address (01-20-D6-00-00-01), which also appears
twice. The system treats this address as a Broadcast address.
Alvarion's special Multicast address (01-20-D6-00-00-05), reserved for
future use.
The Ethernet Broadcast address (FF-FF-FF-FF-FF-FF).
In addition, a summary table displays information about the Forwarding
Database (Bridging Info). The summary table includes the current number of
entries, the aging time specified by the Bridge Aging Time parameter and the
maximum number of entries permitted for this table, which is 1016.
4.2.5.5
Per Modulation Level Counters
The Per Modulation Level Counters display statistics relating to wireless link
performance at different radio modulation levels. The Per Modulation Level
Counters menu includes the following options:
Display Counters: Select this option to display the current values of the Per
Modulation Level Counters.
Reset Counters: Select this option to reset the Per Modulation Level
Counters.
The statistics show the number of frames accumulated in different categories
since the last reset.
For SUs, the Per Modulation Level Counters display the following information for
each modulation level supported by the unit:
SUCCESS: The total number of successfully transmitted unicasts at the
applicable modulation level.
FAILED: The total number of failures to successfully transmit unicast frame
during a HW Retry cycle at the applicable modulation level.
In addition, the Average Modulation Level (AML) is also displayed. This is the
average modulation level (rounded to the nearest integer) since the last time the
Per Modulation Level counters were reset. The average is calculated using the
SUCCESS count at each modulation level as weights.
For AUs, the SUCCESS and FAILED counts are provided for each of the
associated SUs, which are identified by their MAC address.
4.2.5.6
Link Capability
The Link Capability option provides information on HW and SW capabilities of
relevant units. In an AU, the information provided in the Link Capability reports
BreezeACCESS 4900 System Manual
88
Menus and Parameters
is for all associated SUs. In an SU, the Link Capability reports include
information on all AUs in the neighboring AUs table (all AUs with whom the SU
can communicate).
The Link Capability feature enables to adapt the configuration of the unit
according to the capabilities of other relevant unit(s) to ensure optimal operation.
The Link Capability submenu includes the following options:
4.2.5.6.1
Show Link Capability-General
Select this option to view information on general parameters of relevant units. For
each relevant unit, identified by its MAC address, the following details are
displayed:
HwVer: the hardware version of the unit.
CpldVer: The version of the Complex Programmable Logic Device (CPLD) used
in the unit. This parameter is available only in AUs, displaying the CPLD
version in the relevant SU.
Country: The 3 or 4 digits country code supported by the unit. Currently this
value is 1022.
SwVer: The SW version used by the unit. This parameter is available only in
SUs, displaying the SW version in the relevant AU.
BootVer: The Boot Version of the unit. This parameter is available only in
AUs, displaying the Boot version in the relevant SU.
4.2.5.6.2
Show Link Capability-Wireless Link Configuration
Select this option to view information on current wireless link parameters of
relevant units. For each relevant unit, identified by its MAC address, the following
details are displayed:
ATPC Option: Enable or Disable.
Adaptive Modulation Option: Enable or Disable.
Burst Mode Option: Enable or Disable.
Concatenation Option: Enable or Disable.
Country Code Learning by SU: Enable or Disable. This parameter is
available only in SUs, displaying the current option in the relevant AU.
Operation and Administration
89
Chapter 4 - Operation and Administration
4.2.5.6.3
Show Link Capability-Security Configuration
Select this option to view information on current security related parameters of
relevant units. For each relevant unit, identified by its MAC address, the following
details are displayed:
Security Mode: WEP, AES/OCB or AES/CCM.
Authentication Algorithm: Shared Key or Open System.
Data Encryption Option: Enable or Disable.
4.2.5.6.4
Show Link Capability by AU (SU only)
Select this option to view all capabilities information (General, wireless Link
Configuration, Security Configuration) of a selected AU (by its MAC address).
4.2.5.6.5
Show Link Capability by SU (AU only)
Select this option to view all capabilities information (General, Wireless Link
Configuration, Security Configuration) of a selected SU (by its MAC address).
4.2.6
Advanced Configuration Menu
The Advanced Configuration menu provides access to all parameters, including
the parameters available through the Basic Configuration menu.
The Advanced Configuration menu enables accessing the following menus:
IP Parameters
Air Interface Parameters
Network Management Parameters
Bridge Parameters
Performance Parameters
Service Parameters
Security Parameters
BreezeACCESS 4900 System Manual
90
Menus and Parameters
4.2.6.1
IP Parameters
The IP Parameters menu enables defining IP parameters for the selected unit and
determining its method of IP parameter acquisition.
The IP Parameters menu includes the following options:
IP Address
Subnet Mask
Default Gateway Address
DHCP Client
4.2.6.1.1
IP Address
The IP Address parameter defines the IP address of the unit.
The default IP address is 10.0.0.1.
4.2.6.1.2
Subnet Mask
The Subnet Mask parameter defines the subnet mask for the IP address of the
unit.
The default mask is 255.0.0.0.
4.2.6.1.3
Default Gateway Address
The Default Gateway Address parameter defines the IP address of the unit's
default gateway.
The default value for the default gateway address is 0.0.0.0.
4.2.6.1.4
DHCP Client
The DHCP Client submenu includes parameters that define the method of IP
parameters acquisition.
The DHCP Client submenu includes the following options:
DHCP Option
Access to DHCP
4.2.6.1.4.1 DHCP Option
The DHCP Option displays the current status of the DHCP support, and allows
selecting a new operation mode. Select from the following options:
Operation and Administration
91
Chapter 4 - Operation and Administration
Select Disable to configure the IP parameters manually. If this option is
selected, configure the static IP parameters as described above.
Select DHCP Only to cause the unit to search for and acquire its IP
parameters, including the IP address, subnet mask and default gateway, from
a DHCP (Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol) server only. If this option is
selected, you must select the port(s) through which the unit searches for and
communicates with the DHCP server, as described in section 4.2.6.1.4.2. You do
not have to configure static IP parameters for the unit. DHCP messages are
handled by the units as management frames.
Select Automatic to cause the unit to search for a DHCP server and acquire
its IP parameters from the server. If a DCHP server is not located within
approximately 40 seconds, the currently configured parameters are used. If
this option is selected, you must configure the static IP parameters as
described above. In addition, you must select the port(s) through which the
unit searches for and communicates with the DHCP server, as described in
section 4.2.6.1.4.2.
The default is Disable.
4.2.6.1.4.2 Access to DHCP
The Access to DHCP option enables defining the port through which the unit
searches for and communicates with a DHCP server. Select from the following
options:
From Wireless Link Only
From Ethernet Only
From Both Ethernet and Wireless Link
The default for Access Units is From Ethernet Only. The default for Subscriber
Units is From Wireless Link Only.
4.2.6.1.5
Show IP Parameters
The Show IP Parameters option displays the current values of the IP parameters,
including the Run Time IP Address, Run Time Subnet Mask and Run Time
Default Gateway Address.
4.2.6.2
Air Interface Parameters
The Air Interface Parameters menu enables viewing the current Air Interface
parameters defined for the unit and configuring new values for each of the
relevant parameters.
BreezeACCESS 4900 System Manual
92
Menus and Parameters
4.2.6.2.1
ESSID Parameters
The ESSID (Extended Service Set ID) is a string used to identify a wireless
network and to prevent the unintentional merging of two wireless networks or two
sectors in the same network. Typically, a different ESSID is defined for each AU.
To facilitate easy addition of SUs to an existing network without a prior
knowledge of which specific AU will serve it, and to support the Best AU feature,
a secondary "global" ESSID, namely "Operator ESSID", can be configured in the
AU. If the Operator ESSID Option is enabled at the AU, the Beacon frames
transmitted by it will include both the ESSID and Operator ESSID. The SU shall
regard such frames if either the ESSID or the Operator ESSID matches it own
ESSID. The ESSID of the AU with which the SU is eventually associated is
defined as the Run-Time ESSID of the SU. Typically, the initial ESSID of the SU
is configured to the value of the Operator ESSID. When the SU has become
associated with a specific AU, its ESSID can be reconfigured to the value of the
ESSID of the AU.
4.2.6.2.1.1 ESSID
The ESSID parameter defines the ESSID of the unit.
Valid values: A string of up to 31 printable ASCII characters.
The default value is ESSID1.
NOTE
The ESSID string is case sensitive.
4.2.6.2.1.2 Operator ESSID Parameters (AU only)
The Operator ESSID Parameters submenu includes the following parameters:
4.2.6.2.1.2.1 Operator ESSID Option
The Operator ESSID Option enables or disables the use of Operator ESSID for
establishing association with SUs.
The default is Enable.
4.2.6.2.1.2.2 Operator ESSID
The Operator ESSID parameter defines the Operator ESSID.
Valid values: A string of up to 31 printable ASCII characters.
The default value is ESSID1.
NOTE
The Operator ESSID string is case sensitive.
Operation and Administration
93
Chapter 4 - Operation and Administration
4.2.6.2.2
Frequency Definition Parameters
4.2.6.2.2.1 Sub-Bands and Frequency Selection
The parameters that determine the frequency to be used are set in the AU. The
SU should be configured with a minimal set of parameters to ensure that it will
be able to automatically detect and use the frequency used by the AU, including
possible changes in this frequency.
To simplify the installation process the SU scans a definable frequencies subset
after power-up. If the Best AU feature is enabled, the SU will scan the defined
subset and the operating frequency will be determined by the Best AU
mechanism (including the optional use of the Preferred AU feature). Otherwise
the SU will try to associate with the first AU it finds. If no AU is found, the SU will
start another scanning cycle.
Each unit is delivered with two pre-configured Sub-Bands, according to the
country code. These sets of parameters include also the frequencies that can be
used and the bandwidth. The sub-band to be used can be selected in both the AU
and the SU.
4.2.6.2.3
Frequency Definition Submenu in AU
The Frequency Definition submenu in AU includes the following parameters:
4.2.6.2.3.1 Sub-Band Select
For information on how to view the Sub-Bands supported by the unit and the
supported parameters’ values and options, refer to section 4.2.2.4.
The available options are 1 and 2.
The default selection is Sub-Band 1.
4.2.6.2.3.2 Frequency
The Frequency parameter defines the transmit/receive frequency.
The range depends on the selected Sub-Band.
The default is the lowest frequency in the Sub-Band. In the current version, the
default frequency for both Sub-Bands is 4947.5 MHz.
4.2.6.2.3.3 Country Code Learning by SU
This feature support simplified installation and updates processes by enabling
the SU to adapt the Country Code used by the AU.
The AU advertises its country code in every beacon and association response
message. Upon synchronization the SU will check if its country code and the
country code received from the AU are the same. If they are not the same and the
BreezeACCESS 4900 System Manual
94
Menus and Parameters
Country Code Learning by SU is enabled, the SU will use the AU’s country code:
the country code derived limitations will be forced and the following parameters
will be set according to new country definitions:
Maximum TX Power (per modulation level) will be set to the maximum defined
by the country code.
TX Power (per modulation level) will be set to the maximum defined by the
country code.
The Modulation Level will be set to the maximum modulation level defined by
the country code.
The Multicast Modulation Level will be set to the minimum modulation level
defined by the country code.
The Burst Mode will be set to enable if the country code supports burst mode,
and the burst duration will be set to default.
After country code learning (adaptation) the unit is automatically reset. Before
this automatic reset, if the unit is running from the shadow version, the versions
must be swapped and the running version must be set as main. This is done to
avoid returning to the previous version, which occurs automatically after the
reset.
The default is Enable.
NOTE
The Country Code Learning by SU feature does not function with the default ESSID (ESSID1).
4.2.6.2.3.4 Show Frequency definitions
Upon selecting Show Frequency Definitions, the selected Sub-Band and
Frequency are displayed.
4.2.6.2.4
Frequency Definition Submenu in SU
4.2.6.2.4.1 Sub-Band Select
This parameter is available only if the country code supports two or more SubBands. For information on how to view the Sub-Bands supported by the unit and
the supported parameters’ values and options, refer to section 4.2.2.4.
The range depends on the number of Sub-Bands supported by the country code.
The default selection is Sub-Band 1.
Operation and Administration
95
Chapter 4 - Operation and Administration
4.2.6.2.4.2 Frequency Subset Definition
The Frequency Subset Definition parameter defines the frequencies that will be
used by the SU when scanning for an AU. The available frequencies according to
the Sub-Band are displayed, and each of the frequencies in the list is associated
with an index. The frequencies subset can be defined by entering the indexes of
the required frequencies, or “A” to select all available frequencies.
The default is the complete list of frequencies available in the Sub-Band.
4.2.6.2.4.3 Show Frequency Definitions
Upon selecting the Show Frequency Definitions, the selected Sub-Band
parameters and the current operating frequency will be displayed. The current
defined frequency subset as well as the defined subset (to be used after the next
reset) are also displayed.
4.2.6.2.5
Best AU Parameters (SU)
An SU that can communicate with more than one AU using the same ESSID may
become associated with the first AU it "finds", not necessarily the best choice in
terms of quality of communication. The same limitation also exists if only one AU
in the neighborhood has an ESSID identical to the one used by the SU, as it is
not always necessarily the best choice.
The topology of a fixed access network is constantly changing. Changes in base
station deployment and subscriber density can accumulate to create substantial
changes in SU performance. The quest for load sharing together with the desire to
create best throughput conditions for the SU created the need for the Best AU
feature, to enable an SU to connect to the best AU in its neighborhood.
When the Best AU feature is used, each of the AUs is given a quality mark based
on the level at which it is received by the SU. The SU scans for a configured
number of cycles, gathering information from all the AUs with which it can
communicate. At the end of the scanning period, the SU reaches a Best AU
decision according to the information gathered. The AU with the highest quality
mark is selected as the Best AU, and the SU will immediately try to associate with
it. The quality mark given to each AU depends on the level at which it is received
by the SU.
The Best AU selection mechanism can be overridden by defining a specific AU as
the preferred AU.
NOTE
Although the SU selects the Best AU based on long-term conditions prior to the decision time, it
may not always be connected to the instantaneous Best AU at any given time. Note also that the
decision is made only once during the scanning interval. The decision may not remain the optimal
one for ever. If there are significant changes in deployment of neighboring AUs and the SUs served
by them, overall performance may be improved if the applicable SUs are reset intentionally so as to
re-initiate the Best AU decision process.
BreezeACCESS 4900 System Manual
96
Menus and Parameters
The Best AU Parameters menu includes the following options:
4.2.6.2.5.1 Best AU Support
The Best AU Support option enables or disables the Best AU selection feature.
The default is Disable.
NOTE
If the Best AU feature is not used, the SU associates with the first AU it finds whose ESSID or
Operator ESSID is identical to its own ESSID.
4.2.6.2.5.2 Number Of Scanning Attempts
When the Best AU option is enabled, the SU gathers information on neighboring
AUs for approximately 2 seconds on each of the scanned frequencies. The
Number of Scanning Attempts parameter defines the number of times that the
process will be repeated for all relevant frequencies. A higher number may result
in a better decision at the cost of an increased scanning time during which the
SU is not operational.
Valid values: 1 - 255.
Default value: 4.
4.2.6.2.5.3 Preferred AU MAC Address
The Preferred AU MAC Address parameter defines a specific AU with which the
SU should associate. Gaining control of the SUs association is a powerful tool in
network management. The Preferred AU MAC Address parameter is intended for
applications where there is a need to dictate the preferred AU with which the SU
should associate. To prevent the SU from associating with the first viable AU it
finds, the Best AU Support mechanism should be enabled. Once the SU has
identified the preferred AU based on its MAC address, it will associate with it and
terminate the scanning process. If the preferred AU is not found, the SU will
associate with an AU according to the decision reached using the best AU
algorithm.
Valid values: A MAC address string.
The default value for the Preferred AU MAC Address is 00-00-00-00-00-00 (12
zeros), meaning that there is no preferred AU.
4.2.6.2.5.4 Show Best AU Parameters and Data
The Show Best AU Parameters and Data option displays the applicable
information:
The Neighboring AU Data table displays the following details for each AU with
which the unit can communicate:
MAC Address
Operation and Administration
97
Chapter 4 - Operation and Administration
SNR of the received signal
Mark - The computed quality mark for the AU.
Full - The association load status of the AU. It is defined as full if the number
of SUs associated with the AU has reached the maximum allowed according to
the value of the Maximum Number of Associations parameter. An AU whose
associations load status is full cannot be selected as the Best AU, even if its
computed mark is the highest.
ESSID - The ESSID of the AU.
In addition to the neighboring AU data table, the following information is
displayed:
Best AU Support
Preferred AU MAC Address
Number of Scanning Attempts
Associated AU MAC Address (the MAC address of the selected AU)
4.2.6.2.6
Scanning Mode (SU only)
The Scanning Mode parameter defines whether the SU will use Passive or Active
scanning when searching for an AU.
In passive scanning, the SU “listens” to the wireless medium for approximately
two seconds at each frequency, searching for beacons. The disassociation period,
which is the time from the moment the link was lost until the SU decides that it
should start searching for another AU, is approximately seven seconds.
In some situations when there is a high probability that SUs might need to roam
among different AUs, the use of active scanning enables to significantly reduce
the link establishment time. This is achieved by using shorter dwell periods,
transmitting a Probe Request at each frequency. This reduces the time spent at
each frequency as well as the disassociation period.
The default selection is Passive.
4.2.6.2.7
Power Control Parameters
The Automatic Transmit Power Control (ATPC) algorithm simplifies the
installation process and ensures optimal performance while minimizing
interference to other units. This is achieved by automatically adjusting the power
level transmitted by each SU according to the actual level at which it is received
BreezeACCESS 4900 System Manual
98
Menus and Parameters
by the AU. To support proper operation of the system with optimal performance
and minimum interference between neighboring sectors, the ATPC algorithm
should be enabled in all units.
The algorithm is controlled by the AU that calculates for each received frame the
average SNR at which it receives transmissions from the specific SU. The average
calculation takes into account the previous calculated average, thus reducing the
effect of short temporary changes in link conditions. The weight of history (the
previous value) in the formula used for calculating the average SNR is determined
by a configurable parameter. In addition, the higher the time that has passed
since the last calculation, the lower the impact of history on the calculated
average. If the average SNR is not in the configured target range, the AU
transmits to the SU a power-up or a power-down message. The target is that each
SU will be received at an optimal level, or as high (or low) as possible if the
optimal range cannot be reached because of specific link conditions.
Each time that the SU tries to associate with the AU (following either a reset or
loss of synchronization), it will initiate transmissions using its Transmit Power
parameters. If after a certain time the SU does not succeed to synchronize with
the AU, it will start increasing the transmit power level.
In an AU the maximum supported transmit power is typically used to provide
maximum coverage. However, there may be a need to decrease the transmitted
power level in order to support relatively small cells and to minimize the
interference with the operation of neighboring cells, or for compliance with local
regulatory requirements.
In some cases the maximum transmit power of the SU should be limited to
ensure compliance with applicable regulations or for other reasons.
Different power levels may be used for different modulation levels to optimize
performance taking into account the different modulation schemes as well as
possible regulatory restrictions.
4.2.6.2.7.1 Transmit Power
The Transmit Power parameters are defined separately for different modulation
levels.
In the AU, the Transmit Power parameter defines the fixed transmit power level
and is not part of the ATPC algorithm.
In the SU, The Initial Transmit Power parameter defines the fixed transmit power
level when the ATPC algorithm is disabled. If the ATPC Option is enabled the
value configured for this parameter serves for setting the initial value to be used
by the ATPC algorithm after either power up or losing synchronization with the
AU.
Operation and Administration
99
Chapter 4 - Operation and Administration
The minimum value for the Transmit Power Parameters is -10 dBm. (The ATPC
may reduce the actual transmit power of the SU to lower values). The maximum
value of the Transmit Power Parameter depends on several unit properties and
parameters:
The modulation level
The Maximum Allowed Tx Power as defined for the applicable Sub-Band.
The Maximum EIRP as defined for the applicable Sub-Band, together with the
value of the Antenna Gain. The Maximum EIRP of AUs (defined as Point-toMulti-Point equipment) cannot exceed a certain value. In these cases the
Transmit Power cannot exceed the value of (Maximum EIRP – Antenna Gain).
Maximum Tx Power parameter (in SU only)
For information on how to view the Sub-Bands supported by the unit and the
supported parameters’ values and options, refer to section 4.2.2.4.
The unit calculates the maximum allowed Transmit Power according to the unit
properties and parameters listed above, and displays the allowed range when a
Transmit Power parameter is selected.
The default Transmit Power is the highest allowed value.
4.2.6.2.7.2 Maximum Tx Power (SU only)
The Maximum Tx Power parameter limits the maximum transmit power that can
be reached by the ATPC algorithm. It also sets the upper limits for the Transmit
Power parameters.
The minimum value for the Maximum Tx Power is -10 dBm. The maximum value
depends on several unit properties and parameters:
The modulation level
The Maximum Allowed Tx Power as defined for the applicable Sub-Band.
For information on how to view the Sub-Bands supported by the unit and the
supported parameters’ values and options, refer to section 4.2.2.4.
The unit calculates the maximum allowed Maximum Tx Power according to the
unit properties and parameters listed above, and displays the allowed range when
the Maximum Tx Power parameter is selected.
The default Maximum Tx Power is the highest allowed value.
BreezeACCESS 4900 System Manual
100
Menus and Parameters
4.2.6.2.7.3 ATPC Parameters in AU
4.2.6.2.7.3.1 ATPC Option
The ATPC Option enables or disables the Automatic Transmit Power Control
(ATPC) algorithm.
The default is Enable.
4.2.6.2.7.3.2 ATPC Minimum SNR Level
The Minimum SNR Level defines the lowest SNR at which you want each SU to be
received at the AU (the lower limit of the optimal reception level range).
Available values: 4 to 60 (dB).
Default value: 28 (dB).
4.2.6.2.7.3.3 ATPC Delta from Minimum SNR Level
The Delta from Minimum SNR Level is used to define the highest SNR at which
you want each SU to be received at the AU (the higher limit of the optimal
reception level range):
Max. Level=Minimum SNR Level + Delta from Minimum SNR Level.
Available values: 4 to 20 (dB).
Default value: 11 (dB).
4.2.6.2.7.3.4 Minimum Interval Between ATPC Messages
The Minimum Interval Between ATPC Messages parameter sets the minimal time
between consecutive power-up/power-down messages to a specific SU. Setting a
low value for this parameter may lead to higher overhead and to an excessive rate
of power level changes at the SUs. High values for this parameter increase the
time it will take the SUs to reach optimal transmit power level.
Available values: 1 to 3600 seconds.
Default value: 30 seconds.
4.2.6.2.7.3.5 ATPC Power Level Step
The ATPC Power Level Step parameter defines the step size to be used by the SUs
for incrementing/decrementing the Current Transmit Power after receiving a
power-up/power-down message. If the distance between the value of the Current
Transmit Power and the desired range is smaller than the step size, the powerup/power-down message will include the specific step value required for this
condition.
Valid range: 1-20 (dB)
Default value: 5 (dB)
Operation and Administration
101
Chapter 4 - Operation and Administration
4.2.6.2.7.4 ATPC Parameters in SU
4.2.6.2.7.4.1 ATPC Option
The ATPC Option enables or disables the Automatic Transmit Power Control
(ATPC) algorithm. The parameter takes effect immediately. However, when
changed from Enable to Disable, the transmit power level will remain at the last
Current Transmit Power determined by the ATPC algorithm before it was
disabled. It will change to the value configured for the Initial Transmit Power
parameter only after the next reset or following loss of synchronization.
The default is Enable.
NOTE
The accuracy of the Transmit Power level is typically +/- 1 dB. However, at levels that are 15 dB or
more below the maximum supported by the hardware, the accuracy is +/- 3 dB. At these levels the
use of ATPC may cause significant fluctuations in the power level of the transmitted signal. When
operating at such low levels, it is recommended to disable the ATPC Option and to set the Transmit
Power parameter to the average Tx Power level before the ATPC was disabled.
4.2.6.2.7.5 Tx Control (AU only)
The Tx Control option enables turning Off/On the AU’s transmitter. This feature
can be used during maintenance or testing to avoid transmissions using
undesired parameters.
The parameter is available only when managing the unit from its Ethernet port.
The default is On.
NOTE
The unit is reset immediately upon configuring the Tx Control parameter to either On or Off (even if
it is set to its current option).
4.2.6.2.8
Antenna Gain
The Antenna Gain parameter enables to define the net gain of a detached
antenna. The configured gain should take into account the attenuation of the
cable connecting the antenna to the unit. The Antenna Gain is important
especially in cases when there is a limit on the EIRP allowed for the unit; the
maximum allowed value for the Transmit Power parameters cannot exceed the
value of (EIRP - Antenna Gain), where the EIRP is defined in the selected SubBand.
In certain units with an integral antenna the Antenna Gain is not available as a
configurable parameter. However, it is available as a read-only parameter in the
applicable “Show” menus.
The range is 0–50 (dB). A value of “Don’t Care” means that the actual value is not
important. A value of “Not Set Yet” means that the unit will not transmit until the
actual value (in the range 0 to 50) is configured. The unit can be configured to
BreezeACCESS 4900 System Manual
102
Menus and Parameters
“Don’t Care” or “Not Set Yet” only in factory. Once a value is configured, it is not
possible to reconfigure the unit to either “Don’t Care” or “Not Set Yet”.
The default value depends on unit type. In SUs with integral antenna it is set to
19 (read only). The default value for AUs that are supplied with a detached
antenna is in accordance with the antenna’s gain. In units supplied without an
antenna the default is typically “Not Set Yet”.
4.2.6.2.9
Cell Distance Parameters (AU only)
The higher the distance of an SU from the AU that is serving it, the higher the
time it takes for messages sent by one of them to reach the other. To ensure
appropriate services to all SUs regardless of their distance from the AU while
maintaining a high overall performance level, two parameters should be adapted
to the distances of SUs from the serving AU:
The time that a unit waits for a response message before retransmission
(acknowledge time delay) should take into account the round trip propagation
delay of the farthest SU. (The one-way propagation delay at 5 GHz is 3.3
microsecond/km.) The higher the distance from the AU of the farthest SU
served by it, the higher the acknowledge time delay for all units in the cell
should be.
To ensure fairness in the contention back-off algorithm between SUs located
at different distances from the AU, the size of the time slot should also take
into account the one-way propagation delay. The size of the time slot of all
units in the cell should be proportional to the distance from the AU of the
farthest SU served by it.
The distance from the AU of the farthest SU served by it can be determined either
manually or automatically. In manual mode, this distance is configured
manually. In automatic mode, the AU uses a special algorithm to estimate its
distance from each of the SUs it serves, determine which SU is located the
farthest and use the estimated distance of the farthest SU as the maximum
distance.
It should be noted that if the size of the time slot used by all units is adapted to
the distance of the farthest unit, then no unit will have an advantage when
competing for services. However, this reduces the overall achievable throughput
of the cell. In certain situations, the operator may decide to improve the overall
throughput by reducing the slot size below the value required for full fairness.
This means that when there is competition for bandwidth, the back-off algorithm
will give an advantage to SUs that are located closer to the AU.
The Cell Distance Parameters menu includes the following parameters:
Operation and Administration
103
Chapter 4 - Operation and Administration
4.2.6.2.9.1 Cell Distance Mode
The Cell Distance Mode option defines whether the maximum distance of the AU
from any of the SUs it serves will be determined manually (using the Maximum
Cell Distance parameter) or automatically.
The Options are Automatic or Manual.
The default is Automatic.
4.2.6.2.9.2 Maximum Cell Distance
The Maximum Cell Distance parameter allows configuring the maximum distance
when the Cell Distance Mode option is Manual.
The range is 0 to 54 (Km). The value of 0 has a special meaning for No
Compensation: Acknowledge Time Out is set to a value representing the
maximum distance of 54 km. The time slot size is set to its minimal value of 9
microseconds.
The default is 0 (No Compensation).
4.2.6.2.9.3 Fairness Factor
The Fairness Factor enables to define the level of fairness in providing services to
different SUs. When set to 100%, all SUs have the same probability of getting
services when competing for bandwidth. If set to X%, then SUs located up to X%
of the maximum distance from the AU will have an advantage in getting services
over SUs located farther than this distance.
The range is 0 to 100 (%)
The default is 100 (%).
4.2.6.2.9.4 Show Cell Distance Parameters
Select Show Cell Distance Parameters to view the Cell Distance parameters. In
addition, the Measured Maximum Cell Distance and the MAC address of the unit
that the mechanism found to be the farthest from the AU are displayed. A
distance of 1 km means any distance below 2 km.
4.2.6.2.10 Arbitration Inter-Frame Spacing (AIFS)
The time interval between two consecutive transmissions of frames is called InterFrame Spacing (IFS). This is the time during which the unit determines whether
the medium is idle using the carrier sense mechanism. The IFS depends on the
type of the next frame to be transmitted, as follows:
SIFS (Short Inter-Frame Spacing) is used for certain frames that should be
transmitted immediately, such as ACK and CTS frames. The value of SIFS is
16 microseconds.
BreezeACCESS 4900 System Manual
104
Menus and Parameters
DIFS (Distributed coordination function Inter-Frame Spacing) is typically used
for other frame types when the medium is free. If the unit decides that the
medium is not free, it will defer transmission by DIFS plus a number of time
slots as determined by the Contention Window back-off algorithm (see
section 4.2.6.5.2) after reaching a decision that the medium has become free.
DIFS equal SIFS plus AIFS, where AIFS can be configured to one or two time
slots. Typically, AIFS should be configured to two time slots. A value of 1 should
only be used in one of the two units in a point-to-point link, where in the other
unit the AIFS remains configured to two time slots. This ensures that the unit
with AIFS configured to one has an advantage over the other unit, provided that
the Minimum Contention Window (section 4.2.6.5.2) parameter in both units is
configured to 0 to disable the contention window back-off algorithm.
The available options are 1 or 2 (time slots).
The default is 2 time slots.
CAUTION
An AIFS value of 1 should only be used in point-to-point applications. Otherwise the default value of
2 must always be used. In a point-to-point link, only one unit should be configured to an AIFS value
of 1. When both units need to transmit, the unit with an AIFS value of 1 will have an advantage over
the unit with AIFS of 2. In this case, the Minimum Contention Window parameter in both units must
be configured to 0 to disable the contention window back-off algorithm.
4.2.6.2.11 Maximum Number of Associations (AU only)
The Maximum Number of Associations parameter defines the maximum number
of Subscriber Units that can be associated with the selected AU, while still
guaranteeing the required quality of service to customers.
Available values for AU-BS and AU-SA range from 0 to 512. For AUS-BS and
AUS-SA the range is from 0 to 5.
Default value for AU-BS and AU-SA is 512. For AUS-BS and AUS-SA the default
is 5.
NOTE
When the Data Encryption Option is enabled, the actual maximum number of SUs that can
associate with the AU-BS or AU-SA is limited to 124. The number displayed for the Maximum
Number of Associations is the value configured for this parameter, which might be higher than the
actual limit. The Maximum Number of Associations Limit (512 when Data Encryption is disabled,
124 when Data Encryption is enabled) is indicated in the Show Air Interface Parameters display.
Operation and Administration
105
Chapter 4 - Operation and Administration
NOTE
There is no aging time for SUs. An SU is only removed from the list of associated SUs under the
following conditions:
A SNAP frame is received from another AU indicating that the SU is now associated with the
other AU.
The SU failed to respond to a certain number of consecutive frames transmitted by the AU and
is considered to have "aged out".
Therefore, the database of associated SUs may include units no longer associated with the AU. If
the number of associated SUs has reached the value of the Maximum Number of Associations
parameter, the selected AU cannot serve additional SUs. To view the current number of associated
SUs, use the Display Association Info option in the MAC Address Database menu. To delete
inactive SUs from the database you must reset the AU.
4.2.6.2.12 Wireless Link Trap Threshold (AU only)
The Wireless Link Trap Threshold parameter defines the threshold for the
wireless quality trap, indicating that the quality of the wireless link has dropped
below (on trap) or has increased above (off trap) the specified threshold.
The Wireless Link Trap Threshold is in percentage of retransmissions, and the
allowed range is from 1 to 100 (%).
The default is 30 (%).
4.2.6.2.13 Spectrum Analysis
Gaining knowledge of the noise characteristics per channel enables construction
of a relatively noise free working environment. In order to gain information
regarding noise characteristics in the location of the unit, the unit will enter
passive scanning mode for a definite period, during which information will be
gathered. The scanned channels will be the channels comprising the selected sub
set.
Upon activating the spectrum analysis the unit will automatically reset. During
the information-gathering period the unit will not receive nor transmit data. It
also will not be able to synchronize/associate, meaning that it cannot be
managed via the wireless link. During the spectrum analysis period the unit
security mode is changed to promiscuous to enable gathering information
regarding all legal frames received by the unit. At the end of the period the unit
will reset automatically regaining normal operability upon start up.
The Spectrum Analysis submenu includes the following options:
4.2.6.2.13.1 Spectrum Analysis Channel Scan Period
The Spectrum Analysis Channel Scan Period is the period of staying on each
channel during each cycle for information gathering when performing spectrum
analysis.
Range: 2-30 seconds.
BreezeACCESS 4900 System Manual
106
Menus and Parameters
Default value: 5 seconds.
4.2.6.2.13.2 Spectrum Analysis Scan Cycles
The Spectrum Analysis Scan Cycle is the number of scanning cycles when
performing Spectrum Analysis.
Range: 1-100 cycles.
Default value: 2 cycles.
4.2.6.2.13.3 Automatic Channel Selection (AU only)
The Automatic Channel selection option defines weather the AU will choose the
best noise free channel upon startup after completion of the spectrum analysis
process. The selection is per analysis: when the analysis is completed it will be
disabled automatically.
The default is Disable.
4.2.6.2.13.4 Spectrum Analysis Activation
The Spectrum analysis Activation option enables activation of the spectrum
analysis process. Upon activation, the unit will reset automatically and start-up
in spectrum analysis mode.
4.2.6.2.13.5 Reset Spectrum Analysis Information
The Reset Spectrum Analysis Information option enables resetting the spectrum
analysis counters.
4.2.6.2.13.6 Spectrum Analysis Information Display
The Spectrum Analysis Information Display option enables viewing the results of
the last analysis process. The displayed information includes the following details
for each channel:
Frequency in MHz
Signal Count: The number of signals (excluding OFDM frames with the
correct bandwidth) in the channel.
Signal SNR: The approximate SNR of signals (excluding OFDM frames with
the correct bandwidth) in the channel.
Signal Width: The average width in microseconds of signals (excluding OFDM
frames with the correct bandwidth) in the channel.
OFDM Frames: The number of OFDM frames with the correct bandwidth
detected in the channel.
Operation and Administration
107
Chapter 4 - Operation and Administration
4.2.6.2.13.7 Spectrum Analysis Information Display - Continuous
The Spectrum Analysis Information Display - Continuous option is available only
when the analysis process is active. It enables viewing the continuously updated
results of the current analysis process. The displayed information includes the
same details available for a regular Spectrum Analysis Information Display
option.
4.2.6.2.14 Lost Beacons Transmission Watchdog Threshold
When it is unable to send beacon frames for a predetermined period of time, such
as in the case of interferences, the AU resets itself. The Lost Beacons
Transmission Threshold parameter represents the number of consecutive lost
beacons after which the unit will reset itself.
The range for this parameter is 100 – 1000, its default value being 218. When the
parameter is set to 0, this feature is disabled, i.e. internal refresh will never be
performed.
4.2.6.2.15 Disassociate (AU only)
The Disassociate feature enables disassociating all SUs associated with the AU or
a selected SU. This feature is useful during configuration changes, enabling to
force the SU(s) to re-initiate the association process, including the search for the
best AU (or a preferred AU) using the Best AU process, without performing a full
reset.
The Disassociate submenu includes two options:
Disassociate All SUs
Disassociate SU By MAC Address: to disassociate a selected SU
4.2.6.3
Network Management Parameters
The Network Management Parameters menu enables protecting the Unit from
unauthorized access by defining a set of discrete IP addresses as well as IP
address ranges from which the unit can be managed using protocols such as
Telnet, FTP, TFTP, SNMP, DHCP and ICMP. This excludes management messages
generated in the unit, such as Traps or Ping Test frames, which are not filtered.
The direction from which management access is permitted can also be
configured, which means that management access may be permitted from the
wireless medium only, from the wired Ethernet only, or from both.
The Network Management Parameters menu includes the following options:
Access to Network Management
Network Management Filtering
BreezeACCESS 4900 System Manual
108
Menus and Parameters
Set Network Management IP address
Delete a Network Management IP Address
Delete All Network Management IP Addresses
Set/Change Network Management IP Address Ranges
SNMP Traps
4.2.6.3.1
Access to Network Management
The Access to Network Management option defines the port through which the
unit can be managed. The following options are available:
From Wireless Link Only
From Ethernet Only
From Both Ethernet and Wireless Link
The default selection is From Both Ethernet and Wireless Link.
CAUTION
Be careful not to block your access to the unit. For example, if you manage an SU via the wireless
link, setting the Access to Network Management parameter to From Ethernet Only completely
blocks your management access to the unit. In this case, a technician may be required to change
the settings at the user's site.
4.2.6.3.2
Network Management Filtering
The Network Management Filtering option enables or disables the IP address
based management filtering. If management filtering is enabled, the unit can only
be managed by stations with IP addresses matching one of the entries in either
the Network Management IP Addresses list or in the Network Management IP
Address Ranges list, described below, and that are connected to the unit via the
defined port(s). The following options are available:
Disable: No IP address based filtering is configured.
Activate IP Filter on Ethernet Port: Applicable only if the Access to Network
Management parameter is configured to either From Ethernet Only or From
Both Ethernet and Wireless Link. The unit can be managed from the Ethernet
port only by stations with IP addresses matching one of the entries in the Set
Network Management IP Addresses parameter. If the Access to Network
Management parameter is configured to From Both Ethernet and Wireless
Link then no IP address based filtering is configured for the wireless port.
Operation and Administration
109
Chapter 4 - Operation and Administration
Activate IP Filter on Wireless Link Port: Applicable only if the Access to
Network Management parameter is configured to either From Wireless Link
Only or From Both Ethernet and Wireless Link. The unit can be managed
from the wireless port only by stations with IP addresses matching one of the
entries in the Set Network Management IP Addresses parameter. If the Access
to Network Management parameter is configured to From Both Ethernet and
Wireless Link then no IP address based filtering is configured for the Ethernet
port.
Activate IP filter on Both Ethernet and Wireless Link Ports: Applicable to
all options of the Access to Network Management parameter. The unit can be
managed from the port(s) defined by the Access to Network Management
parameter only by stations with IP addresses matching one of the entries in
the Set Network Management IP Addresses parameter.
The default selection is Disable.
4.2.6.3.3
Set Network Management IP Address
The Set Network Management IP Address option enables defining up to 10 IP
addresses of devices that can manage the unit if the Network Management
Filtering option is enabled.
The default Network Management IP Address is 0.0.0.0 (all 10 addresses).
4.2.6.3.4
Delete a Network Management IP Address
The Delete Network Management IP Address option enables deleting IP address
entries from the Network Management IP Addresses list.
4.2.6.3.5
Delete All Network Management IP Addresses
The Delete All Network Management IP Addresses option enables deleting all
entries from the Network Management IP Addresses list.
4.2.6.3.6
Set/Change Network Management IP Address Ranges
The Set/Change Network Management IP address Ranges menu enables defining,
updating or deleting IP address ranges from which the unit can be managed if the
Network Management Filtering option is enabled. This is in addition to the
previous options in the Network Management menu that enable defining,
updating and deleting discrete IP addresses.
The menu includes the following options:
4.2.6.3.6.1 Set/Change Network Management IP Address Ranges
The Set/Change Network Management IP Address Ranges option enables
defining/updating up to 10 IP address ranges from which the unit can be
managed if the Network Management Filtering option is enabled.
BreezeACCESS 4900 System Manual
110
Menus and Parameters
The default Network Management IP Address Range is 0.0.0.0 TO 0.0.0.0 (all 10
ranges).
A range can be defined using a string that includes either a start and end
address, in the format “ to ” (example: 192.168.1.1
to 192.168.1.255), or a base address and a mask, in the format “
mask ” (example: 192.168.1.1 mask 255.255.255.0).
4.2.6.3.6.2 Delete Network Management IP Address Range
The Delete Network Management IP Address Range option enables deleting IP
address range entries from the Network Management IP Address Ranges list.
4.2.6.3.6.3 Delete All Network Management IP Address Ranges
The Delete All Network Management IP Address Ranges option enables deleting
all entries from the Network Management IP Address Ranges list.
4.2.6.3.7
SNMP Traps
The SNMP submenu enables or disables the transmission of SNMP Traps. If this
option is enabled, up to 10 IP addresses of stations to which SNMP traps are sent
can be defined.
4.2.6.3.7.1 Send SNMP Traps
The Send SNMP Traps option enables or disables the sending of SNMP traps.
The default selection is Disable.
4.2.6.3.7.2 SNMP Traps Destination IP Addresses
The SNMP Traps Destination IP Addresses submenu enables defining up to 10 IP
addresses of devices to which the SNMP Traps are to be sent.
The default of all 10 SNMP Traps IP destinations is 0.0.0.0.
4.2.6.3.7.3 SNMP Traps Community
The SNMP Traps Community option enables defining the Community name for
each IP address to which SNMP Trap messages are to be sent.
Valid strings: Up to 8 ASCII characters.
The default for all 10 addresses is “public”, which is the default Read community.
4.2.6.3.7.4 Delete One Trap Address
The Delete One Trap Address option enables deleting Trap address entries from
the SNMP Traps Addresses list.
4.2.6.3.7.5 Delete All Trap Addresses
The Delete All Trap Addresses option enables deleting all entries from the SNMP
Traps Addresses list.
Operation and Administration
111
Chapter 4 - Operation and Administration
4.2.6.4
Bridge Parameters
The Bridge Parameters menu provides a series of parameter sets that enables
configuring parameters such as control and filtering options for broadcast
transmissions, VLAN support, and Type of Service prioritization.
The Bridge Parameters menu includes the following options:
VLAN Support
Ethernet Broadcast Filtering (SU only)
Ethernet Broadcast/Multicast Limiter
Bridge Aging Time
Roaming Option (SU only)
Broadcast Relaying (AU only)
Unicast Relaying (AU only)
MAC Address Deny List (AU only)
4.2.6.4.1
VLAN Support
The VLAN Support menu enables defining the parameters related to the IEEE
802.1Q compliant VLAN aware (Virtual LAN aware) feature of the units. Each
VLAN includes stations that can communicate with each other, but cannot
communicate with stations belonging to different VLANs. The VLAN feature also
provides the ability to set traffic priorities for transmission of certain frames. The
information related to the VLAN is included in the VLAN Tag Header, which is
inserted in each frame between the MAC header and the data. VLAN
implementation in BreezeACCESS 4900 units supports frame routing by port
information, whereby each port is connected to only one VLAN.
The VLAN Support menu includes the following parameters:
VLAN Link Type
VLAN ID – Data (SU only)
VLAN ID – Management
VLAN Forwarding
BreezeACCESS 4900 System Manual
112
Menus and Parameters
VLAN Relaying (AU only)
VLAN Traffic Priority
4.2.6.4.1.1 VLAN ID-Data (SU only)
The VLAN ID-Data is applicable only when the VLAN Link Type parameter is set
to Access Link. It enables defining the VLAN ID for data frames, which identifies
the VLAN to which the unit belongs.
Valid values range from 1 to 4094.
Default value: 1.
The VLAN ID-Data affects frames received from the wireless link port, as follows:
Only tagged frames with a VLAN ID (VID) equal to the VLAN ID-Data defined
in the unit are forwarded to the Ethernet port.
The tag headers are removed from the data frames received from the wireless
link before they are transmitted on the Ethernet port.
The VLAN ID-Data affects frames received from the Ethernet port, as follows:
A VLAN Data Tag is inserted in all untagged frames received from the
Ethernet port before transmission on the wireless link. The tag includes the
values of the VLAN ID-Data and the VLAN Priority-Data parameters.
Tagged frames received on Ethernet port, which are meant to be forwarded to
the wireless link port, are discarded. This includes frames with tagging for
prioritization purposes only.
4.2.6.4.1.2 VLAN ID-Management
The VLAN ID-Management is applicable for all link types. It enables defining the
VLAN ID for management frames, which identifies remote stations for
management purposes. This applies to all management applications using
protocols such as SNMP, TFTP, ICMP (ping), DHCP and Telnet. All
servers/stations using these protocols must tag the management frames sent to
the unit with the value of the VLAN ID-Management parameter.
Valid values: 1 to 4094 or 65535 (No VLAN).
The default value is 65535.
If the VLAN ID-Management is other than 65535:
Operation and Administration
113
Chapter 4 - Operation and Administration
Only tagged management frames with a matching VLAN ID received on either
the Ethernet or wireless link ports are forwarded to the unit.
A VLAN Management Tag is inserted in all management frames generated by
the unit before transmission on either the Ethernet or wireless link port. The
tag includes the values of the VLAN ID-Management and the VLAN PriorityManagement parameters.
If the VLAN ID-Management is 65535 (No VLAN):
Only untagged management frames received on either the Ethernet or wireless
link ports are forwarded to the unit.
Management frames generated by the unit are not tagged.
The following table summarizes the functionality of the internal management port
in accordance with the value of the VLAN ID-Management parameter. The table is
valid for all link types. Refer to the VLAN Link Type - Access Link and Trunk Link
options for some restrictions when configuring this parameter.
Table 4-6: VLAN Management Port Functionality
Action
Management Port - Internal
Receive from Ethernet
Tagged frames, matching VID-M
Untagged frames when VID-M=65535
Receive from Wireless
Tagged frames, matching VID-M
Untagged frames when VID-M=65535
Transmit
Insert VID-M, PID-M
Table Legend:
VID-M: VLAN ID-Management
PID-M: VLAN Priority-Management
4.2.6.4.1.3 VLAN Link Type
The VLAN Link Type parameter enables defining the functionality of the VLAN
aware capability of the unit.
The available options are Hybrid Link, Trunk Link and Access Link (Access Link
option is available only in SUs).
The default selection is Hybrid Link.
BreezeACCESS 4900 System Manual
114
Menus and Parameters
4.2.6.4.1.3.1 Access Link (SU only)
Access Link transfers frames while tagging/untagging them since all devices
connected to the unit are VLAN unaware. Thus, the unit cannot transfer tagged
frames.
Table 4-7 summarizes the functionality of the data port for an Access link.
Table 4-7: VLAN Data Port Functionality - Access Link
Action
Data Port - SU
Receive from Ethernet
Untagged frames
Accept from Wireless
Tagged frames, matching VID-D
Tag Insert
VID-D, PID-D (to wireless)
Tag Remove
Yes (to Ethernet)
Table Legend:
VID-D: VLAN ID-Data
PID-D: VLAN Priority-Data
4.2.6.4.1.3.2 Trunk Link
Trunk Link transfers only tagged frames, as all devices connected to the unit are
VLAN aware. Only tagged data frames received on the Ethernet or wireless link
ports are forwarded.
CAUTION
It is not recommended that you configure a unit as a Trunk Link with the VLAN ID-Management
parameter set at 65535, as it does not forward any 'NO VLAN' management frames to its other
port, making it impossible to manage devices connected behind the unit that are also configured
with 'NO VLAN'.
If the VLAN Forwarding option is enabled, a data frame received with a VLAN ID
that is not a member of the unit's VLAN Forwarding List is discarded.
NOTE
If the VLAN Forwarding option is enabled, be sure to include the VLAN ID-Management value of
all units that should be managed via the wireless port of the unit, in the Forwarding List.
If the VLAN Relaying option is enabled in an AU, a data frame relayed with a
VLAN ID that is not a member of the unit's VLAN Relaying List is discarded.
Operation and Administration
115
Chapter 4 - Operation and Administration
NOTE
If the VLAN Relaying option is enabled and you manage your devices from behind an SU unit, be
sure to include the VLAN ID-Management value of all units to be managed when relaying via the
wireless port of the AU unit, in the Relaying List. If the VLAN Forwarding option is also enabled in
the AU, these VLAN IDs should also be included in the Forwarding List.
Table 4-8 summarizes the functionality of the data port for a Trunk link.
Table 4-8: VLAN Data Port Functionality - Trunk Link
Action
Data Port – AU and SU
Accept from Ethernet
Tagged frames.
If Forwarding is enabled, only frames with
VLAN ID values which are included in the
Forwarding list
Accept from Wireless
Tagged frames
If Forwarding is enabled, only frames with
VLAN ID values which are included in the
Forwarding list
Tag Insert
No
Tag Remove
No
4.2.6.4.1.3.3 Hybrid Link
Hybrid Link transfers both tagged and untagged frames, as the devices connected
to the unit can be either VLAN aware or VLAN unaware. This is equivalent to
defining no VLAN support, as the unit is transparent to VLAN.
Table 4-9 summarizes the functionality of the data port for a Hybrid link.
Table 4-9: VLAN Data Port Functionality - Hybrid Link
Action
Data Port – AU and SU
Accept from Ethernet
All
Accept from Wireless
All
Tag Insert
No
Tag Remove
No
BreezeACCESS 4900 System Manual
116
Menus and Parameters
4.2.6.4.1.4 VLAN Forwarding (AU and SU)
The VLAN Forwarding feature is applicable for Trunk Links only. It enables
defining the VLAN ID values to be included in the VLAN Forwarding List. If the
Link Type is defined as a Trunk Link and the VLAN Forwarding option is enabled,
a data frame received with a VLAN ID that is not a member of the unit's VLAN
Forwarding List is discarded.
The VLAN Forwarding submenu provides the following options:
4.2.6.4.1.4.1 VLAN Forwarding Support
The VLAN Forwarding Support option enables or disables the VLAN Forwarding
feature.
Available selections are Disable and Enable.
The default selection is Disable.
4.2.6.4.1.4.2 Add Forwarding VLAN ID
The Add Forwarding VLAN ID option enables adding a VLAN ID to the VLAN
Forwarding List. One VLAN ID can be entered at a time. The maximum number of
VLAN IDs in the VLAN Forwarding List is 20.
Valid values are 1 to 4094.
4.2.6.4.1.4.3 Remove Forwarding VLAN ID
The Remove Forwarding VLAN ID option enables removing a VLAN ID from the
VLAN ID Forwarding List.
Valid values are VID values (from 1 to 4094) that are included in the VLAN
Forwarding List.
4.2.6.4.1.4.4 Show VLAN ID Forwarding List
The Show VLAN Forwarding List option displays the values of the VLAN IDs
included in the VLAN Forwarding List.
NOTE
If the VLAN ID Forwarding List is empty and the VLAN Forwarding Support is set to Enable, then all
data frames are discarded.
If VLAN Relaying Support and VLAN Forwarding Support are both enabled, then all VLAN IDs
configured in the Relaying List must also be configured in the Forwarding List.
4.2.6.4.1.5 VLAN Relaying (AU only)
The VLAN Relaying feature is applicable for Trunk Links only. It enables defining
the VLAN ID values to be included in the VLAN Relaying List. If the Link Type is
defined as Trunk Link and the VLAN Relaying Support option is enabled, a frame
relayed from the wireless link, which is a frame received from the wireless link
that should be transmitted back through the wireless link, with a VLAN ID that is
Operation and Administration
117
Chapter 4 - Operation and Administration
not a member of the unit's VLAN Relaying List, is discarded. If VLAN Forwarding
Support is also enabled, it is necessary to configure all the VLAN IDs in the
Relaying List also in the Forwarding List to enable the relaying operation.
The VLAN Relaying menu provides the following options:
4.2.6.4.1.5.1 VLAN Relaying Support
The VLAN Relaying Support option enables or disables the VLAN Relaying
feature.
Available selections are Disable and Enable.
The default selection is Disable.
4.2.6.4.1.5.2 Add Relaying VLAN ID
The Add Relaying VLAN ID option enables adding a VLAN ID to the VLAN
Relaying List. One VLAN ID can be entered at a time. The maximum number of
VLAN IDs in the VLAN Relaying List is 20.
Valid values are 1 to 4094.
4.2.6.4.1.5.3 Remove Relaying VLAN ID
The Remove Relaying VLAN ID option enables removing a VLAN ID from the VLAN
ID Relaying List. Valid values are VID values (from 1 to 4094)) that are included
in the VLAN Relaying List.
4.2.6.4.1.5.4 Show VLAN ID Relaying List
The Show VLAN Relaying option displays the values of the VLAN IDs included in
the VLAN Relaying List.
NOTE
If the VLAN ID Relaying List is empty and the VLAN Relaying Support is Enabled, then all data
frames relayed from the wireless link are discarded.
If VLAN Relaying Support and VLAN Forwarding Support are both enabled, then all VLAN IDs
configured in the Relaying List must also be configured in the Forwarding List.
4.2.6.4.1.6 VLAN Traffic Priority
The VLAN Traffic Priority menu enables configuring the VLAN Priority field in
applicable frames. These parameters only impact the way in which other VLAN
aware devices in the network will handle the packet. In version 3.2 all parameters
that affect prioritization within the BreezeACCES 4900 system, including VLANbased prioritization, are located in the Services > Traffic Prioritization menu.
The VLAN Traffic Priority menu includes the following parameters:
VLAN Priority – Data (SU only)
VLAN Priority – Management
BreezeACCESS 4900 System Manual
118
Menus and Parameters
4.2.6.4.1.6.1 VLAN Priority - Data (SU only)
The VLAN Priority - Data is applicable for Access Links only. It enables
configuring the value of the VLAN Priority field for data frames transmitted to the
wireless link. All data frames are routed to the Low queue. This parameter only
impacts the way other VLAN aware devices handle the packet.
Valid values range from 0 to 7.
The default value is 0.
4.2.6.4.1.6.2 VLAN Priority - Management
The VLAN Priority - Management enables defining the value of the VLAN Priority
field for management frames in units with VLAN ID-Management that is other
than 65535. All management frames are routed to the High queue. This
parameter only impacts the way other VLAN aware devices handle the packet.
Valid values range from 0 to 7.
The default value is 4 for SUs and 0 for AUs.
4.2.6.4.1.7 Show VLAN Parameters
The Show VLAN Parameters option displays the current values of the VLAN
support parameters.
4.2.6.4.2
Ethernet Broadcast Filtering (SU only)
The Ethernet Broadcast Filtering menu enables defining the layer 2 (Ethernet)
broadcast and multicast filtering capabilities for the selected SU. Filtering the
Ethernet broadcasts enhances the security of the system and saves bandwidth on
the wireless medium by blocking protocols that are typically used in the
customer's LAN but are not relevant for other customers, such as NetBios, which
is used by the Microsoft Network Neighborhood. Enabling this feature blocks
Ethernet broadcasts and multicasts by setting the I/G bit at the destination
address to 1. This feature should not be enabled when there is a router behind
the SU.
The Ethernet Broadcast Filtering menu includes the following parameters:
Filter Options
DHCP Broadcast Override Filter
PPPoE Broadcast Override Filter
ARP Broadcast Override Filter
Operation and Administration
119
Chapter 4 - Operation and Administration
4.2.6.4.2.1 Filter Options
The Filter Options enables defining the Ethernet Broadcast filtering functionality
of the unit. Select from the following options:
Disable - no Ethernet Broadcast Filtering.
On Ethernet Port Only - filters broadcast messages received from the
Ethernet port.
On Wireless Port Only - filters broadcast messages received from the wireless
link port.
On Both Ethernet and Wireless Ports - filters broadcast messages received
from both the Ethernet and wireless link ports.
The default selection is Disable.
4.2.6.4.2.2 DHCP Broadcast Override Filter
The DHCP Broadcast Override Filter option enables or disables the broadcasting
of DHCP messages. Even if according to the selected option in the Filter Options
parameter, broadcast messages should be filtered, DHCP broadcasts are
transmitted if this parameter is set to Enable. Select from the following options:
Disable - DHCP Broadcast messages are filtered or transmitted according to
the general filtering criteria in the Filter Options parameter.
Enable - DHCP Broadcast messages are transmitted regardless of the selected
value of the Filter Options parameter.
The default selection is Disable.
4.2.6.4.2.3 PPPoE Broadcast Override Filter
The PPPoE Broadcast Override Filter option enables or disables the broadcasting
of PPPoE (Point to Point Protocol over Ethernet) messages. Even if according to
the selected option in the Filter Options parameter, broadcast messages should
be filtered, PPPoE broadcasts are transmitted if this parameter is set to Enable.
Select from the following options:
Disable - PPPoE Broadcast messages are filtered or transmitted according to
the general filtering criteria in the Filter Options parameter.
Enable - PPPoE Broadcast messages are transmitted regardless of the
selected value of the Filter Options parameter.
BreezeACCESS 4900 System Manual
120
Menus and Parameters
The default selection is Disable.
4.2.6.4.2.4 ARP Broadcast Override Filter
The ARP Broadcast Override Filter option enables or disables the broadcasting of
ARP messages. Even if according to the selected option in the Filter Options
parameter, broadcast messages should be filtered, ARP broadcasts are
transmitted if this parameter is set to Enable. Select from the following options:
Disable - ARP messages are filtered or transmitted according to the general
filtering criteria in the Filter Options parameter.
Enable - ARP messages are transmitted regardless of the selected value of the
Filter Options parameter.
The default selection is Enable.
4.2.6.4.3
Ethernet Broadcast/Multicast Limiter
The Ethernet Broadcast/Multicast Limiter parameters, available in both AU and
SU, enable to limit the number of broadcast and/or multicast packets that can be
transmitted per second, in order to prevent the potential flooding of the wireless
medium by certain ARP attacks.
In SUs, the limiter is placed after the Ethernet Broadcast Filters. For this reason,
the limiter will receive only the packets that pass through these filters. If the
Ethernet filters of the SU are disabled, the limiter will be applied to all relevant
packets received.
When the Ethernet Broadcast/Multicast Limiter is enabled and the specified limit
is reached, the unit will send a trap. The trap will be sent periodically till the
number of broadcast/multicast packets will be less than the maximum. The trap
will inform the user how many packets were discarded in the last period.
The Ethernet Broadcast/Multicast Limiter menu allows viewing and setting the
following parameters:
4.2.6.4.3.1 Ethernet Broadcast/Multicast Limiter Option
The Ethernet Broadcast/Multicast Limiter Option defines the limiter’s
functionality. The available options are:
Disable: No limiter
Limit only Broadcast Packets
Limit Multicast Packets that are not Broadcasts
Limit All Multicast Packets (including broadcast)
Operation and Administration
121
Chapter 4 - Operation and Administration
The default selection is Disable.
4.2.6.4.3.2 Ethernet Broadcast/Multicast Limiter Threshold
The Ethernet Broadcast/Multicast Limiter Threshold defines the maximum
number of packets per second that will pass the limiter when it is enabled.
The range is from 0 to 204800 (packets/second).
The default is 50 packets.
4.2.6.4.3.3 Ethernet Broadcast/Multicast Limiter Send Trap Interval
The Ethernet Broadcast/Multicast Limiter Send Trap Interval defines the
minimum time in minutes between two consecutive transmissions of the trap
indicating the number of packets that were dropped by the limiter since the
previous trap (or since the time that the limit has been exceeded).
The range is from 1 to 60 minutes.
The default is 5 minutes.
4.2.6.4.4
Bridge Aging Time
The Bridge Aging Time parameter enables selecting the bridge aging time for
learned addresses of devices on both the wired and wireless sides, not including
BreezeACCESS 4900 units.
The available range is 20 to 2000 seconds.
The default value is 300 seconds.
4.2.6.4.5
Broadcast Relaying (AU only)
The Broadcast Relaying option enables selecting whether the unit performs
broadcast relaying. When the Broadcast Relaying parameter is enabled,
broadcast packets originating from devices on the wireless link are transmitted by
the AU back to the wireless link devices, as well as to the wired LAN. If disabled,
these packets are sent only to the local wired LAN and are not sent back to the
wireless link. Disable the broadcast relaying only if all broadcast messages from
the wireless link are certain to be directed to the wired LAN.
The default selection is Enable.
4.2.6.4.6
Unicast Relaying (AU only)
The Unicast Relaying option enables selecting whether the unit performs unicast
relaying. When the Unicast Relaying parameter is enabled, unicast packets
originating from devices on the wireless link can be transmitted back to the
wireless link devices. If disabled, these packets are not sent to the wireless link
even if they are intended for devices on the wireless link. Disable the Unicast
Relaying parameter only if all unicast messages from the wireless link are certain
to be directed to the local wired LAN.
BreezeACCESS 4900 System Manual
122
Menus and Parameters
The default selection is Enable.
4.2.6.4.7
MAC Address Deny List (AU only)
The MAC Address Deny List submenu enables to define units that are not
authorized to receive services. The AU will not provide services to a unit whose
MAC Address is included in the deny list. This feature enables to disconnect
units from the services in cases such as when the user had fraudulently
succeeded to configure the unit to values different than his subscription plan.
The deny list can include up to 100 MAC Addresses.
The MAC Address Deny List submenu includes the following:
4.2.6.4.8
Add MAC Address to Deny List
Select Add MAC Address to Deny List to add a MAC Address to the Deny List.
4.2.6.4.9
Remove MAC Address from Deny List
Select Remove MAC Address from Deny List to remove a MAC Address from the
Deny List.
4.2.6.4.9.1 Show MAC Address Deny List
Select Show MAC Address Deny List to display the current list of MAC Addresses
included in the Deny List.
4.2.6.4.10 Roaming Option (SU only)
The Roaming Option defines the roaming support of the unit. When roaming is
not expected, it is preferable to set this parameter to Disable. This will cause the
unit to start scanning for another AU after losing connectivity with the current
AU only after 7 seconds during which no beacons were received from the current
AU. This will prevent scanning for another AU in cases where no beacons were
received due to a short temporary problem.
When set to Enable, the SU will wait only one second before it starts scanning for
another AU. In addition, when the Roaming Option is enabled, the SU will send
Roaming SNAP messages upon associating with a new AU. This enables fast
distribution of the new location for all clients that are behind the SU. In this case,
the SU will send multicast SNAP messages via the wireless link each time it
associates with a new AU, except for the first association after reset. The SU will
send one SNAP message for each client learned on its Ethernet port, based on its
bridging table. In the SNAP message the clients’ MAC address is used as the
source address. The AU that receives this SNAP message learns from it the new
location of the clients. It forwards the SNAP to other AUs and Layer-2 networking
equipment via its Ethernet port, to facilitate uninterrupted connectivity and
correct routing of transmissions to these clients. The new AU as well as the
previous AU with which the SU was associated, will forward the SNAP messages
to all other SUs associated with them.
Operation and Administration
123
Chapter 4 - Operation and Administration
The default is Disable.
4.2.6.4.11 Ports Control (SU only)
The Ports Control sub-menu includes the Ethernet Port Control option:
4.2.6.4.11.1 Ethernet Port Control
The Ethernet Port Control option allows enabling or disabling non-management
traffic to/from the Ethernet port. When changed to Disable, all current data
sessions will be terminated. The unit is still manageable via the Ethernet port
even if it is disabled for data traffic.
The default selection is Enable.
4.2.6.4.12 Show Bridge Parameters
The Show Bridge Parameters option displays the current values of the Bridge
parameters.
4.2.6.5
Performance Parameters
The Performance Parameters menu enables defining a series of parameters that
control the method by which traffic is transmitted through the wireless access
network.
The Performance Parameters menu includes the following parameters:
RTS Threshold
Minimum Contention Window
Maximum Contention Window
Multicast Modulation Level (AU only)
Maximum Modulation Level
Average SNR Memory Factor
Number of HW Retries
Burst Mode
Adaptive Modulation Algorithm
BreezeACCESS 4900 System Manual
124
Menus and Parameters
4.2.6.5.1
RTS Threshold
The RTS Threshold parameter defines the minimum frame size that requires an
RTS/CTS (Request To Send/Clear To Send) handshake. Frames whose size is
smaller than the RTS Threshold value are transmitted directly to the wireless link
without being preceded with RTS frames. Setting this parameter to a value larger
than the maximum frame size eliminates the RTS/CTS handshake for frames
transmitted by this unit.
The available values range from 20 to 4032 bytes.
The default value is 60 bytes for SUs. For AUs the default is 4032. It is
recommended that these values be used to ensure that RTS/CTS is never used in
the AU.
4.2.6.5.2
Minimum Contention Window
The Minimum Contention Window parameter determines the time that a unit
waits from the time it has concluded that there are no detectable transmissions
by other units until it attempts to transmit. The BreezeACCESS 4900 system
uses a special mechanism based on detecting the presence of a carrier signal and
analyzing the information contained in the transmissions of the AU to estimate
the activity of other SUs served by the AU. The target is to minimize collisions in
the wireless medium resulting from attempts of more than one unit to transmit at
the same time.
The system uses an exponential Back-off algorithm to resolve contention between
several units that want to access the wireless medium. The method requires each
station to choose a random number N between 0 and a given number C each time
it wants to access the medium. The unit will attempt to access the medium only
after a time equal to DIFS (for more details refer to section 4.2.6.2.10) plus N time
slots, always checking if a different unit has accessed the medium before. Each
time the unit tries to transmit and a collision occurs; the maximum number C
used for the random number selection will be increased to the next available
value. The available values are 7, 15, 31, 63, 127, 255, 511 and 1023.
The Minimum Contention Window parameter is the first maximum number C
used in the back-off algorithm. The higher the number of SUs served by the same
AU, the higher the Minimum Contention Window for each SU should be.
The available values are 0, 7, 15, 31, 63, 127, 255, 511 and 1023. A value of 0
means that the contention window algorithm is not used and that the unit will
attempt to access the medium immediately after a time equal to DIFS.
The default value is 15.
Operation and Administration
125
Chapter 4 - Operation and Administration
CAUTION
A value of 0 disables the contention window back-off algorithm. It should only be used in point-topoint applications. For more details on configuring units in a point-to-point link refer to section
4.2.6.2.10.
4.2.6.5.3
Maximum Contention Window
The Maximum Contention Window parameter defines the upper limit for the
maximum number C used in the back-off algorithm as described in Minimum
Contention Window above.
The available values are 7, 15, 31, 63, 127, 255, 511 and 1023.
The default value is 1023.
4.2.6.5.4
Multicast Modulation Level (AU only)
The Multicast Modulation Level parameter defines the modulation level used for
transmitting multicast and broadcast data frames. Multicast and broadcast
transmissions are not acknowledged; therefore if a multicast or broadcast
transmission is not properly received there is no possibility of retransmitting. It is
recommended that you set a lower modulation level for broadcast and multicast
frame transmissions to increase the probability that they are received without
errors.
The Multicast Modulation Level parameter is applicable only to data frames.
Beacons and other wireless management and control frames are always
transmitted at the lowest modulation level, modulation level 1.
The range is from 1 to 8.
The default is 1 (the lowest modulation level).
4.2.6.5.5
Maximum Modulation Level
When the Adaptive Modulation Algorithm (see section 4.2.6.5.9) is enabled, it
changes the modulation level dynamically according to link conditions. The
purpose is to increase the probability of using the maximum possible modulation
level at any given moment. Although the algorithm will avoid using modulation
levels that are too high for the prevailing link conditions, it might be better under
certain conditions to limit the use of higher modulation levels. If the link quality
is not sufficient, it is recommended that the maximum modulation level be
decreased, as higher modulation levels increase the error rate. In such
conditions, a higher Maximum Modulation Level increases the number or
retransmissions before the modulation level is being reduced by the Adaptive
Modulation Algorithm. A high number of retransmissions reduces the overall
throughput of the applicable SU as well as all other SUs associated with the same
AU.
BreezeACCESS 4900 System Manual
126
Menus and Parameters
The link quality can be estimated based on the SNR measurement of the SU at
the AU, which can be viewed in the MAC Address Database option in the Site
Survey menu. If the measured SNR is less than a certain threshold, it is
recommended that the maximum modulation level of the SU be decreased in
accordance with Table 4-10, using the values of typical sensitivity. It is
recommended to add a 2 dB safety margin to compensate for possible
measurement inaccuracy or variance in the link quality.
NOTE
The SNR measurement at the AU is accurate only when receiving transmissions from the
applicable SU. If necessary, use the Ping Test utility in the Site Survey menu to verify data
transmission.
When the Adaptive Modulation Algorithm is disabled, this parameter will serve to
determine Fixed Modulation Level used for transmissions.
The range is from 1 to 8.
The default is 8 (the highest modulation level).
Operation and Administration
127
Chapter 4 - Operation and Administration
Table 4-10: Recommended Maximum Modulation Level
SNR
Maximum Modulation Level
SNR > 23 dB
21 dB < SNR < 23 dB
16 dB < SNR < 21 dB
13 dB < SNR < 16 dB
10 dB < SNR < 13 dB
8 dB < SNR < 10 dB
7 dB < SNR < 8 dB
6 dB < SNR < 7 dB
4.2.6.5.6
Average SNR Memory Factor
The Average SNR Memory Factor defines the weight of history (value of last
calculated average SNR) in the formula used for calculating the current average
SNR for received data frames. This average SNR is used by the ATPC algorithm in
the AU and is also included in the Adaptive Modulation Algorithm information
messages transmitted by the AU and the SU. The higher the value of this
parameter, the higher is the weight of history in the formula.
Available values: -1 to 32. -1 is for no weight for history, meaning that average
SNR equals the last measured SNR.
Default value: 5
4.2.6.5.7
Number of HW Retries
The Number of HW Retries parameter defines the maximum number of times that
an unacknowledged packet is retransmitted. When the Adaptive Modulation
Algorithm is disabled, a frame will be dropped when the number of unsuccessful
retransmissions reaches this value. For details on the effect of this parameter
when the Adaptive Modulation Algorithm is enabled, refer to section 4.2.6.5.9.
The available values range is from 1 to 15.
The default value is 10.
BreezeACCESS 4900 System Manual
128
Menus and Parameters
4.2.6.5.8
Burst Mode
Burst mode provides an increased throughput by reducing the overhead
associated with transmissions in the wireless medium. In a burst transmission
the inter-frame spacing is reduced and unicast data frames are transmitted
without any contention period (burst mode is not activated oon
broadcasts/multicasts).
4.2.6.5.8.1 Burst Mode Option
The Burst Mode Option enables or disables the Burst Mode operation.
The default is Enable.
4.2.6.5.8.2 Burst Mode Time Interval
The Burst Mode Time Interval defines the burst size, which is the time in which
data frames are sent immediately without contending for the wireless medium.
The range is from 1 to 10 milliseconds. The default is 5 milliseconds.
4.2.6.5.9
Adaptive Modulation Algorithm (Multi Rate)
The Adaptive Modulation Algorithm enables adapting the modulation level of
transmitted data to the prevailing conditions of the applicable radio link. The
algorithm provides Access Units with simultaneous, adaptive support for multiple
Subscriber Units at different modulation levels, as transmission’s modulation
level decisions are made separately for each associated SU.
Link quality fluctuates due to various environmental conditions. Dynamically
switching between the possible modulation levels increases the probability of
using the maximum modulation level suitable for the current radio link quality at
any given moment.
The decisions made by the Adaptive Modulation Algorithm for the modulation
level to be used are based on multiple parameters, including information on
received signal quality (SNR) that is received periodically from the destination
unit, the time that has passed since last transmission to the relevant unit, and
the recent history of successful and unsuccessful
transmissions/retransmissions. In the AU the decision algorithm is performed
separately for each SU.
The transmission/retransmission mechanism operates as follows:
Each new frame (first transmission attempt) will be transmitted at a
modulation level selected by the Adaptive Modulation algorithm.
If first transmission trial has failed, the frame will be retransmitted at the
same modulation level up to the maximum number of retransmission
attempts defined by the Number of HW Retries parameter.
The Adaptive Modulation Parameters menu includes the following parameters:
Operation and Administration
129
Chapter 4 - Operation and Administration
4.2.6.5.9.1 Adaptive Modulation Option
The Adaptive Modulation Option enables or disables the Adaptive Modulation
decision algorithm. When enabled, the algorithm supports decrease/increase of
transmission’s modulation levels between the lowest possible level (Modulation
Level 1) to the value configured for the Maximum Modulation Level parameter. If
the Maximum Modulation Level is set at the lowest possible level, the Adaptive
Modulation algorithm has no effect.
The default selection is Enable.
4.2.6.5.9.2 Minimum Interval Between Adaptive Modulation Messages
The Minimum Interval Between Adaptive Modulation Messages sets the minimum
interval between two consecutive adaptive modulation messages, carrying
information on the SNR of received signals. The messages in the AU include SNR
information on all the SUs associated with it.
The available range is from 1 to 3600 seconds.
The default is 4 seconds.
4.2.6.5.9.3 Adaptive Modulation Decision Thresholds
Enables selection between Normal and High decision thresholds for the Adaptive
Modulation algorithm. In links with a low SNR (below 13), the Adaptive
Modulation algorithm may not stabilize on the correct modulation level when
using the standard decision thresholds. In this case the algorithm may try to use
a modulation level that is too high, resulting in a relatively large number of
dropped frames. The “High” option solves this limitation and ensures good
performance also in links with a low SNR.
The default is Normal.
4.2.6.5.10 Concatenation Parameters
The Concatenation mechanism enables bundling several data frames into a single
frame for transmission to the wireless link. This feature improves throughput and
reduces the overhead in the wireless medium, by requiring only one CRC for each
concatenated frame, one RTS/CTS cycle if applicable, and a single waiting period
according to the contention window mechanism before transmission. When
concatenation is enabled, data packets in the queue of the internal bridge can be
accumulated before the concatenated frame is transmitted to the wireless
medium. Up to 8 data frames can be accumulated, to a maximum total size of
4032 bytes. In the AU, the concatenation process is performed separately for each
destination SU.
A frame is a candidate for bundling into a concatenated frame if all the following
conditions are met:
BreezeACCESS 4900 System Manual
130
Menus and Parameters
The frame is a data frame
The destination is an entity behind the destination AU/SU.
When a frame is identified as an eligible candidate for concatenation, it is marked
accordingly and will be processed according to the following:
If there is no concatenated frame designated to the same destination unit in
the queue:
If the hardware queue is empty – the frame is transmitted immediately.
Otherwise (the queue is not empty) – the frame is inserted to the queue as
a concatenated frame.
If a concatenated frame designated to the same destination unit exists in the
queue:
If the combined size of both frames is above the maximum allowed
concatenated frame size – both frames are transmitted as two separate
frames.
Otherwise (the combined frames size is below the maximum size) – the
new frame is added to the concatenated frame. If the number of data
frames in the concatenated frame has reached the maximum allowed – the
concatenated frame will be transmitted to the wireless medium. Otherwise
– the concatenated frame remains in the queue (until the hardware queue
becomes free).
NOTE
When a frame is marked as a candidate for concatenation, it will be transmitted as a concatenated
frame. If it is not bundled with another data frame before transmission, it will be a concatenated
frame with a single data frame (Concatenated Frame Single). If it is bundled with two or more data
frames, it will be a concatenated frame with either double data frames (Concatenated Frame
Double) or more data frames (Concatenated Frame More).
The Concatenation Parameters submenu includes:
4.2.6.5.10.1 Concatenation Option
The Concatenation Option enables or disables the concatenation mechanism.
The default is Enable.
4.2.6.5.10.2 Maximum Number of Frames
The Maximum Number of Frames parameter defines the maximum number of
data frames that can be bundled into a single concatenated frame.
Operation and Administration
131
Chapter 4 - Operation and Administration
The range is from 2 to 8 frames.
The default is 8 frames.
4.2.6.6
Service Parameters
The Service Parameters menu enables defining user filtering, MIR/CIR
parameters, and traffic prioritization parameters.
The Service Parameters menu includes the following parameters:
User Filtering Parameters (SU only)
MIR and CIR Parameters
Traffic Prioritization
4.2.6.6.1
User Filtering Parameters (SU only)
The User Filtering Parameters submenu enables defining the IP addresses of user
devices authorized to access the wireless medium for security and/or control
purposes. In addition, it can be used to enable the transmission and reception of
specific protocol frames. These filtering options do not affect management frames
sent to or generated by the unit.
The User Filtering Parameters menu provides the following options:
4.2.6.6.1.1 User Filtering Option
The User Filtering Option disables or enables the User Filtering feature. The
following options are available:
Disable - no filtering.
IP Protocol Only - only IP Protocol packets pass.
User Defined Addresses Only - only IP frames from/to IP addresses included
in the User Filter Addresses list pass.
PPPoE Protocol Only - only PPPoE messages pass (Ethernet type 0x8863 and
0x8864).
The default selection is Disable.
4.2.6.6.1.2 Set/Change Filter IP Address Range
The Set/Change Filter IP Address Ranges option enables defining/updating up to
8 IP address ranges to/from which IP frames are to pass if the User Defined
Addresses Only option is selected in the User Filtering Option parameter.
BreezeACCESS 4900 System Manual
132
Menus and Parameters
The default Filter IP Address Range is 0.0.0.0 TO 0.0.0.0 (all 8 ranges).
A range can be defined using a string that includes either a start and end
address, in the format “ to ” (example: 192.168.1.1
to 192.168.1.255), or a base address and a mask, in the format “
mask ” (example: 192.168.1.1 mask 255.255.255.0).
4.2.6.6.1.3 Delete Filter IP Address Range
The Delete Filter IP Address Range option enables deleting IP address range
entries from the Filter IP Address Ranges list.
4.2.6.6.1.4 Delete All User Filtering Entries
The Delete All User Filtering Entries option enables deleting all entries from the
Filter IP Address Ranges list.
4.2.6.6.1.5 DHCP Unicast Override Filter
When user filtering is activated, unicast DHCP messages are filtered out;
therefore the unit cannot communicate with the DHCP server. The DHCP Unicast
Override Filter option enables to overcome this problem. When enabled, unicast
DHCP messages pass, overriding the user filtering mechanism.
The default is Disable DHCP Unicast.
4.2.6.6.1.6 Show User Filtering Parameters
The Show All User Filtering Parameters option displays the current value of the
User Filtering Option and the list of User Filtering addresses, subnet masks and
ranges.
4.2.6.6.2
MIR and CIR Parameters
The CIR (Committed Information Rate) specifies the minimum data rate
guaranteed to the relevant subscriber. The MIR (Maximum Information Rate)
value specifies the maximum data rate available for burst transmissions,
provided such bandwidth is available.
Under normal conditions, the actual Information Rate (IR) is between the
applicable CIR and MIR values, based on the following formula:
IR=CIR+K(MIR - CIR).
In this formula K is between 0 and 1 and is determined dynamically by the AU
according to overall demand in the cell and the prevailing conditions that
influence the performance of the wireless link. In some situations the minimum
rate (CIR) cannot be provided. This may result from high demand and poor
wireless link conditions and/or high demand in over-subscribed cells. When this
occurs, the actual information rate is lower than the CIR.
The simple solution for managing the information rate in such cases can result in
an unfair allocation of resources, as subscribers with a higher CIR actually
Operation and Administration
133
Chapter 4 - Operation and Administration
receive an IR lower than the CIR designated for subscribers in a lower CIR
bracket.
A special algorithm for graceful degradation is incorporated into the AU, ensuring
that the degradation of performance for each individual Subscriber Unit is
proportional to its CIR.
The MIR/CIR algorithm uses buffers to control the flow of data. To balance the
performance over time, a special Burst Duration algorithm is employed to enable
higher transmission rates after a period of inactivity. If no data is received from
the Ethernet port during the last N seconds, the unit is allowed to transmit N
times its CIR value without any delay. For example, after a period of inactivity of
0.5 seconds, a unit with CIR = 128 Kbps can transmit up to 128 Kbits x 0.5 =
64 Kbits without any delay.
4.2.6.6.2.1 MIR: Downlink (SU only)
Sets the Maximum Information Rate of the downlink from the AU to the SU. The
MIR value cannot be lower than the corresponding CIR value.
Available values range is from 128 to 53888 Kbps.
The default is 53888 Kbps.
The actual value will be the entered value rounded to the nearest multiple of 128
(N*128).
4.2.6.6.2.2 MIR: Uplink (SU only)
Sets the Maximum Information Rate of the up-link from the SU to the AU. The
MIR value cannot be lower than the corresponding CIR value.
Available values range is from 128 to 53888 Kbps.
The default is 53888 Kbps.
The actual value will be the entered value rounded to the nearest multiple of 128
(N*128).
4.2.6.6.2.3 CIR: Downlink (SU only)
Sets the Committed Information Rate of the downlink from the AU to the SU. The
CIR value cannot be higher than the corresponding MIR value.
Available values range is from 0 to 45056 Kbps.
The default is 0 Kbps.
The actual value will be the entered value rounded to the nearest multiple of 128
(N*128).
BreezeACCESS 4900 System Manual
134
Menus and Parameters
4.2.6.6.2.4 CIR: Uplink (SU only)
Sets the Committed Information Rate of the uplink from the SU to the AU. The
CIR value cannot be higher than the corresponding MIR value.
Available values range is from 0 to 45056 Kbps.
The default is 0 Kbps.
The actual value will be the entered value rounded to the nearest multiple of 128
(N*128).
4.2.6.6.2.5 Maximum Burst Duration (SU and AU)
Sets the maximum time for accumulating burst transmission rights according to
the Burst Duration algorithm.
Available values range from 0 to 2000 (milliseconds).
The default value is 5 (milliseconds), enabling a maximum burst of (0.005 X CIR)
Kbps after a period of inactivity of 5 milliseconds or more.
4.2.6.6.2.6 Maximum Delay (SU only)
Sets the maximum permitted delay in the buffers system. As certain applications
are very sensitive to delay, if relatively high delays are permitted, these
applications may suffer from poor performance due to data accumulation in the
buffers from other applications, such as FTP. The Maximum Delay parameter
limits the number of available buffers. Data that is delayed more than the
permitted maximum delay is discarded. If the SU supports applications that are
very sensitive to delay, the value of the Maximum Delay should be decreased.
Valid values range from 300 to 10000 (milliseconds).
The default value is 5000 (milliseconds).
4.2.6.6.2.7 Graceful Degradation Limit (AU only)
Sets the limit on using the graceful degradation algorithm. In cases of over
demand, the performance of all SUs is degraded proportionally to their CIR
(IR=(100%-k%) x CIR). The graceful degradation algorithm is used as long as
k ≤ K, where K is the Graceful Degradation Limit. Beyond this point the simple
“brute force” algorithm is used. The Graceful Degradation Limit should be raised
in proportion to the demand in the cell. The higher the expected demand in a cell,
the higher the value of the Graceful Degradation Limit. Higher demand can be
expected in cases of significant over subscription and/or in deployments where a
high number of subscribers are in locations without proper communication with
the AU at the highest data rate.
The available values range from 0 to 70 (%).
The default value is 70 (%).
Operation and Administration
135
Chapter 4 - Operation and Administration
4.2.6.6.2.8 MIR Only Option (AU only)
When the MIR Only Option is enabled, it forces the MIR/CIR algorithm to use
MIR values only. The MIR/CIR algorithm determines the actual information rate
for each of the supported SUs under changing conditions of demand, based on
the configured CIR and MIR values. When the MIR Only Option is enabled, the
MIR/CIR algorithm is overridden and forced to operate with MIR values only. For
example, the AU attempts to enable all SUs to transmit/receive information at the
specified MIR value. When enabled, the graceful degradation algorithm, which is
a part of the CIR/MIR algorithm, is also disabled.
The default is Enable.
4.2.6.6.2.9 Show MIR/CIR Parameters
Displays the current values of the MIR and CIR parameters.
4.2.6.6.3
Traffic Prioritization
Each packet that is received from the Ethernet port is placed in either the High or
Low queue, according to the Traffic Prioritization parameters. When the MIR/CIR
mechanism decides that a packet must be sent, the High priority queue will be
checked first. If the High priority queue is not empty, the first element in the
queue is forwarded to the MIR/CIR mechanism. Packets from the Low priority
queue will be forwarded only if the High queue is empty.
The prioritization of the packets is done using different classifiers:
VLAN Priority
ToS Priority: IP Precedence or DSCP
UDP and/or TCP ports
Each one of these classifiers can be activated/deactivated. If more than one
classifier is activated, the priority of each packet will be determined by the
highest priority given to it by the active classifiers.
The Traffic Prioritization menu enables activating/deactivating each of these
classifiers, and configuring the applicable parameters for each classifier.
4.2.6.6.3.1 VLAN Priority Threshold
The VLAN Priority Threshold is applicable for Trunk and Hybrid Links only. It
enables defining the value of the VLAN Priority Threshold. If the VLAN Priority
field in a tagged frame is higher than the value of the VLAN Priority Threshold
parameter, the packet will be routed to the High queue. If the VLAN Priority field
is lower than or equal to this value, the packet will be transferred to the Low
queue (unless it is assigned a High priority by another classifier).
BreezeACCESS 4900 System Manual
136
Menus and Parameters
Valid values range from 0 to 7.
The default value is 7, which means that all packets get a low priority (equivalent
to disabling the VLAN-based classifier).
4.2.6.6.3.2 ToS Prioritization
The ToS Prioritization parameters enable defining prioritization in accordance
with either the 3 IP Precedence bits in the IP header in accordance with RFC 791,
or the 6 DSCP (Differentiated Services Code Point) bits in accordance with RFC
2474. The ToS Prioritization menu includes the following parameters:
4.2.6.6.3.2.1 ToS Prioritization Option
The ToS Prioritization Option defines whether ToS-based prioritization is enabled
or disabled. The following options are available:
Disable
Enable IP Precedence (RFC791) Prioritization
Enable DSCP (RFC2474) Prioritization
The default is Disable.
4.2.6.6.3.2.2 IP Precedence Threshold
The IP Precedence Threshold parameter is applicable when the ToS Prioritization
Option is set to Enable IP Precedence (RFC791) Prioritization. If the value of the 3
IP Precedence bits in the IP header is higher than this threshold, the packet is
routed to the High queue. If the value is lower than or equal to this threshold, the
packet will be transferred to the Low queue (unless it is assigned a High priority
by another classifier).
Valid values range from 0 to 7.
The default value is 7, which means that all packets get a low priority (equivalent
to disabling the IP Precedence-based classifier).
4.2.6.6.3.2.3 DSCP Threshold
The DSCP Threshold parameter is applicable when the ToS Prioritization Option
is set to Enable DSCP (RFC2474) Prioritization. If the value of the 6 DSCP bits in
the IP header is higher than this threshold, the packet is routed to the High
queue. If the value is lower than or equal to this threshold, the packet will be
routed to the Low queue (unless it is assigned a High priority by another
classifier).
Valid values range from 0 to 63.
Operation and Administration
137
Chapter 4 - Operation and Administration
The default value is 63, which means that all packets get a low priority
(equivalent to disabling the IP Precedence-based classifier).
4.2.6.6.3.3 UDP/TCP Port Ranges Traffic Prioritization
The UDP/TCP Port Ranges Traffic Prioritization parameters enable defining
prioritization in accordance with the UDP and/or TCP destination port ranges.
The UDP/TCP Port Ranges Traffic Prioritization menu includes the following
parameters:
4.2.6.6.3.3.1 UDP/TCP Port Ranges Prioritization Option
The UDP/TCP Port Ranges Prioritization Option defines whether port ranges
based prioritization is enabled or disabled. The following options are available:
Disable
Enable Only for UDP
Enable Only for TCP
Enable for both UDP and TCP
The default is Disable.
4.2.6.6.3.3.2 UDP Port Ranges
The UDP Port Ranges menu enables defining port ranges to be used as priority
classifiers when the UDP/TCP Port Ranges Prioritization Option is set to either
Enable Only for UDP or Enable for both UDP and TCP. All packets whose
destination is included in the list will be routed to the High queue. All other
packets will be routed to the Low queue (unless they were assigned a High
priority by another classifier).
The UDP Port Ranges menu includes the following options:
UDP RTP/RTCP Prioritization: Voice over IP is transported using Real Time
Protocol (RTP). The Real Time Control Protocol (RTCP) is used to control the
RTP. When an application uses RTP/RTCP, it chooses for destination ports
consecutive numbers: RTP port is always an even number, and the port with
the odd number following it will be assigned to RTCP.
If the administrator selects to prioritize only the RTP packets, then all the
packets with an odd numbered destination port will always have Low priority.
The packets with an even number for destination port will receive High
priority, if the port number is included in the specified ranges.
BreezeACCESS 4900 System Manual
138
Menus and Parameters
If the administrator selects to prioritize both RTP and RTCP packets, then all
packets whose destination port number is included is in the specified ranges
will receive High priority.
The available options are:
RTP & RTCP
RTP Only
The default is RTP & RTCP
Add UDP Port Ranges: This option enables adding UDP port ranges to the list
of priority port numbers. The list can include up to 64 ranges. It is possible to
add discrete port numbers and/or ranges. In ranges, a hyphen is used to
separate start and end port numbers. A comma is used to separate entries.
For example: 8900,9000-9005,9010,9016-9017.
Delete UDP Port Ranges: This option enables deleting UDP port ranges from
the list of priority port numbers. It is possible to delete discrete port numbers
and/or ranges. In ranges, a hyphen is used to separate start and end port
numbers. A comma is used to separate entries.
For example: 8900,9000-9005,9010,9016-9017.
Delete All UDP Port Ranges: This option enables deleting all UDP port
ranges from the list of priority port numbers.
Show UDP Port Ranges: Select this option to view the current UDP
RTP/RTCP Prioritization option and the list of UDP Port Ranges.
4.2.6.6.3.3.3 TCP Port Ranges
The TCP Port Ranges menu enables defining port ranges to be used as priority
classifiers when the UDP/TCP Port Ranges Prioritization Option is set to either
Enable Only for TCP or Enable for both UDP and TCP. All packets whose
destination is included in the list will be routed to the High queue. All other
packets will be routed to the Low queue (unless they were assigned a High
priority by another classifier).
The TCP Port Ranges menu includes the following options:
TCP RTP/RTCP Prioritization: Voice over IP is transported using Real Time
Protocol (RTP). The Real Time Control Protocol (RTCP) is used to control the
RTP. When an application uses RTP/RTCP, it chooses for destination ports
Operation and Administration
139
Chapter 4 - Operation and Administration
consecutive numbers: RTP port is always an even number, and the port with
the odd number following it will be assigned to RTCP.
If the administrator selects to prioritize only the RTP packets, then all the
packets with an odd numbered destination port will always have Low priority.
The packets with an even number for destination port will receive High
priority, if the port number is included in the specified ranges.
If the administrator selects to prioritize both RTP and RTCP packets, then all
packets whose destination port number is included in the specified ranges will
receive High priority.
The available options are:
RTP & RTCP
RTP Only
The default is RTP & RTCP
Add TCP Port Ranges: This option enables adding TCP port ranges to the list
of priority port numbers. The list can include up to 64 ranges. It is possible to
add discrete port numbers and/or ranges. In ranges, a hyphen is used to
separate between start and end port numbers. A comma is used to separate
between entries.
For example: 8900,9000-9005,9010,9016-9017.
Delete TCP Port Ranges: This option enables deleting TCP port ranges from
the list of priority port numbers. It is possible to delete discrete port numbers
and/or ranges. In ranges, a hyphen is used to separate between start and end
port numbers. A comma is used to separate between entries.
For example: 8900,9000-9005,9010,9016-9017.
Delete All TCP Port Ranges: This option enables deleting all TCP port ranges
from the list of priority port numbers.
Show TCP Port Ranges: Select this option to view the current TCP RTP/RTCP
Prioritization option and the list of TCP Port Ranges.
4.2.6.6.3.4 Show Traffic Prioritization
Displays the current values of the Traffic Prioritization parameters, including the
lists of UDP and TCP priority port ranges.
BreezeACCESS 4900 System Manual
140
Menus and Parameters
4.2.6.6.4
Show Service Parameters
Displays the current values of the Service Parameters, including the user filtering
parameters and MIR and CIR parameters.
4.2.6.7
Security Parameters
BreezeACCESS 4900 systems can support encryption of authentication messages
and/or data frames using one of three encryption standards:
WEP Wireless Equivalent Privacy algorithm. WEP is defined in the IEEE
802.11 Wireless LAN standard and is based on the RSA’s RC4 encryption
algorithm.
AES/OCB Advanced Encryption Standard. AES is defined by the National
Institute of Standards and Technology (NIST) and is based on Rijndael block
cipher. AES/OCB (Offset Code Book) is a mode that operates by augmenting
the normal encryption process by incorporating an offset value.
AES/CCM Advanced Encryption Standard. AES is defined by the National
Institute of Standards and Technology (NIST) and is based on Rijndael block
cipher. AES/CCM mode provides encryption and message integrity in one
solution.
NOTE
The AES/CCM encryption functionality in BreezeACCESS 4900 is FIPS (Federal Information
Processing Standards) 197 certified.
The following parameters are available through the Security Parameters menu (in
certain units some or all of the security options may not be available):
Authentication Algorithm
Data Encryption Option
Security Mode
Default Key (SU only)
Default Multicast Key (AU only)
Key # 1 to Key # 4
Promiscuous Authentication (AU only)
Operation and Administration
141
Chapter 4 - Operation and Administration
4.2.6.7.1
Authentication Algorithm
The Authentication Algorithm option determines the operation mode of the
selected unit. The following two options are available:
Open System: An SU configured to Open System can only associate with an
AU also configured to Open System. In this case, the authentication
encryption algorithm is not used.
Shared Key: The authentication messages are encrypted. An SU configured to
use a Shared Key can only be authenticated by an AU configured to use a
Shared Key, provided the applicable Key (which means both the key number
and its content) in the AU is identical to the key selected as the Default Key in
the SU.
The default is Open System.
NOTE
The Shared Key option cannot be selected before at least one Key is defined. In the SU, a Default
Key that refers to a valid Key must be selected.
The AU and all the SUs it serves should be configured to the same Authentication Algorithm option.
Mixed operation is not supported.
4.2.6.7.2
Data Encryption Option
The Data Encryption Option allows enabling or disabling data encryption. When
enabled, all data frames, including frames using management protocols such as
Telnet, FTP, TFTP, SNMP, DHCP and ICMP, are encrypted.
The default is Disable.
NOTE
The AU and all the SUs it serves should be configured to the same Data Encryption Option.
Mixed operation is not supported.
An SU with Data Encryption Option enabled can accept non-encrypted data frames.
When the Data Encryption Option is enabled, the maximum number of SUs that can associate
with the AU is limited to 124. The Maximum Number of Associations Limit is indicated in the
Show Air Interface Parameters display.
4.2.6.7.3
Security Mode
The Security Mode option enables selecting the algorithm to be used for
encrypting the authentication messages and/or data frames.
Available options are WEP, AES/OCB and AES/CCM.
The default is WEP.
BreezeACCESS 4900 System Manual
142
Menus and Parameters
4.2.6.7.4
Default Key (SU only)
The Default Key defines the Key to be used for encrypting/decrypting the
authentication messages (Shared Key mode) and/or data frames (Data
Encryption enabled). The AU learns the Default Key from the SU provided it is
one of the Keys defined in the AU. The AU may use different keys when
authenticating and/or communicating with different SUs.
Available values range from 1 to 4.
The default is KEY # 1.
4.2.6.7.5
Default Multicast Key (AU only)
The Multicast Default Key defines the Key to be used for encrypting/decrypting
multicasts and broadcasts when Data Encryption is enabled.
Available values range from 1 to 4.
The default is KEY # 1.
4.2.6.7.6
Key # 1 to Key # 4
The Key # options enables defining the encryption key to be used for initializing
the pseudo-random number generator that forms part of the
encryption/decryption process. The Keys must be set before the Shared Key
authentication algorithm or Data Encryption can be used. To support proper
operation, both the Key # and the content must be identical at both sides of a
wireless link.
Each Key is a string of 32 hexadecimal numbers. For security reasons, it is a
“write only” parameter, displayed as a string of asterisks (“*”).
The default for all 4 Keys is 000…0 (a string of 32 zeros), which means no key.
4.2.6.7.7
Promiscuous Authentication (AU only)
The Promiscuous Authentication mode enables new SUs to join an active cell
where Shared Key operation and/or Data Encryption are used, even if this SU
does not have the correct security parameters. In promiscuous mode, all
downlink transmissions (from AU to SUs) are not encrypted, allowing remote
configuration of security parameters, regardless of the current settings in the SUs
of the parameters related to data encryption. After a new SU joins the cell it
should be remotely configured with the proper parameters (or upgraded). When
the SU is configured properly, the Promiscuous Mode should be disabled.
The default is Disable.
NOTE
Do not leave the AU in the enabled Promiscuous Authentication mode for prolonged periods. Use it
only when absolutely necessary, perform the required actions as quickly as possible and disable it.
The unit will return automatically to Promiscuous Authentication disabled mode after reset.
Operation and Administration
143
A
Appendix A - Software Version Loading
Using TFTP
Appendix A - Software Version Loading Using TFTP
Firmware upgrades to the unit's FLASH memory can be performed by a simple
loading procedure using a TFTP application. Before performing an upgrade
procedure, be sure you have the correct files and most recent instructions.
Upgrade packages can be obtained from the Technical Support section of
Alvarion's web site, http://www.alvarion.com/.
CAUTION
Shutting down power to the unit before completion of the loading procedure may cause the unit to
be inoperable.
To load software versions:
Verify that IP connectivity to the required unit is established.
Ensure that the IP address of the PC from which the upgrade is to be
performed belongs to the same subnet as the unit to be upgraded, unless the
unit is behind a router. If the unit is behind a router, verify that the unit is
configured with the correct Default Gateway Address.
To view the current IP parameters of the unit, use the Monitor program by
connecting the PC to the unit either directly or via Telnet. To access the IP
parameters via the Monitor program:
From the Main Menu select 1 - Info Screens.
From the Info Screen menu select 2 - Show Basic Configuration. The
current basic configuration is displayed, including the run time values for
the IP Address, Subnet Mask and Default Gateway Address parameters.
To modify any of the IP parameters:
From the Main Menu, select 3 - Basic Configuration.
To configure the IP address, select: 1 - IP Address.
To configure the subnet mask, select 2 - Subnet Mask.
To configure the default gateway address, select 3 - Default Gateway
Address.
To verify the connection, PING the unit's IP address and verify that PING
replies are being received.
Use the TFTP utility, with the following syntax, to perform the upgrade:
tftp -i hostaddress put sourcefile [destinationfile]
where -i is for binary mode and hostaddress is the IP address of the unit to be
upgraded. put causes the PC client to send a file to the hostaddress.
BreezeACCESS 4900 System Manual
146
Software Version Loading Using TFTP
The original sourcefile name of SW files is in the structure uX_Y_Z.bz, where u
is the unit type (a for AU, s for SU) and X.Y.Z is the version number.
destinationfile is the name of the file to be loaded. Use the SNMP write
community .bz to define the destination filename.
The default SNMP write community is private. For example, to load the
upgrade file a1_0_6.bz to an AU whose IP address is 206.25.63.65: tftp -i
206.25.63.65 put a1_0_6.bz private.bz
When the loading is complete, the following message is displayed, indicating
completion of the TFTP process:
Download operation has been completed successfully
10 The unit decompresses the loaded file and checks the integrity of the new
version. The new version replaces the previous shadow version only after
verification. If verification tests fail, the loaded version will be rejected. Among
other things that are tested, the unit will reject a file if either the file name or
the version number matches the current Main versions. The unit will also
reject a file designated for a different unit type, e.g. an AU upgrade file with
the prefix a in the original file name will not be accepted by SUs.
11 The FLASH memory can store two software versions. One version is called
Current and the second version is called Shadow. The new version is loaded
into the Shadow (backup) FLASH memory. To check that the new firmware
was properly downloaded and verified, view the firmware versions stored in
the FLASH, as follows:
From the Main Menu, select 2 - Unit Control.
From the Unit Control menu, select 5 - Flash Memory Control.
From the Flash Memory Control menu, select S - Show Flash Versions.
The following information is displayed:
Flash Versions
============
Running from
Main Version File Name
Main Version Number
Shadow Version File Name
File Name Number
:Main Version
:1_0_5.bz
:1.0.5
:1_0_6.bz
:1.0.6
BreezeACCESS 4900 System Manual
147
B
Appendix B - File Download and Upload
Using TFTP
Appendix B - File Download and Upload Using TFTP
The File Download/Upload feature simplifies the task of remotely configuring a
large number of units using TFTP protocol. By downloading the configuration file
to a PC it is possible to view all the parameters configured for the unit, as a plain
ASCII text file. It is necessary to edit the file using a simple editor and remove
certain parameters or change their values prior to uploading the configuration to
another unit. The file loading procedure can also be used for uploading a feature
license file or an updated country code file to multiple units.
When multiple configurations are being done simultaneously, that is, the file is
being uploaded to several units, it is recommended that the file will include only
the required parameters.
In the configuration file, the following three fields represent each parameter:
A symbolic string similar to the name of the parameter in the Monitor
program, followed by "=".
The value of the parameters, which uses the same values as the Monitor
program.
An optional comment. If used, the comment should start with a ";" character.
An unknown parameter will be ignored. A known parameter with a value that is
invalid or out of range will be set by the unit to its default value.
Use the SNMP write community string (the default is “private”) to define both the
uploaded file (put) and the downloaded file (get). The file should be transferred in
ASCII mode.
Use the extension cfg for a configuration file.
Use the extension cmr for the Operator Defaults file.
Use the extension fln for a Feature License file.
Use the extension ccf for a Country Code file.
Feature license and country code files include multiple strings, where each string
is applicable only for a certain unit identified by its MAC address. When
uploading a feature license or a country code file to multiple units, each unit will
accept only the parts that are applicable for itself.
BreezeACCESS 4900 System Manual
150
File Download and Upload Using TFTP
Examples:
To upload the configuration file using a DOS based TFTP Client to an SU
whose IP address is 206.25.63.65, enter:
tftp 206.25.63.65 put Suconf private.cfg
To download the Operator Defaults file from the same unit, enter:
tftp 206.25.63.65 get private.cmr Suconf
To upload the Feature Upgrade file to the same unit, enter:
tftp 206.25.63.65 put private.fln Suconf
To upload the Country Code file from to same unit, enter:
tftp 206.25.63.65 put private.ccf Suconf
NOTE
The Configuration File mechanism is common to BreezeACCESS 4900, BreezeACCESS VL and
BreezeNET B product lines. The Configuration File includes also parameters that are not applicable
to BreezeACCESS 4900, such as DFS parameters. Do not attempt to change the default values of
these parameters.
BreezeACCESS 4900 System Manual
151
C
Appendix C - Using the Set Factory
Defaults Utility
Appendix C - Using the Set Factory Defaults Utility
The Set Factory Defaults utility is intended to enable management access to a
unit in cases where such access is not possible due to wrong or unknown
configuration of certain parameters. This includes cases such as unknown
Management VLAN ID and wrong management access filtering.
The utility accesses the unit by sending a special packet. Access to the unit is
based on its MAC address, which must be entered in the Unit MAC address field.
The set unit defaults feature is only available via the Ethernet port.
To set factory defaults:
Connect the PC with the Set Factory Defaults utility to the Ethernet port of
the unit.
Enter the unit’s MAC address.
Click on the Set button.
This utility performs the same operation as Set Complete Factory Defaults,
restoring the default factory configuration of all parameters, except to Passwords,
general FTP parameters and AU’s Frequency.
BreezeACCESS 4900 System Manual
154
D
Appendix D - Preparing the Indoor to
Outdoor SU Cable
Appendix D - Preparing the Indoor to Outdoor SU Cable
The Indoor-to-Outdoor cable provides pin-to-pin connection on both ends.
Figure D-1 shows the wire pair connections required for the Indoor-to-Outdoor
cable.
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
4+5
1+2
7+8
3+6
Figure D-1: Ethernet Connector Pin Assignments
The color codes used in cables that are supplied with crimped connectors are as
listed in the following table:
Cable Color Codes
Wire color
Pin
Blue
Blue/white
Orange
Orange/white
Brown
Brown/white
Green
Green/white
BreezeACCESS 4900 System Manual
156
Preparing the Indoor to Outdoor SU Cable
Use a crimp tool for RJ-45 connectors to prepare the wires, insert them into the
appropriate pins and use the crimp tool to crimp the connector. Make sure to do
the following:
Remove as small a length as possible of the external jacket. Verify that the
external jacket is well inside the service box to ensure good sealing.
Take back the shield drain wire before inserting the cable into the RJ-45
connector, to ensure a good connection with the connector's shield after
crimping.
BreezeACCESS 4900 System Manual
157
E
Appendix E - Supported MIBS and Traps
In This Appendix:
BreezeACCESS 4900 agents support the following MIBs:
MIB II (RFC1213)
BRIDGE MIB (RFC1286)
BreezeACCESS VL Private MIB (breezeAccessVLMib)
The following are described in this Appendix:
System Object Identifiers, page 160
breezeAccessVLMib, page 162
Supported Traps, page 209
NOTE
The BreezeAccessVLMib is used for BreezeACCESS 4900 (AU, SU), BreezeACCESS VL (AU,
SU) and BreezeNET B (BU, RB) product lines. Some of the parameters are only applicable to one
or two of the product lines.
Generally, all parameters that are applicable to BreezeACCESS VL are also applicable to
BreezeACCESS 4900 (note that in BreezeACCESS 4900 DFS is always Not Supported).
Appendix E - Supported MIBS and Traps
E.1
System Object Identifiers
Object
Path
alvarion
OID =1.3.6.1.4.1.12394 {(iso(1) org(3) dod(6) internet(1)
private(4) enterprises(1) alvarion(12394)}
products
OID = 1.3.6.1.4.1.12394.1 {alvarion 1}
breezeAccessVLMib
OID = 1.3.6.1.4.1.12394.1.1 {products 1}
alvarionOID
OID = 1.3.6.1.4.1.12394.4 {alvarion 4}
brzAccessVLOID
OID = 1.3.6.1.4.1.12394.4.1 {alvarionOID 1}
brzAccessVLAU
OID = 1.3.6.1.4.1.12394.4.1.1 {brzAccessVLOID 1}
brzAccessVLSU
OID = 1.3.6.1.4.1.12394.4.1.2 {brzAccessVLOID 2}
brzAccessVLAU-BS
OID = 1.3.6.1.4.1.12394.4.1.4 {brzAccessVLOID 4}
brzAccessVLAU-SA
OID = 1.3.6.1.4.1.12394.4.1.5 {brzAccessVLOID 5}
brzAccessVLAUS-BS
OID = 1.3.6.1.4.1.12394.4.1.6 {brzAccessVLOID 6}
brzAccessVLAUS-SA
OID = 1.3.6.1.4.1.12394.4.1.7 {brzAccessVLOID 7}
brzAccessVLSU-6-1D
OID = 1.3.6.1.4.1.12394.4.1.11 {brzAccessVLOID 11}
brzAccessVLSU-6-BD
OID = 1.3.6.1.4.1.12394.4.1.12 {brzAccessVLOID 12}
brzAccessVLSU-24-BD
OID = 1.3.6.1.4.1.12394.4.1.13 {brzAccessVLOID 13}
brzAccessVLSU-BD
OID = 1.3.6.1.4.1.12394.4.1.14 {brzAccessVLOID 14}
brzAccessVLSU-54-BD
OID = 1.3.6.1.4.1.12394.4.1.15 {brzAccessVLOID 15}
brzAccessVLSU-3-1D
OID = 1.3.6.1.4.1.12394.4.1.16 {brzAccessVLOID 16}
brzAccessVLSU-3-4D
OID = 1.3.6.1.4.1.12394.4.1.17 {brzAccessVLOID 17}
brzNetB-BU-B14
OID = 1.3.6.1.4.1.12394.4.1.21 {brzAccessVLOID 21}
brzNetB-BU-B28
OID = 1.3.6.1.4.1.12394.4.1.22 {brzAccessVLOID 22}
BrzNetB-RB-B14
OID = 1.3.6.1.4.1.12394.4.1.31 {brzAccessVLOID 31}
brzNetB-RB-B28
OID = 1.3.6.1.4.1.12394.4.1.32 {brzAccessVLOID 32}
brzAccess 4900-AU-BS
OID = 1.3.6.1.4.1.12394.4.1.41 {brzAccessVLOID 41}
brzAccess 4900-AU-SA
OID = 1.3.6.1.4.1.12394.4.1.42 {brzAccessVLOID 42}
BreezeACCESS 4900 System Manual
160
System Object Identifiers
Object
Path
brzAccess 4900-SU-BD
OID = 1.3.6.1.4.1.12394.4.1.51 {brzAccessVLOID 51}
brzAccessVLProducts
OID = 1.3.6.1.4.1.12394.4.1.3 {brzAccessVLOID 3}
BreezeACCESS 4900 System Manual
161
Appendix E - Supported MIBS and Traps
E.2
breezeAccessVLMib
OBJECT IDENTIFIER = 1.3.6.1.4.1.12394.1.1
NOTE
An * is used instead of the brzaccVL prefix.
E.2.1
System Information Parameters
MIB Parameter
Description
*SysInfo
(breezeAccessVLMib 1)
*UnitHwVersion
(*SysInfo 1)
System Information
Parameters
Applicable to all units.
Read-only: Hardware
platform version.
Applicable to all units.
Read-only: Running
software version.
Applicable to all units.
Read-only: The memory
(main or shadow) from
which the current version
is running from.
Applicable to all units.
Read only: Main software
version number.
Applicable to all units.
Read-only: Main software
version file name.
Applicable to all units.
Read-only: Shadow
software version number.
Applicable to all units.
Read-only: Shadow
software version file name.
Applicable to all units.
Read-only: Unit hardware
MAC address.
*RunningSoftwareVersion
(*SysInfo 2)
*RunningFrom
(*SysInfo 3)
*MainVersionNumber
(*SysInfo 4)
*MainVersionFileName
(*SysInfo 5)
*ShadowVersionNumber
(*SysInfo 6)
*ShadowVersionFileName
(*SysInfo 7)
*UnitMacAddress
(*SysInfo 8)
Value/Range
DisplayString (SIZE(0..32))
DisplayString (SIZE(0..32))
Integer
mainVersion (1)
shadowVersion (2)
DisplayString (SIZE(0..32))
DisplayString (SIZE(0..32))
DisplayString (SIZE(0..32))
DisplayString (SIZE(0..32))
MAC address
BreezeACCESS 4900 System Manual
162
breezeAccessVLMib
MIB Parameter
Description
Value/Range
*UnitType
(*SysInfo 9)
Applicable to all units.
Read-only: Unit type.
*AssociatedAU
(*SysInfo 10)
Applicable to SU/RB.
Read-only: Associated
AU/BU MAC address.
Applicable to all units.
Read-only: The number of
associations since last
reset, including duplicate
associations (reassociations).
Applicable to AU only. Not
applicable to BreezeNET B
products. Read-only. The
number of subscriber units
currently associated with
the AU.
Applicable to all units.
Read-only: The Boot
software version.
Applicable to all units.
Read-only: The radio band
of the unit.
Integer
auBS (1)
auSA (2)
su-6-BD (3)
su-24-BD (4)
su-6-1D (5)
bu-B14 (6)
bu-B28 (7)
rb-B14 (8)
rb-B28 (9)
su-BD (10)
su-54-BD (11)
su-3-1D (12)
su-3-4D) (13)
ausBS(14)
ausSA(15)
auBS4900(16)
auSA4900(17)
suBD4900(18)
MAC address
*NumOfAssociationsSinceLastReset
(*SysInfo 11)
*CurrentNumOfAssociations
(*SysInfo 13)
*UnitBootVersion
(*SysInfo 14)
*RadioBand
(*SysInfo 15)
*CurrentEthernetPortState
(*SysInfo 16)
Applicable to all units.
Read-only. The current
state of the Ethernet port.
*TimeSinceLastReset
(*SysInfo 17)
Applicable to all units.
Read-only. The elapsed
time since last reset.
Country Dependent
Parameters
Applicable to all units.
Read only. The country
code and country or
country group name that is
supported by the unit
*CountryDependentParameters
(*SysInfo 18)
*CountryCode
(*CountryDependentParameters 1)
Integer
Integer
na (65535)
DisplayString (SIZE(0..32))
Integer
band-5-8GHz (1)
band-5-4GHz (2)
band-4-9GHz (3)
band-5-2GHz (4)
band-2-4GHz (5)
band-5-3GHz (6)
Integer
HalfDuplexAnd10Mbps (1)
FullDuplexAnd10Mbps (2)
HalfDuplexAnd100Mbps 3)
FullDuplexAnd100Mbps (4)
linkDown (5)
DisplayString (SIZE(0..32))
DisplayString (SIZE(0..32))
BreezeACCESS 4900 System Manual
163
Appendix E - Supported MIBS and Traps
MIB Parameter
Description
*CountryDependentParamsTable
(*CountryDependentParameters 2)
Applicable to all units. Not
accessible. A table of
country dependent
parameters.
Applicable to all units. Not
accessible. An entry in the
country dependent
parameters table.
Applicable to all units.
Read only. The sub-band
ID of the entry in the
Country Dependent
Parameters table. Serves
also as index for the table
entry.
Applicable to all units.
Read only. The
frequencies included in the
applicable sub-band entry.
Applicable to all units.
Read only. The bandwidth
when using the applicable
the sub-band.
Applicable to all units.
Read only. The maximum
allowed Tx power at the
antenna port when using
the applicable sub-band.
Applicable to all units.
Read only. The maximum
allowed EIRP when using
the applicable sub-band.
Applicable to all units.
Read only. The minimum
supported modulation
level.
*CountryDependentParameterEntry
(*CountryDependentParamsTable 1)
*CountryDependentParameterTableIdx
(*CountryDependentParameterEntry 1)
*CountryDependentParameterFrequenci
es
(*CountryDependentParameterEntry 2)
*AllowedBandwidth
(*CountryDependentParameterEntry 3)
*RegulationMaxTxPowerAtAntennaPort
(*CountryDependentParameterEntry 4)
*RegulationMaxEIRP
(*CountryDependentParameterEntry 5)
*MinModulationLevel
(*CountryDependentParameterEntry 6)
Value/Range
*MaxModulationLevel
(*CountryDependentParameterEntry 7)
Applicable to all units.
Read only. The maximum
supported modulation
level.
*BurstModeSupport
(*CountryDependentParameterEntry 8)
Applicable to all units.
Read only. The supported
Burst Mode Option.
Applicable to all units.
Read only. Applicable only
if Burst Mode Option is
supported. The maximum
supported burst duration.
*MaximumBurstDuration
(*CountryDependentParameterEntry 9)
Integer
DisplayString
Integer
Integer
Integer
A Regulation Max EIRP of
100 means no limit.
Integer
level1 (1)
level2 (2)
level3 (3)
level4 (4)
level5 (5)
level6 (6)
level7 (7)
level8 (8)
Integer
level1 (1)
level2 (2)
level3 (3)
level4 (4)
level5 (5)
level6 (6)
level7 (7)
level8 (8)
Integer
supported (1)
notSupported (2)
Integer
BreezeACCESS 4900 System Manual
164
breezeAccessVLMib
MIB Parameter
Description
Value/Range
*DfsSupport
(*CountryDependentParameterEntry 10)
Applicable to AU/BU only.
Read only. The supported
DFS Option.
Applicable to all units.
Read only. The Minimum
HW Revision needed to
support the Sub-Band.
Integer
supported (1)
notSupported (2)
Integer
HwRevisionA (1),
HwRevisionB (2),
HwRevisionC (3),
na (255)
Integer
supported (1)
notSupported (2)
*MinimumHwRevision
(*CountryDependentParameterEntry 11)
*AuthenticationEncryptionSupport
(CountryDependentParameters 3)
*DataEncryptionSupport
(CountryDependentParameters 4)
*AESEncryptionSupport
(CountryDependentParameters 5)
*AntennaGainChange
(*SysInfo 19)
E.2.2
Applicable to all units.
Read only. The supported
Authentication Encryption
Option.
Applicable to all units.
Read only. The supported
Data Encryption Option.
Applicable to all units.
Read only. The supported
AES Encryption Option.
Applicable to all units.
Indicates whether the
Antenna Gain parameter is
changeable or fixed.
Integer
supported (1)
notSupported (2)
Integer
supported (1)
notSupported (2)
Integer
supported (1)
notSupported (2)
Unit Control Parameters
MIB Parameter
*UnitControl
(breezeAccessVLMib 2)
*ResetUnit
(*UnitControl 1)
*SetDefaults
(*UnitControl 2)
*UnitName
(*UnitControl 3)
Description
Value/Range
Applicable to all units. Resets the
unit and applies new parameter
values.
Applicable to all units. Sets unit
configuration to Defaults values
after the next reset.
completeFactory: All parameters
revert to Factory Defaults values
partialFactory: All parameters
revert to Factory Defaults values,
except the parameters required
for maintaining wireless
connectivity.
completeOperator: All parameters
revert to Operator Defaults values
partialOperator: All parameters
revert to Operator Defaults
values, except the parameters
required for maintaining wireless
connectivity.
Applicable to all units. The unit
name.
Integer
cancel (1)
resetSystemNow (2)
Integer
NoDefaultSettingRequested
(0),
completeFactory (1)
partialFactory (2)
completeOperator (3)
partialOperator (4)
cancelCurrentPendingRequest
(5)
DisplayString (SIZE(32))
A string of up to 32 printable
ASCII characters.
BreezeACCESS 4900 System Manual
165
Appendix E - Supported MIBS and Traps
MIB Parameter
Description
Value/Range
*FlashMemoryControl
(*UnitControl 4)
Integer
resetAndBootFrom
ShadowVersion (1)
useRunningVersion
AfterReset (2)
cancel (3)
*SaveCurrentConfigurationAs
OperatorDefaults
(*UnitControl 6)
*ExitTelnet
(*UnitControl 7)
Applicable to all units.
Reset And Boot From Shadow
Version: Activates the shadow
version.
Use Running Version After Reset:
The currently active version will
become the main version and will
be activated after next reset.
Applicable to all units. Time-out of
management via Telnet.
Automatic exit if the program is
inactive for the defined time.
Applicable to all units. Saves the
current configuration as Operator
Defaults.
Applicable to all units. Exit the
Telnet Monitor session.
*UnitPasswords
(*UnitControl 8)
*ReadOnlyPassword
(*UnitPasswords 1)
Applicable to all units. Unit
passwords.
Applicable to all units. The User
(read only) password.
*InstallerPassword
(*UnitPasswords 2)
Applicable to all units. The
Installer password.
*AdminPassword
(*UnitPasswords 3)
Applicable to all units. The
Administrator password. This is
also the SNMP Write Community
String.
Applicable to all units. Ethernet
port mode of operation.
*TelnetLogoutTimer
(*UnitControl 5)
*EthernetNegotiationMode
(*UnitControl 9)
*FTPParameters
(*UnitControl 10)
*FTPServerParams
(*FTPParameters 1)
*FTPServerUserName
(*FTPServerParams 1)
*FTPServerPassword
(*FTPServerParams 2)
*FTPClientIpAddress
(*FTPParameters 3)
*FTPServertIpaddress
(*FTPServerParams 4)
*FTPClientMask
(*FTPParameters 5)
*FTPGatewayIPAddress
(*FTPParameters 6)
Applicable to all units. FTP
parameters
Applicable to all units. General
FTP server parameters.
Applicable to all units. The user
name to be used for access to the
FTP server
Applicable to all units. The
password to be used for access to
the FTP server
Applicable to all units. The IP
address of the FTP stack in the
unit.
Applicable to all units. The IP
address of the FTP server
Applicable to all units. The IP
MASK of the FTP stack in the
unit.
Applicable to all units. The FTP
Default Gateway IP address.
Integer
1-999 (minutes)
Integer
saveAsDefaults (1)
cancel (2)
Integer
cancelOperation (1)
exit (2)
DisplayString (SIZE(8)).
Up to 8 printable ASCII
characters.
DisplayString (SIZE(8)).
Up to 8 printable ASCII
characters.
DisplayString (SIZE(8)).
Up to 8 printable ASCII
characters.
Integer
force10MbpsAnd
HalfDuplex (1)
force10MbpsAnd
FullDuplex (2)
force100MbpsAnd
HalfDuplex (3)
force100MbpsAnd
FullDuplex (4)
autoNegotiationMode (5)
DisplayString (SIZE(20)).
Up to 18 printable ASCII
characters.
DisplayString (SIZE(20)).
Up to 18 printable ASCII
characters.
IP address
IP address
IP address
IP address
BreezeACCESS 4900 System Manual
166
breezeAccessVLMib
MIB Parameter
Description
*FTPSwDownload
(*FTPParameters 2)
*FTPSwFileName
(*FTPSwDownload 1)
Applicable to all units. SW
download parameters.
Applicable to all units. The name
of the SW file to be downloaded.
*FtpSwDownloadSourceDir
(*FTPSwDownload 2)
Applicable to all units. The source
directory of the required file in the
FTP server
*DownloadSwFile
(*FTPSwDownload 3)
Applicable to all units. Execution
of the SW download operation.
*ConfigurationFileLoading
(*FTPParameters 3)
Applicable to all units.
Configuration file and Operator
Defaults file download/upload
parameters.
Applicable to all units. The name
of the configuration file to be
downloaded/uploaded.
*ConfigurationFileName
(*ConfigurationFileLoading 1)
*OperatorDefaultsFileName
(*ConfigurationFileLoading 2)
Applicable to all units. The name
of the Operator Defaults file to be
downloaded/uploaded.
*FTPConfigurationFileSourceDir
(*ConfigurationFileLoading 3)
Applicable to all units. The source
directory of the required file in the
FTP server
*ExecuteFTPConfigurationFileLoading
(*ConfigurationFileLoading 4)
Applicable to all units. Execution
of the file download/upload
operation.
*EventLogFileUploading
(*FTPParameters 4)
*EventLogFileName
(*EventLogFileUploading 1)
Applicable to all units. Event Log
file upload parameters.
Applicable to all units. The name
of the event log file to be
uploaded.
Applicable to all units. The
destination directory for the event
logd file in the FTP server
*EventLogDestinationDir
(*EventLogFileUploading 2)
*UploadEventLogFile
(*EventLogFileUploading 3)
*LoadingStatus
(*UnitControl 11)
*EventLogFileParams
(*UnitControl 12)
Applicable to all units.
Execution of the event log upload
operation
Applicable to all units. The status
of an FTP or TFTP loading
process.
Value/Range
DisplayString (SIZE(80)).
Up to 20 printable ASCII
characters. An empty string is
not allowed.
DisplayString (SIZE(80)).
Up to 80 printable ASCII
characters. Use “.” To clear
field.
Integer
downloadFile (1)
cancel (2)
DisplayString (SIZE(80)).
Up to 20 printable ASCII
characters. An empty string is
not allowed.
DisplayString (SIZE(80)).
Up to 20 printable ASCII
characters. An empty string is
not allowed.
DisplayString (SIZE(80)).
Up to 80 printable ASCII
characters. Use “.” To clear
field.
Integer
executeFTPGetConfiguration
File (1)
executeFTPPutConfiguration
File (2)
executeFTPGetOperator
Defaults (3)
executeFTPPutOperator
Defaults (4)
cancel (5)
DisplayString (SIZE(80)).
Up to 20 printable ASCII
characters.
DisplayString (SIZE(80)).
Up to 80 printable ASCII
characters. Use “.” To clear
field.
Integer
uploadFile (1)
cancel (2)
Integer
inProcess (1)
successful (2)
failed (3)
Event Log parameters
BreezeACCESS 4900 System Manual
167
Appendix E - Supported MIBS and Traps
MIB Parameter
Description
Value/Range
*EventLogPolicy
(*EventLogFileParams 1)
Applicable to all units. The lowest
severity of events to be logged.
*EraseEventLog
(*EventLogFileParams 2)
Applicable to all units. Erase the
log file.
*SysLocation
(*UnitControl 13)
*FeatureUpgrade
(*UnitControl 14)
*FeatureUpgradeManually
(*FeatureUpgrade 1)
Applicable to all units. The unit
location.
Feature Upgrade parameters
Integer
message (1)
warning (2)
error (3)
fatal(4)
logNone(5)
Integer
eraseEventLog (1)
cancel(2)
DisplayString (SIZE(0..34))
E.2.3
Applicable to all units.
Upgrade unit to support new
feature.
DisplayString (SIZE(32..64))
License string: 32 to 64
hexadecimal digits.
Network Management Parameters
MIB Parameter
Description
*NwMngParameters
(breezeAccessVLMib 3)
*AccessToNwMng
(*NwMngParameters 1)
Network management
parameters.
Applicable to all units. The port
to be used for remote
management.
*NwMngFilter
(*NwMngParameters 2)
Applicable to all units. Disables
or enable IP address based
filtering of management
messages on one or both ports.
mngIpFilterTable
(*NwMngParameters 3)
Applicable to all units. A table of
up to 10 IP addresses of stations
that are authorized to access the
unit for management purposes.
Not accessible.
Applicable to all units. A
Management IP Addresses
Table entry. Not accessible.
Applicable to all units. An IP
address in the Management IP
Addresses Table entry.
Applicable to all units.
Read-only. A table index for an
entry in the Management IP
Addresses Table.
Applicable to all units. Deletes a
single selected entry from the
Management IP Addresses
Table.
mngIpFilterEntry
(mngIpFilterTable 1)
*NwMngIpAddress
(mngIpFilterEntry 1)
*NwMngIpTableIdx
(mngIpFilterEntry 2)
*DeleteOneNwIpAddr
(*NwMngParameters 4)
Value/Range
Integer
fromwirelessOnly (1)
fromEthernetOnly (2)
fromBothWirelessnAndEthernet (3)
na (255)
Integer
disable (1)
activateOnEthernetPort (2)
activateOnWirelessPort (3)
activateOnBothWirelessAndEthernet
(4)
na (255)
IP address
Integer
1-10
Integer
cancelOperation (0)
deleteEntry (1…10)
na (255)
BreezeACCESS 4900 System Manual
168
breezeAccessVLMib
MIB Parameter
Description
Value/Range
*DeleteAllNwIpAddrs
(*NwMngParameters 5)
Applicable to all units. Deletes all
entries from the Management IP
Addresses Table.
*AccessToNwTrap
(*NwMngParameters 6)
Applicable to all units. Enables or
disables the sending of SNMP
traps.
Applicable to all units. A table of
up to 10 IP addresses of stations
to which to send SNMP traps.
Not accessible.
Applicable to all units. A
Management Trap Table entry.
Not accessible.
Applicable to all units. The trap
community associated with the
applicable entry in the
Management Trap Table.
Applicable to all units. An IP
address in the Management Trap
Table.
Applicable to all units. Read only.
Index for an entry in the
Management Trap Table.
Applicable to all units. Deletes a
single selected entry from the
Management Trap Table.
Integer
deleteAll (1)
cancelOperation (2)
na (255)
Integer
disable (1)
enable (2)
mngTrapTable
(*NwMngParameters 7)
mngTrapEntry
(mngTrapTable 1)
*NwMngTrapCommunity
(mngTrapEntry 1)
*NwMngTrapAddress
(mngTrapEntry 2)
*NwMngTrapTableIdx
(mngTrapEntry 3)
*DeleteOneTrapAddr
(*NwMngParameters 8)
*DeleteAllTrapAddrs
(*NwMngParameters 9)
Applicable to all units. Deletes all
entries from the Management
Trap Table.
*MngIpRangesTable
(*NwMngParameters 10)
Applicable to all units. A table of
Management IP Address
Ranges. Not accessible.
Applicable to all units. An entry
in the table of Management IP
Address Ranges. Not accessible.
Applicable to all units. Index of
an entry in the IP Address
Ranges Table.
Applicable to all units. Defines
the method of defining the range:
Using Start & End Addresses
(rangeDefinedByStartEndAddr),
or using Start Address and Mask
(rangeDefinedByStartAddrMask
Applicable to all units. Start
Address of the range.
Applicable to all units. End
Address of the range. Used only
if brzaccVLMngIPRangeFlag is
rangeDefinedByStartEndAddr
Applicable to all units. The
subnet mask of the range. Used
only if
brzaccVLMngIPRangeFlag is
rangeDefinedByStartAddrMask.
*MngIpRangesEntry
(*MngIpRangesTable 1)
*MngIpRangeIdx
(*MngIpRangesEntry 1)
*MngIPRangeFlag
(*MngIpRangesEntry 2)
*MngIpRangeStart
(*MngIpRangesEntry 3)
*MngIpRangeEnd
(*MngIpRangesEntry 4)
*MngIpRangeMask
(*MngIpRangesEntry 5)
DisplayString (SIZE(14))
Up to 14 printable ASCII characters.
IP address
Integer
1-10
Integer
cancelOperation (0)
deleteEntry (1…10)
na (255)
Integer
deleteAll (1)
cancelOperation (2)
na (255)
Integer
1-10
Integer
rangeDefinedByStartEndAddr(1),
rangeDefinedByStartAddrMask(2)
IP address
IP address
IP address
BreezeACCESS 4900 System Manual
169
Appendix E - Supported MIBS and Traps
MIB Parameter
Description
Value/Range
*DeleteOneNwIpRange
(*NwMngParameters 11)
Applicable to all units. Deletes a
single selected entry from the
Management IP Ranges Table.
*DeleteAllNwIpRanges
(*NwMngParameters 12)
Applicable to all units. Deletes all
entries from the Management IP
Ranges Table.
Integer
cancelOperation (0)
deleteEntry (1…10)
na (255)
Integer
deleteAll (1)
cancelOperation (2)
na (255)
E.2.4
IP Parameters
MIB Parameter
*IpParams
(breezeAccessVLMib 4)
*UnitIpAddress
(*IpParams 1)
*SubNetMask
(*IpParams 2)
*DefaultGWAddress
(*IpParams 3)
*UseDhcp
(*IpParams 4)
*AccessToDHCP
(*IpParams 5)
*RunTimeIPaddr
(*IpParams 6)
*RunTimeSubNetMask
(*IpParams 7)
Description
Value/Range
Applicable to all units. IP address
of the unit.
Applicable to all units. Subnet
mask of the unit.
Applicable to all units. Default
gateway IP address of the unit.
Applicable to all units. DHCP
client mode of operation.
disable: Use regular (manual)
methods to configure IP
parameters.
DHCP Only: Use DHCP server to
configure IP parameters.
automatic: Use DHCP server to
configure IP parameters. If a
DHCP server is not available, use
manually configured values for
*UnitIpAdress, *SubnetMask and
*DefaultGWAdress.
Applicable to all units. The port to
be used for communicating with a
DHCP server.
IP address
Applicable to all units. Read-only:
The run-time IP address. If DHCP
is used, the run-time IP address is
the address given to the unit by
the server. Alternatively the static
IP address is used.
Applicable to all units. Read-only:
The run-time subnet mask. If
DHCP is used, the run-time
subnet mask is the mask given to
the unit by the server.
Alternatively the static subnet
mask value is used.
IP address
IP address
Integer
disable (1)
dHCPOnly (2)
automatic (3)
Integer
fromWirelessOnly (1)
fromEthernetOnly (2)
fromBothWirelessAndEthernet (3)
IP address
IP address
BreezeACCESS 4900 System Manual
170
breezeAccessVLMib
MIB Parameter
Description
Value/Range
*RunTimeDefaultIPGateway
(*IpParams 8)
Applicable to all units. Read-only:
The run-time Gateway IP address.
If DHCP is used, the Run Time
Gateway IP Address is the
address given to the unit by the
server. Alternatively, the static
default gateway is used.
IP address
E.2.5
Bridge Parameters
MIB Parameter
Description
*BridgeParameters
(breezeAccessVLMib 5)
*VLANSupport
(*BridgeParameters 1)
Bridge parameters.
*VlanID
(*VLANSupport 1)
*EthernetLinkType
(*VLANSupport 2)
*ManagementVID
(*VLANSupport 3)
Applicable to all units. VLAN support
parameters. Applicable to Access Link
only.
Applicable to SU/RB only. VLAN ID for
data frame tagging.
Applicable to all units. VLAN support
mode (Link Type).
The accessLink option is not available for
AU.
Applicable to all units. VLAN ID for
management frame tagging.
*VLANForwarding
(*VLANSupport 4)
*VlanForwardingSupport
(*VLANForwarding 1)
VLAN forwarding feature parameters.
*VlanForwardingTable
(*VLANForwarding 2)
Applicable to all units. A table of up to 20
VLAN IDs of devices to which data frames
are forwarded when the VLAN Forwarding
feature is Enabled. Applicable to Trunk
links only. Not accessible.
Applicable to all units. A VLAN Forwarding
Table entry. Applicable to Trunk links only.
Not accessible.
Applicable to all units. A read only table
index for a VLAN entry in the VLAN
Forwarding Table.
Applicable to all units. The list of VLAN
ID's in the VLAN ID Forwarding Table. To
remove a VLAN ID - SET the
corresponding entry to 0. To add a new
VLAN ID SET an entry which is now 0.
VLAN Relaying feature parameters. Not
applicable to BreezeNET B products.
Applicable to AU only. Not applicable to
BreezeNET B products. Enables or
disables the VLAN Relaying feature.
Applicable to Trunk links only.
*VlanForwardingEntry
(*VlanForwardingTable 1)
*VlanForwardingTableIdx
(*VlanForwardingEntry 1)
*VlanIdForwarding
(*VlanForwardingEntry 2)
*VLANRelaying
(*VLANSupport 5)
*VlanRelayingSupport
(*VLANRelaying 1)
Applicable to all units. Enables or disables
the VLAN forwarding feature. Applicable
to Trunk links only.
Value/Range
Integer
1-4094.
0 –na (no VLAN ID)
Integer
accessLink (1)
trunkLink (2)
hybridLink (3)
Integer
1-4094
65535 - no VLAN
tagging.
Integer
disable (1)
enable (2)
na (255)
Integer
1-20
Integer
1-4094
0-remove entry.
Integer
disable (1)
enable (2)
na (255)
BreezeACCESS 4900 System Manual
171
Appendix E - Supported MIBS and Traps
MIB Parameter
Description
*VlanRelayingTable
(*VLANRelaying 2)
Applicable to AU only. Not applicable to
BreezeNET B products. A table of up to
20 VLAN IDs of devices to which data
frames are relayed when the VLAN
Relaying feature is Enabled. Applicable to
Trunk links only. Not accessible.
Applicable to AU only. Not applicable to
BreezeNET B products. A VLAN Relaying
Table entry. Applicable to Trunk links only.
Not accessible.
Applicable to AU only. Not applicable to
BreezeNET B products. A read only table
index for a VLAN entry in the VLAN
Relaying Table.
Applicable to AU only. Not applicable to
BreezeNET B products. The list of VLAN
ID's in the VLAN ID Relaying Table. To
remove a VLAN ID - SET the
corresponding entry to 0. To add a new
VLAN ID SET an entry which is now 0.
VLAN traffic priority parameters.
*VlanRelayingEntry
(*VlanRelayingTable 1)
*VlanRelayingTableIdx
(*VlanRelayingEntry) 1
*VlanIdRelaying
(*VlanRelayingEntry 2)
*VLANTrafficPriority
(*VLANSupport 6)
*VlanDataPriority
(*VLANTrafficPriority 1)
*VlanManagementPriority
(*VLANTrafficPriority 3)
*VlanPriorityThreshold
(*VLANTrafficPriority 4)
*BridgeAgingTime
(*BridgeParameters 2)
*BroadcastRelaying
(*BridgeParameters 4)
*UnicastRelaying
(*BridgeParameters 5)
*EthBroadcastFiltering
(*BridgeParameters 6)
Value/Range
Applicable to SU/RB only.
Priority tagging for data frames.
Applicable to Access Link only.
Applicable to all units. Priority tagging for
management frames. Applicable to
Access Link and Trunk Link only.
Applicable to all units. Not applicable to
units with SW version 3.1 and higher
where this parameter is replaced by
Priority threshold for tagged frames
received from Ethernet port. Applicable to
Hybrid Link and Trunk Link only.
Applicable to all units. Bridge aging time
for devices learned from both the Ethernet
and wireless link ports.
Applicable to AU only. Not applicable to
BreezeNET B products. Enables or
disables the relaying of broadcast
messages to the wireless link.
Applicable to AU only. Not applicable to
BreezeNET B products. Enables or
disables the relaying of unicast messages
to the wireless link.
Applicable to SU/RB only. Enables or
disables the filtering of Ethernet (layer2)
broadcasts.
disable: No filtering.
onEthrnetOnly: Filters broadcasts
received on the Ethernet port only.
onWirelessOnly: Filters broadcasts
received on the wireless port only.
onBothWirelessAndEthernet: Filters
broadcasts received on both ports.
Integer
1-20
Integer
1-4094
0-remove entry.
Integer
0–7
255-na
Integer
0–7
255-na
Integer
0–7
255-na
Integer
20 – 2000 (seconds)
Integer
disable (1)
enable (2)
na (255)
Integer
disable (1)
enable (2)
na (255)
Integer
disable (1)
onEthernetOnly (2)
onwirelessOnly (3)
onBothWirelessAndEthe
rnet (4)
na (255)
*EthBroadcastingParameter
(*BridgeParameters 7)
BreezeACCESS 4900 System Manual
172
breezeAccessVLMib
MIB Parameter
Description
Value/Range
*DHCPBroadcastOverrideFil
ter
(*EthBroadcastingParameter
s 1)
Applicable to SU/RB only. Enables or
disables the broadcasting of DHCP
messages, overriding the general
*EthBroadcastFiltering Ethernet broadcast
filtering option.
Applicable to SU/RB only. Enables or
disables the broadcasting of PPPoE
messages, overriding the general
*EthBroadcastFiltering Ethernet broadcast
filtering option.
Applicable to SU/RB only. Enables or
disables the broadcasting of ARP
messages, overriding the general
*EthBroadcastFiltering Ethernet broadcast
filtering option.
Applicable to all units. Enable/disable the
limiter for multicast and broadcast
packets.
Integer
disable (1)
enable (2)
na (255)
*PPPoEBroadcastOverrideFi
lter
(*EthBroadcastingParameter
s 2)
*ARPBroadcastOverrideFilte
(*EthBroadcastingParameter
s 3)
*EthBroadcastMulticastLimit
erOption
(*EthBroadcastingParameter
s 4)
*EthBroadcastMulticastLimit
erThreshold
(*EthBroadcastingParameter
s 5)
*EthBroadcastMulticastLimit
erSendTrapInterval
(*EthBroadcastingParameter
s 5)
*ToSPriorityParameters
(*BridgeParameters 8)
*ToSPrecedenceThreshold
(*ToSPriorityParameters 1)
*RoamingOption
(*BridgeParameters 9)
*MacAddressDenyList
(*BridgeParameters 10)
*MacAddressDenyListTable
(*MacAddressDenyList 1)
*MacAddressDenyListEntry
(*MacAddressDenyListTable
1)
Applicable to all units. The limit for the
allowed number of multicast and
broadcast packets when the
Ethernet Broadcast/Multicast Limiter
Option is enabled
Applicable to all units. The minimum time
in minutes between two successive traps
that are sent, indicating the number of
packets that were dropped by the
Ethernet Broadcast/Multicast Limiter since
the last trap was sent.
Applicable to all units. Not applicable to
units with SW version 3.1 and higher.
Priority threshold (based on the ToS) for
frames received from Ethernet port.
Applicable to SU/RB only.Disable/enable
the roaming feature. When enabled, the
SU will start scanning for an AU/RB after
one second of not receiving beacons from
current AU/BU. Once it found a new
AU/BU, it will also send through the
wireless network a roaming SNAP on
behalf of its clients informing other
devices in the network of their new
location. When disabled, it will wait for
seven seconds before starting scanning,
and it will not send roaming SNAPs.
MAC Address Deny List parameters
Integer
disable (1)
enable (2)
na (255)
Integer
disable (1)
enable (2)
na (255)
Integer
disable (1)
limitOnlyBroadcasts(2)
limitMulticastsExceptBro
adcasts(3)
limitAllMulticasts(4)
Integer
0 - 204800
Integer
1-60
Integer
0-7
Integer
disable (1)
enable (2)
na (255)
Applicable to AU only. Not applicable to
BreezeNET B units. A list of up to 100
MAC Addresses of SUs that are not
allowed to transfer data to the AU. Not
accessible.
Applicable to AU only. Not applicable to
BreezeNET B units. An entry in the Mac
Address Deny List Table. Not accessible.
BreezeACCESS 4900 System Manual
173
Appendix E - Supported MIBS and Traps
MIB Parameter
Description
Value/Range
*MacAddressDenyListTableI
dx
(*MacAddressDenyListEntry
1)
*MacAddressDenyListId
(*MacAddressDenyListEntry
2)
Applicable to AU only. Not applicable to
BreezeNET B units. A read only table
index for a MAC Address entry in the Mac
Address Deny List Table.
Applicable to AU only. Not applicable to
BreezeNET B units. The list of MAC
Addresses in the MAC Address Deny List
Table. To Remove a MAC Address - SET
the corresponding entry to 0. To Add a
new MAC Address - SET an entry which
is currently 0.
Applicable to AU only. Not applicable to
BreezeNET B units. Add a MAC address
to the MAC Address Deny List Table
Applicable to AU only. Not applicable to
BreezeNET B units. Remove a MAC
address from the MAC Address Deny List
Table
Applicable to AU only. Not applicable to
BreezeNET B units. Read only. The
number of MAC addresses in the MAC
Address Deny List Table.
Ports Control parameters. Applicable to
SU/RB only.
Applicable to SU/RB only.
Enable/disable the Ethernet port. When
disabled, only data frames are blocked.
Management frames are accepted.
Integer
Range: 1 to 100
*MacAddressDenyListAdd
(*MacAddressDenyList 2)
*MacAddressDenyListRemo
ve
(*MacAddressDenyList 3)
*NumberOfMacAddressesIn
DenyList
(*MacAddressDenyList 4)
*PortsControl
(*BridgeParameters 11)
*EthernetPortControl
(*PortsControl 1)
E.2.6
MAC Address
MAC Address
MAC Address
Integer
Range: 0 to 100
Na (255)
Integer
disable (1),
enable (2),
na (255)
Air Interface Parameters
MIB Parameter
Description
*AirInterface
(breezeAccessVLMib 6)
*ESSIDParameters
(*AirInterface 1)
*ESSID
(*ESSIDParameters 1)
Applicable to all units. Air
Interface parameters.
Applicable to all units.
ESSID Parameters.
Applicable to all units. The
Extended Service Set ID
(ESSID) used to prevent the
merging of collocated
systems. The ESSID is
accessible only with the
write community string
(administrator password).
Applicable to AU/BU only.
Enabling/disabling the use
of the Operator ESSID
*OperatorESSIDOption
(*ESSIDParameters 2)
*OperatorESSID
(*ESSIDParameters 3)
Value/Range
Applicable to AU/BU only. A
secondary ESSID to support
easy installation of SUs as
well as the use of the Best
AU/BU feature. Accessible
only with SNMP Write
Community string
(administrator password).
DisplayString (SIZE(31))
Up to 31 printable case
sensitive ASCII characters.
Integer
disable (1)
enable (2)
na (255)
DisplayString (SIZE(31))
Up to 31 printable case
sensitive ASCII characters.
BreezeACCESS 4900 System Manual
174
breezeAccessVLMib
MIB Parameter
Description
Value/Range
*RunTimeESSID
(*ESSIDParameters 1)
Applicable to SU/RB only.
The ESSID of the
associated AU/BU.
Accessible only with SNMP
Write Community string
(administrator password).
Applicable to all units. For
AU/BU: read-write. For
SU/RB: read-only. The
distance is learned from the
AU/BU. In units with SW
version 2.0 and up applicable only when the
Cell Distance Mode is set to
Manual. The highest
distance from the AU/BU of
any SU/RB served by it.
Affects the maximum time
the units wait for a response
message and the slot size
by taking into account the
round trip propagation
delay.
Applicable to AU and SU.
Not applicable to
BreezeNET B products.
Arbitration Inter-Frame
Spacing (AIFS). This is the
number of time slots that
define the DIFS.
(DIFS=SIFS+AIFS). A value
of 1 should be used only in
point-to-point applications to
allow one unit to have
advantage over the other
unit.
Applicable to AU/BU only. A
wireless link quality
threshold, expressed in % of
retransmissions, for sending
the
brzaccVLAUWirelessQuality
TRAP.
This trap indicate whether
the quality has gone below
or above the specified
threshold
Applicable to all units. Not
accessible. Transmit Power
parameters table.
DisplayString (SIZE(31))
Up to 31 printable case
sensitive ASCII characters.
*MaximumCellDistance
(*AirInterface 2)
*AIFS
(*AirInterface 3)
*WirelessTrapThreshold
(*AirInterface 4)
*TransmitPowerTable
(*AirInterface 5)
*TransmitPowerEntry
(*TransmitPowerTable 1)
*TransmitPowerIdx
(*TransmitPowerEntry 1)
Applicable to all units. Not
accessible. An entry in the
Transmit Power parameters
table.
Applicable to all units. Readonly. An index of an entry in
the Transmit Power
parameters table.
Integer
Range: For units with SW
version bellow version 2.0
the range is 0 - 50000
Meters.
For units with SW version
2.0 and up the range is 0 to
54 Kilometers.
0 means no compensation
(minimum slot size, maximal
delay timeout).
Integer
oneSlot (1)
twoSlots (2)
na (255)
Integer
1-100 (%)
Integer
1-4
BreezeACCESS 4900 System Manual
175
Appendix E - Supported MIBS and Traps
MIB Parameter
Description
Value/Range
*ApplicableModulationLevel
(*TransmitPowerEntry 2)
Applicable to all units. Readonly. The applicable
modulation level for an entry
in the Transmit Power
parameters table. Level 8 is
not applicable to units with
HW revision A.
Applicable to all units. Readonly. The allowed range for
the *TxPower parameter at
the applicable modulation
level.
Applicable to all units.
AU/BU: The transmit power
defined for the applicable
modulation level.
SU/RB: If ATPC is disabled,
this is The transmit power
defined for the applicable
modulation level. If ATPC is
enabled, it serves as the
initial transmit power for the
ATPC algorithm.
Level1to5 (1)
Level6 (2)
Level7 (3)
Level8 (4)
*MaximumTxPowerRange
(*TransmitPowerEntry 3)
*TxPower
(*TransmitPowerEntry 4)
*CurrentTxPower
(*TransmitPowerEntry 5)
Applicable to SU/RB.
The actual transmit power in
dBm at the applicable
modulation level.
*MaximumTransmitPowerTable
(*AirInterface 6)
Applicable to SU /RB. Not
accessible. Maximum
Transmit Power parameters
table.
*MaximumTransmitPowerEntry
(*TransmitPowerTable 1)
Applicable to SU/RB. Not
accessible. An entry in the
Maximum Transmit Power
parameters table.
Applicable to SU/RB. Readonly. An index of an entry in
the Maximum Transmit
Power parameters table.
Applicable to SU/RB. Readonly. The applicable
modulation level for an entry
in the Maximum Transmit
Power parameters table.
Level 8 is not applicable to
units with HW revision A.
Applicable to SU/RB. Readonly. The allowed range for
the *MaxTxPower
parameter at the applicable
modulation level.
*MaximumTransmitPowerIdx
(*MaximumTransmitPowerEntry 1)
*MaxTxApplicableModulationLevel
(*MaximumTransmitPowerEntry 2)
*DefinedMaximumTxPowerRange
(*MaximumTransmitPowerEntry 3)
DisplayString
Range: -10 to the maximum
allowed for the applicable
modulation level.
DisplayString
Range:
In SU/RB: The range is -10
dBm to the power value
defined by
*MaximumTxPower for the
applicable modulation level.
In AU/BU: The range is -10
dBm to the power value
defined by
*MaximumTxPowerRange
for the applicable modulation
level
DisplayString
Range: -17 to the maximum
value defined by
*MaximumTxPowerRange
for the applicable modulation
level.
Integer
1-4
Level1to5 (1)
Level6 (2)
Level7 (3)
Level8 (4)
DisplayString
Range: -10 to the maximum
allowed for the applicable
modulation level.
BreezeACCESS 4900 System Manual
176
breezeAccessVLMib
MIB Parameter
Description
Value/Range
*MaxTxPower
(*MaximumTransmitPowerEntry 4)
Applicable to SU/RB.
The maximum transmit
power level that can be
either configured for the
*TxPower parameter or
reached by the ATPC
algorithm.
Applicable to AU. Not
applicable to BreezeNET B
products. The upper limit for
the number of Subscriber
Units that can be associated
with the AU.
Best AU/BU parameters.
Applicable to SU/RB.
Applicable to SU/RB.
Disable/enable the Best
AU/BU selection mechanism
DisplayString
Range: -10 to the maximum
defined by the
*DefinedMaximumTxPowerR
ange for the applicable
modulation level.
*MaxNumOfAssociations
(*AirInterface 10)
*BestAu
(*AirInterface 11)
*BestAuSupport
(*BestAu 1)
*BestAuNoOfScanningAttempts
(*BestAu 2)
*PreferredAuMacAddress
(*BestAu 3)
*NeighborAuTable
(*BestAu 4)
*NeighborAuEntry
(*NeighborAuTable 1)
*NeighborAuIdx
(*NeighborAuEntry 1)
*NeighborAuMacAdd
(*NeighborAuEntry 2)
*NeighborAuESSID
(*NeighborAuEntry 3)
*NeighborAuSNR
(*NeighborAuEntry 4)
Applicable to SU/RB. The
number of scanning
attempts to collect
information for the Best
AU/BU decision
Applicable to SU only. The
MAC address of the
preferred AU/BU (overriding
the Best AU/BU selection
process).
Applicable to SU/RB. Not
accessible. Neighboring
AUs/BUs table.
Applicable to SU only. Not
accessible. An entry in the
Neighboring AUs table.
Applicable to SU/RB. Readonly. An Index of an entry in
the Neighboring AU/BU
Table
Applicable to SU/RB. Readonly. The MAC Address of
the AU/BU associated with
the entry in the Neighboring
AU/BU Table
Applicable to SU/RB. Readonly. The ESSID of the
AU/BU associated with the
entry in the Neighboring
AU/BU Table. Accessible
only with the SNMP Write
community string
(Administrator Password).
Applicable to SU/RB. Readonly. The average SNR at
which the SU/RB receives
the AU/BU associated with
the entry in the Neighboring
AU/BU Table.
Integer
AU-BS, AU-SA: 0-512 (0-124
if Data Encryption Option is
enabled).
AUS-BS, AUS-SA: 0-5.
na (65535)
Integer
disable (1)
enable (2)
na (255)
Integer
1-255
Mac Address
000000000000 means no
preferred AU
Integer
Range: 1…20
MAC Address
DisplayString
Integer
Na (255)
BreezeACCESS 4900 System Manual
177
Appendix E - Supported MIBS and Traps
MIB Parameter
Description
Value/Range
*NeighborAuAssocLoadStatus
(*NeighborAuEntry 5)
Applicable to SU/RB. Readonly. The load status of the
AU/BU associated with the
entry in the Neighboring
AU/BU Table. Full means
that it has reached its
maximum permitted load,
meaning in AU that the
number of associated SUs
is the Maximum Number Of
Associations (for AU) or in
BU that it is already
associated with an RB.
Applicable to SU/RB. Readonly. The overall mark given
by the Best AU/BU
algorithm to the AU/BU
associated with the entry in
the Neighboring AU/BU
Table.
Applicable to SU/RB. Readonly. The HW revision of the
AU/BU associated with the
entry in the Neighboring
AU/BU Table.
Applicable to SU/RB. Readonly. The Country Code of
the AU/BU associated with
the entry in the Neighboring
AU/BU Table.
Applicable to SU/RB. Readonly. The SW Version of the
AU/BU associated with the
entry in the Neighboring
AU/BU Table.
Applicable to SU/RB. Readonly. The current ATPC
Option of the AU/BU
associated with the entry in
the Neighboring AU/BU
Table.
Applicable to SU/RB. Readonly. The current Adaptive
Modulation Option of the
AU/BU associated with the
entry in the Neighboring
AU/BU Table.
Applicable to SU/RB. Readonly. The current Burst
Mode Option of the AU/BU
associated with the entry in
the Neighboring AU/BU
Table.
Applicable to SU/RB. Readonly. The current DFS
Option of the AU/BU
associated with the entry in
the Neighboring AU/BU
Table.
Integer
full (1)
notFull (2)
na (255)
*NeighborAuMark
(*NeighborAuEntry 6)
*NeighborAuHwRevision
(*NeighborAuEntry 7)
*NeighborAuCountryCode
(*NeighborAuEntry 8)
*NeighborAuSwVer
(*NeighborAuEntry 9)
*NeighborAuAtpcOption
(*NeighborAuEntry 10)
*NeighborAuAdapModOption
(*NeighborAuEntry 11)
*NeighborAuBurstModeOption
(*NeighborAuEntry 12)
*NeighborAuDfsOption
(*NeighborAuEntry 14)
Integer
Integer
HwRevisionA (1),
HwRevisionB (2),
HwRevisionC (3),
na (255)
Integer
DisplayString
Integer
disable (1),
enable (2),
na (255)
Integer
disable (1),
enable (2),
na (255)
Integer
disable (1),
enable (2),
na (255)
Integer
disable (1),
enable (2),
na (255)
BreezeACCESS 4900 System Manual
178
breezeAccessVLMib
MIB Parameter
Description
Value/Range
*NeighborAuConcatenationOption
(*NeighborAuEntry 15)
Applicable to SU/RB. Readonly. The current
Concatenation Option of the
AU/BU associated with the
entry in the Neighboring
AU/BU Table.
For future use. Applicable to
SU/RB. Read-only. The
current Country Code
Learning by SU option of the
AU/BU associated with the
entry in the Neighboring
AU/BU Table.
For future use. Applicable to
SU/RB. Read-only. The
current Security Mode of the
AU/BU associated with the
entry in the Neighboring
AU/BU Table.
For future use. Applicable to
SU/RB. Read-only. The
current Authentication
algorithm of the AU/BU
associated with the entry in
the Neighboring AU/BU
Table.
For future use. Applicable to
SU/RB. Read-only. The
current Data Encryption
option of the AU/BU
associated with the entry in
the Neighboring AU/BU
Table.
Frequency Definition
parameters
Applicable to SU/RB. Not
applicable to units with SW
version 2.0 or higher. The
lowest frequency in the
subset to be used for
scanning.
For 5.8 GHz products the
range is 5740 to 5830 MHz
using a 10 MHz resolution.
For 4.9GHz products the
range is 4920 to 5080 MHz
using a 10 MHz resolution.
For HW Revision C and
above this leaf is not
relevant - shall return 0.
Integer
disable (1),
enable (2),
na (255)
*NeighborAuLearnCountryCodeBy
SU
(*NeighborAuEntry 17)
*NeighborAuSecurityMode
(*NeighborAuEntry 18)
*NeighborAuAuthOption
(*NeighborAuEntry 19)
*NeighborAuDataEncyptOption
(*NeighborAuEntry 20)
*FrequencyDefinition
(*AirInterface 12)
*SubBandLowerFrequency
(*FrequencyDefinition 1)
Integer
disable (1),
enable (2),
na (255)
Integer
wep (1),
aes (2),
na (255)
Integer
openSysteme (1),
sharedKey (2),
na (255)
Integer
disable (1),
enable (2),
na (255)
Integer
BreezeACCESS 4900 System Manual
179
Appendix E - Supported MIBS and Traps
MIB Parameter
Description
Value/Range
*SubBandUpperFrequency
(*FrequencyDefinition 2)
Applicable to SU/RB. Not
applicable to units with SW
version 2.0 or higher. The
lowest frequency in the
subset to be used for
scanning.
For 5.8 GHz products the
range is 5740 to 5830 MHz
using a 10 MHz resolution.
For 4.9G Hz products the
range is 4920 to 5080 MHz
using a 10 MHz resolution.
For HW Revision C and
above this leaf is not
relevant - shall return 0.
Applicable to all units - For
flexible Sub-Bands only.
For units with version 2.0
and above this is a readonly parameter.
The scanning step to be
used for generating the
frequency subset.
Applicable to all units. Not
accessible. The Frequency
Subset table that includes
all frequencies from the
Sub-band Lower Frequency
to the Sub-band Upper
Frequency, using steps as
defined by the Scanning
Step
Applicable to all units. Not
accessible. An entry in the
Frequency Subset table.
Applicable to all units. Readonly. The index of an entry
in the Frequency Subset
table.
Applicable to all units with
HW revision B and lower
(for units with HW revision C
and higher replaced by
*FrequencySubsetFrequenc
yNew to support a resolution
of 0.5 MHz). Read-only.
The frequency in MHz of an
entry in the Frequency
Subset table.
Applicable to all units. Readonly. The status of an entry
in the Frequency subset
Table. Only frequencies of
active entries will be
included in the final list of
frequencies to be used for
scanning.
Integer
*ScanningStep
(*FrequencyDefinition 3)
*FrequencySubsetTable
(*FrequencyDefinition 4)
*FrequencySubsetEntry
(FrequencySubsetTable 1)
*FrequencySubsetTableIdx
(*FrequencySubsetEntry 1)
*FrequencySubsetFrequency
(*FrequencySubsetEntry 2)
*FrequencySubsetActive
(*FrequencySubsetEntry 3)
Integer
mhz-5 (1),
mhz-10 (2),
mhz-20 (3)
na (255)
Integer
Integer
Integer
active (1)
notActive (2)
BreezeACCESS 4900 System Manual
180
breezeAccessVLMib
MIB Parameter
Description
Value/Range
*FrequencySubsetFrequencyNew
(*FrequencySubsetEntry 4)
Applicable to all units. Readonly. The frequency in MHz
of an entry in the Frequency
Subset table. (Replaces
*FrequencySubsetFrequenc
y to support a resolution of
0.5 MHz for units with HW
revision C and higher).
Applicable to all units. Apply
the selected subset. After
the next reset the new
subset will be used for
scanning.
Applicable to all units. Not
accessible. The Current
Frequency Subset table that
includes all frequencies that
are currently used for
scanning.
Applicable to all units. Not
accessible. An entry in the
Current Frequency Subset
table.
Applicable to all units. Readonly. The index of an entry
in the Current Frequency
Subset table.
Applicable to all units with
HW revision B and lower
(for units with HW revision C
and higher replaced by
*CurrentFrequencySubsetFr
equencyNew to support a
resolution of 0.5 MHz).
Read-only. The frequency in
MHz of an entry in the
Current Frequency Subset
table.
Applicable to all units. Readonly. The frequency in MHz
of an entry in the Current
Frequency Subset table.
(Replaces
*CurrentFrequencySubsetFr
equency to support a
resolution of 0.5 MHz for
units with HW revision C
and higher).
Applicable to AU/BU with
HW revision B and lower
(for units with HW revision C
and higher replaced by
*CurrentUOperatingFrequen
cyNew to support a
resolution of 0.5 MHz).
Read-only. The operating
frequency in MHz.
DisplayString
*SetSelectedFreqsSubset
(*FrequencyDefinition 5)
*CurrentFrequencySubsetTable
(*FrequencyDefinition 6)
*CurrentFrequencySubsetEntry
(CurrentFrequencySubsetTable 1)
*CurrentFrequencySubsetTableIdx
(*CurrentFrequencySubsetEntry 1)
*CurrentFrequencySubset
Frequency
(*FrequencySubsetEntry 2)
*CurrentFrequencySubset
FrequencyNew
(*FrequencySubsetEntry 3)
*CurrentAUOperatingFrequency
(*FrequencyDefinition 7)
Integer
SetSelectedFreqsSubset (1)
cancel (2)
Integer
Integer
DisplayString
Integer
For 5.8 GHz products with
SW version below 2.0 the
range is 5740 to 5830 MHz
using a 10 MHz resolution.
For units with SW version
2.0 and up the range is as
defined in the selected SubBand.
BreezeACCESS 4900 System Manual
181
Appendix E - Supported MIBS and Traps
MIB Parameter
Description
Value/Range
*AUDefinedFrequency
(*FrequencyDefinition 8)
Applicable to AU/BU with
HW revision B and lower
(for units with HW revision C
and higher replaced by
*DefinedAUOperatingFrequ
encyNew to support a
resolution of 0.5 MHz).
Read-only. For 5.8 GHz
products with SW version
below 2.0 this is the
frequency in MHz of the
AU/BU after the next reset.
For units with SW version
2.0 and up this is the
frequency in MHz to use
when the DFS Option is
disabled.
Applicable to SU/RB. Read
only. The current operating
frequency in MHz.
Integer
For 5.8 GHz products with
SW version below 2.0 the
range is 5740 to 5830 MHz
using a 10M Hz resolution.
For units with SW version
2.0 and up the range is as
defined in the selected SubBand.
*CurrentSUOperatingFrequency
(*FrequencyDefinition 9)
*SubBandSelect
(*FrequencyDefinition 10)
*SelectSubBandIndex
(*SubBandSelect 1)
*DFSParameters
(*FrequencyDefinition 11)
*DFSOption
(*DFSParameters 1)
*DFSChannelCheckTime
(*DFSParameters 3)
*DFSChannelAvoidancePeriod
(*DFSParameters 4)
Sub-Band Selection
parameters
Applicable to all units. The
ID of the sub-band used by
the unit.
DFS Parameters. Applicable
to AU/BU.
Applicable to AU/BU.
Enabling/disabling the DFS
Algorithm. Not applicable if
DFS Option is not supported
by the current Sub-Band.
Applicable to AU/BU.
Defines the time the unit
checks the channel for
presence of radar signals
and does not transmit after
power up or association
or after moving to a new
channel due to detecting
radar in the previously used
channel.
Applicable to AU/BU.
Defines the time after
detecting radar signals in a
channel of avoiding using
the channel or adjacent
channels in accordance with
the bandwidth.
DisplayString
For 5.8 GHz products with
SW version below 2.0 the
range is 5740 to 5830 MHz
using a 10 MHz resolution.
For units with SW version
2.0 and up the range is as
defined in the selected SubBand.
Integer
Integer
disable (1)
enable (2)
na (255)
Integer
Range: 1 to 3600 (seconds).
Integer
Range: 1 to 60 (minutes).
BreezeACCESS 4900 System Manual
182
breezeAccessVLMib
MIB Parameter
Description
Value/Range
*DFSSuWaitingOption
(*DFSParameters 5)
Applicable to AU/BU.
Defines whether the
associated SUs may should
wait for this AU/BU after it
stopped transmitting due to
radar detection, before they
starts scanning for other
AUs/BUs.
Applicable to AU/BU.
Clear Radar Detected and
Adjacent to Radar channels
after unit reset.
Returns the unit to operate
in default frequency
Applicable to AU/BU.
Applicable only when DFS
option is on. Displays the
current channels defined in
the sub-band and their radar
detection status.
Applicable to AU/BU.
An entry in the DFS Radar
Detection Channels Table.
Integer
disable (1)
enable (2)
na (255)
Applicable to AU/BU. Readonly. The index of the entry
in the DFS Radar Detection
Channels Table.
Applicable to AU/BU with
HW revision B and lower
(for units with HW revision C
and higher replaced by *
DFSChannelFrequency
New to support a resolution
of 0.5 MHz). Read-only. The
frequency in MHz of a
channel in the DFS Radar
Detection Channels Table.
Applicable to AU/BU.
The radar detection status
of a channel in the DFS
Radar Detection Channels
Table.
Applicable to AU/BU. Readonly. The frequency of a
channel in the DFS Radar
Detection Channels Table.
(Replaces
*DFSChannelFrequency to
support a resolution of 0.5
MHz for units with HW
revision C and higher).
Applicable to AU/BU.
Defines the minimum
number of pulses to detect
radar.
Channel Reuse Parameters
Integer
*DFSClearRadarChannels
(*DFSParameters 6)
*DFSRadarDetectionChannelsTabl
(*DFSParameters 7)
*DFSRadarDetectionChannelsEntr
(*DFSRadarDetectionChannelsTa
ble 1)
*DFSChannelIdx
(*DFSRadarDetectionChannelsEnt
ry 1)
*DFSChannelFrequency
(*DFSRadarDetectionChannelsEnt
ry 2)
*DFSChannelRadarStatus
(*DFSRadarDetectionChannelsEnt
ry 3)
*DFSChannelFrequencyNew
(*DFSRadarDetectionChannelsEnt
ry 4)
*DFSMinimumPulsesToDetect
(*DFSParameters 8)
*DFSChannelReuseParameters
(*DFSParameters 9)
Integer
cancel (1)
clearRadarChannels (2)
na (255)
Integer
Integer
radarFree (1)
adjacentToRadar (2)
radarDetected (3)
DisplayString
Integer
1 - 100
BreezeACCESS 4900 System Manual
183
Appendix E - Supported MIBS and Traps
MIB Parameter
Description
Value/Range
*DFSChannelReuseOption
(*DFSChannelReuseParameters
1)
Applicable to AU/BU.
Enabling/disabling the DFS
Channel Reuse Algorithm.
*DFSRadarActivityAssessmentPeri
od
(*DFSChannelReuseParameters
2)
Applicable to AU/BU.
The period in hours for
assessment of radar activity
when the Channel reuse
algorithm is enabled.
Applicable to AU/BU. The
maximum number of radar
detection in the original
channel during the Radar
Activity Assessment Period
that is required for reaching
a decision to try again the
original channel.
Applicable to AU only.
Defines weather the SU
should learn the country
code of the AU.
Applicable to AU/BU. Readonly. The operating
frequency in MHz.
(Replaces
*CurrentAUOperatingFreque
ncy to support a resolution
of 0.5 MHz for units with HW
revision C and higher).
Integer
disable (1)
enable (2)
na (255)
Integer
1 – 12 hours.
*DFSMaximumNumberOfDetection
sInAssessmentPeriod
(*DFSChannelReuseParameters
3)
*CountryCodeLearningBySU
(*FrequencyDefinition 12)
*CurrentAUOperatingFrequencyNe
(*FrequencyDefinition 13)
*AUDefinedFrequencyNew
(*FrequencyDefinition 14)
*ATPC
(*AirInterface 13)
*AtpcOption
(*ATPC 1)
Applicable to AU/BU. Readonly. For 5.8 GHz products
with SW version below 2.0
this is the frequency in MHz
of the AU/BU after the next
reset.
For units with SW version
2.0 and up this is the
frequency in MHz to use
when the DFS Option is
disabled. (Replaces
*AUDefinedFrequency to
support a resolution of 0.5
MHz for units with HW
revision C and higher).
ATPC parameters
Applicable to all units.
Enabling/disabling the
ATPC Algorithm
Integer
1 – 10 detections.
Integer
disable (1)
enable (2)
na (255)
DisplayString
For 5.8 GHz products with
SW version below 2.0 the
range is 5740 to 5830 MHz
using a 10 MHz resolution.
For units with SW version
2.0 and up the range is as
defined in the selected SubBand.
DisplayString
For 5.8 GHz products with
SW version below 2.0 the
range is 5740 to 5830 MHz
using a 10 MHz resolution.
For units with SW version
2.0 and up the range is as
defined in the selected SubBand.
Integer
disable (1)
enable (2)
na (255)
BreezeACCESS 4900 System Manual
184
breezeAccessVLMib
MIB Parameter
Description
Value/Range
*DeltaFromMinSNRLevel
(*ATPC 2)
Applicable to AU/BU. The
Minimum SNR Level plus
the value of this parameter
define the maximum desired
level of the average SNR at
the AU/BU. If the ATPC
Option is enabled, than if
the received SNR is above
the maximum desired level,
the AU/BU will transmit
Power-Down messages to
the applicable SU/RB.
Applicable to AU/BU.
Defines the minimum
desired level in dB of the
average SNR at the AU/BU.
Below this level, if ATPC
Option is enabled, the
AU/BU will transmit ATPC
Power-Up messages to the
applicable SU/RB.
Applicable to AU/BU. The
minimal time between
consecutive powerup/power-down messages.
Applicable to AU/BU. The
step in dB that the SU/RB
will use when receiving an
ATPC Power-Up/PowerDown message
Cell distance Parameters
Integer
4-20 (dB)
Applicable AU/BU. The
selected mode of deciding
on Cell Distance.
Integer
automatic (1)
manual (2)
na (255)
Integer
Range: 0 to 100 (Percent). A
value of 0 means the
minimal slot size (9
microseconds).
Na (255)
Integer
Range: 0 to 54 (Kilometers).
1 means “below 2 km”.
MAC Address
*MinimumSNRLevel
(*ATPC 3)
*MinimumIntervalBetweenATPC
Messages
(*ATPC 4)
*PowerLevelSteps
(*ATPC 6)
*CellDistanceParameters
(*AirInterface 15)
*CellDistanceMode
(*CellDistanceParameters 1)
*FairnessFactor
(*CellDistanceParameters 2)
*MeasuredMaxCellDistance
(*CellDistanceParameters 3)
*UnitWithMaxDistance
(*CellDistanceParameters 4)
*ScanningMode
(*AirInterface 16)
Applicable AU/BU. Not
applicable to BreezeNET B
products. The percentage of
the maximum distance that
is taken into account in the
time slot calculation.
Applicable AU/BU. The
Maximum Cell Distance as
calculated by the AU/BU.
Applicable AU only. Not
applicable to BreezeNET B
units. The MAC address of
the unit with the maximum
distance from the AU.
Applicable to SU/RB. The
scanning mode. In cells
where the DFS Option is
enabled Scanning Mode is
forced to Passive.
Integer
4-60 (dB)
Integer
Range: 1 to 3600 (seconds)
Integer
1-20 (dB)
Integer
passive (1)
active (2)
BreezeACCESS 4900 System Manual
185
Appendix E - Supported MIBS and Traps
MIB Parameter
Description
Value/Range
*Antenna Gain
(*AirInterface 17)
Applicable to all units. Readwrite in units where
*AntennaGainChange is
supported. Read-only in
units where
*AntennaGainChange is not
supported. The net gain
(including cable attenuation
for detached antennas) of
the antenna.
Spectrum Analysis
Parameters.
Applicable to all units. The
period in seconds of staying
on each channel for
information gathering during
each cycle when performing
Spectrum analysis.
Integer
0-50 (dB)
-1 (not configurable) means
“Not Set Yet”.
-2 (not configurable) means
“Don’t Care”.
Applicable to all units. The
number of scanning cycles
when performing Spectrum
Analysis.
Applicable to AU/BU.
Defines weather the AU/BU
shall choose the most noise
free channel upon startup
after spectrum analysis.
Applicable to all units.
Activates the spectrum
analysis. The unit is
automatically reset upon
activation.
Applicable to all units. Readonly. Indicates whether the
unit is currently performing a
spectrum analysis process.
Applicable to all units.
Resets the spectrum
analysis counters.
Applicable to all units. Not
accessible. The spectrum
analysis information table.
Applicable to all units. Not
accessible. An entry in the
spectrum analysis
information table.
Applicable to all units. Readonly. A table index for a
Spectrum Analysis
Information Entry in the
Spectrum Analysis
Information Table.
Applicable to all units. Readonly. The channel’s
frequency of the relevant
entry in the Spectrum
Analysis Information Table.
Integer
Range: 1-100 seconds.
*SpectrumAnalysisParameters
(*AirInterface 18)
*SpectrumAnalysisChannelScanP
eriod
(*SpectrumAnalysisParameters 1)
*SpectrumAnalysisChannelScanC
ycles
(*SpectrumAnalysisParameters 2)
*AutomaticChannelSelection
(*SpectrumAnalysisParameters 3)
*SpectrumAnalysisActivation
(*SpectrumAnalysisParameters 4)
*SpectrumAnalysisStatus
(*SpectrumAnalysisParameters 5)
*ResetSpectrumCounters
(*SpectrumAnalysisParameters 6)
*SpectrumAnalysisInformationTabl
(*SpectrumAnalysisParameters 7)
*SpectrumAnalysisInformationEntr
(*SpectrumAnalysisInformationTab
le 1)
*SpectrumAnalysisInformationTabl
eIdx
(*SpectrumAnalysisInformationEntr
y 1)
*SpectrumAnalysisInformationCha
nnel
(*SpectrumAnalysisInformationEntr
y 2)
Integer
Range: 2-30 seconds.
Integer
disable (1),
enable (2),
na (255)
Integer
cancelOperation (1),
activateNow (2)
Integer
inactive (1),
currentlyActive (2)
Integer
cancelOperation (1),
resetCounters (2)
DisplayString
BreezeACCESS 4900 System Manual
186
breezeAccessVLMib
MIB Parameter
Description
Value/Range
*SpectrumAnalysisInformationSign
alCount
(*SpectrumAnalysisInformationEntr
y 3)
*SpectrumAnalysisInformationSign
alSNR
(*SpectrumAnalysisInformationEntr
y 4)
Applicable to all units. Readonly. The number of signals
(excluding OFDM frames)
detected in the channel.
Applicable to all units. Readonly. The approximate SNR
of the signals (excluding
OFDM frames) detected in
the relevant channel.
Applicable to all units. Readonly. The average width in
microseconds of the signals
(excluding OFDM frames)
detected in the relevant
channel.
Applicable to all units. Readonly. The number of OFDM
frames received in the
relevant channel.
Applicable to AU only. Not
applicable to BreezeNET B
products. Shows the limit for
the number of SUs that can
be associated with the AU.
Integer
*SpectrumAnalysisInformationSign
alWidth
(*SpectrumAnalysisInformationEntr
y 5)
*SpectrumAnalysisInformationOFD
MFrames
(*SpectrumAnalysisInformationEntr
y 6)
* MaxNumOfAssociationsLimit
(*AirInterface 19)
*Disassociate
(*AirInterface 20)
*DisassociateAllSUs
(*Disassociate 1)
Disassociation parameters.
*DisassociateSuByMacAddress
(*Disassociate 2)
*TxControl
(*AirInterface 21)
Applicable to AU.
Disassociate specified SU.
Applicable to AU/BU.
Enables to turn the
transmitter Off and On. The
unit is reset automatically
upon configuration.
Applicable to AU/BU.
The number of unsuccessful
consecutive transmissions
of beacons before internal
refresh is performed.
*LostBeaconsWatchdogThreshold
(*AirInterface 22)
Applicable to AU.
Disassociate ass SUs.
Integer
Integer
Integer
Integer
AU-BS, AU-SA: If Data
Encryption is enabled, the
upper limit is 124. Otherwise
it is 512.
AUS-BS, AUS-SA: 5
BreezeNET B products
return 65535.
Integer
cancelOperation (1),
disassociateAllSUs (2)
MacAddress
Integer
on(1)
off (2)
Integer
Range: 100..1000 or ‘0’
A value of ‘0’ means that the
lost beacons watchdog is not
used and internal refresh is
not performed
BreezeACCESS 4900 System Manual
187
Appendix E - Supported MIBS and Traps
E.2.7
Service Parameters
MIB Parameter
Description
*ServiceParameters
(breezeAccessVLMib 7)
*MirDownlink
(*ServiceParameters 2)
Applicable to all units.
Service parameters.
Applicable to SU/RB. The
Maximum Information Rate
(MIR) from AU/BU to
SU/RB. MIR must be above
brzaccVLCirDownlink value.
Value/Range
*MirUplink
(*ServiceParameters 3)
Applicable to SU/RB. The
Maximum Information Rate
(MIR) from SU/RB to
AU/BU. MIR must be above
brzaccVLCirUplink value.
*CirDownlink
(*ServiceParameters 4)
Applicable to SU only. Not
applicable to BreezeNET B
products. The Committed
Information Rate (CIR) from
AU to SU.
CIR must be below
brzaccVLMirDownlink value.
*CirUplink
(*ServiceParameters 5)
Applicable to SU only. Not
applicable to BreezeNET B
products. The Committed
Information Rate (CIR) from
SU to AU.
CIR must be below
brzaccVLMirUplink value.
*MaxDelay
(*ServiceParameters 6)
Applicable to SU only. Not
applicable to BreezeNET B
products. The maximal time
packets may be delayed by
the CIR\MIR mechanism.
Above the configured
maximal period the packets
are discarded.
Integer
Range for Set:
SU-3: 128 – 2,048 (Kbps)
SU-6: 128 – 3,968 (Kbps)
SU-54: 128 – 53,888 (Kbps)
RB-14: 128 – 6,912 (Kbps)
RB-28:128 – 22,016 (Kbps)
The actual value (Get) will be
the entered value rounded to
the nearest multiple of 128
(N*128)
Integer
Range for Set:
SU-3: 128 – 2,048 (Kbps)
SU-6: 128 – 3,968 (Kbps)
SU-54: 128 – 53,888 (Kbps)
RB-14: 128 – 6,912 (Kbps)
RB-28: 128 – 22,016 (Kbps)
The actual value (Get) will be
the entered value rounded to
the nearest multiple of 128
(N*128)
Integer
Range for Set:
SU-3: 0 – 2,048 (Kbps)
SU-6: 0 – 3,968 (Kbps)
SU-54: 0 – 45,056 (Kbps)
The actual value (Get) will be
the entered value rounded to
the nearest multiple of 128
(N*128).
BreezeNET B products will
return 65535 for na.
Integer
Integer
Range for Set:
SU-3: 0 – 2,048 (Kbps)
SU-6: 0 – 3,968 (Kbps)
SU-54: 0 – 45,056 (Kbps)
The actual value (Get) will be
the entered value rounded to
the nearest multiple of 128
(N*128).
BreezeNET B products will
return 65535 for na.
Integer
Range: 300 - 10000
(milliseconds)
BreezeNET B products will
return 65535 for na.
BreezeACCESS 4900 System Manual
188
breezeAccessVLMib
MIB Parameter
Description
Value/Range
*MaxBurstDuration
(*ServiceParameters 7)
Applicable to AU and SU.
Not applicable to
BreezeNET B products.
The maximum time during
which inactivity bonus time
can be accumulated for
future burst transmissions.
Integer
Range: 0 – 2000
(milliseconds)
BreezeNET B products will
return 65535 for na.
*GracefulDegradationLimit
(*ServiceParameters 8)
Applicable to AU only. Not
applicable to BreezeNET B
products. The maximum
limit for activating the
graceful degradation
algorithm.
Applicable only to AU. Not
applicable to BreezeNET B
products. When enabled, it
overrides the CIR/MIR
algorithm for determining
actual information rate and
forces the algorithm to
operate with MIR
parameters’ settings only.
When enabled, the Graceful
Degradation algorithm is
disabled.
Traffic Prioritization
parameters. Applicable to all
units.
VLAN Prioritization
parameters. Applicable to all
units.
Applicable to all units. If the
VLAN Priority's value of the
frame is less than or equal
to this threshold, the frame
will get Low priority,
otherwise the frame will get
High priority. Untagged
frames will get Low priority.
ToS Prioritization
parameters. Applicable to all
units.
Integer
Range: 0 – 70 (%)
na (255)
*MirOnlyOption
(*ServiceParameters 9)
*TrafficPrioritization
(*ServiceParameters 10)
*VLTrafficPriVLAN
(*TrafficPrioritization 1)
*LANPriorityThreshold
(*VLTrafficPriVLAN 1)
*TrafficPriIPToS
(*TrafficPrioritization 2)
Integer
disable (1)
enable (2)
na (255)
Integer
0-7
BreezeACCESS 4900 System Manual
189
Appendix E - Supported MIBS and Traps
MIB Parameter
Description
Value/Range
*ToSPrioritizationOption
(*TrafficPriIPToS 1)
Applicable to all units.
Disable/Enable IP ToS
prioritization and chooses
the interpretation of the IP
ToS field from IP header:
ipPrecedence(2): The IP
ToS field is defined by
RFC791. In this case the
prioritization will be done
using the Precedence subfield of IP ToS. This subfield has 3 bits, so it can be
between 0 and 7.
dSCP(3): The IP ToS field is
defined by RFC2474. In this
case the prioritization will be
done using the DSCP subfield. The size of the subfield is 6 bits, so the range is
0 to 63.
Applicable to all units. The
threshold of Precedence
sub-field of IP ToS field from
IP Header (RFC791) to be
used when the ToS
Prioritization Option is set to
IP Precedence. If the
Precedence sub-field of a
frame is less than or equal
to this threshold the frame
will have Low priority,
otherwise it will get High
priority.
Applicable to all units. The
threshold of DSCP sub-field
of IP ToS field from IP
Header (RFC2474) to be
used when ToS
Prioritization Option is set to
DSCP. If the DSCP sub-field
of a frame is less than or
equal to this threshold the
frame will have Low priority,
otherwise it will get High
priority.
UDP/TCP Port Ranges
Prioritization parameters.
Applicable to all units.
Applicable to all units.
Disable/Enable Prioritization
using UDP and/or TCP Port
Ranges.
udpOnly(2): prioritization will
be done only for UDP
packets
tcpOnly(3): prioritization will
be done only for TCP
packets
udpANDtcp(4): prioritization
will be done for UDP and
TCP packets
Integer
disable(1),
ipPrecedence(2),
dSCP(3)
*IPPrecedenceThreshold
(*TrafficPriIPToS 2)
*IPDSCPThreshold
(*TrafficPriIPToS 3)
*TrafficPriUdpTcpPortRange
(*TrafficPrioritization 3)
*UdpTcpPortRangePrioritizationOp
tion
(*TrafficPriUdpTcpPortRange 1)
Integer
0-7
Integer
0-63
Integer
disable(1),
udpOnly(2),
tcpOnly(3),
udpANDtcp(4)
BreezeACCESS 4900 System Manual
190
breezeAccessVLMib
MIB Parameter
Description
*UdpPortRangeConfig
(*TrafficPriUdpTcpPortRange 2)
UDP Port Range
parameters. Applicable to all
units.
Applicable to all units.
RTP/RTCP ports
prioritization option for UDP
packet.
rtpANDrtcp(1): the possible
RTP and RTCP packet with
destination port in the
defined port ranges will get
High priority.
rtpOnly(2): only possible
RTP packet (packet with
even destination port) with
destination port in the
defined port ranges will get
High priority.
Applicable to all units. Readonly. The number of entries
in the UDP Port Range
Table.
Applicable to all units. Not
accessible. A table of UDP
port ranges used for
prioritization. The user can
define up to 64 ranges. An
entry is empty if start is
65535 and end is 0.
Applicable to all units. Not
accessible. A UDP Port
Ranges Table entry.
Applicable to all units. Readonly. Start port of an UDP
Port Range
Applicable to all units. Readonly. End port of an UDP
Port Range
Applicable to all units. Readonly. Index of an UDP Port
Range entry
Applicable to all units. Add
port range(s) to UDP Port
Ranges Table.
Get operation will return an
empty string.
*UdpPortPriRTPRTCP
(*UdpPortRangeConfig 1)
*UdpPortRangeNum
(*UdpPortRangeConfig 2)
*UdpPortRangeTable
(*UdpPortRangeConfig 3)
*UdpPortRangeEntry
(*UdpPortRangeTable 1)
*UdpPortRangeStart
(*UdpPortRangeEntry 1)
*UdpPortRangeEnd
(*UdpPortRangeEntry 2)
*UdpPortRangeIdx
(*UdpPortRangeEntry 3)
*UdpPortRangeAdd
(*UdpPortRangeConfig 4)
Value/Range
Integer
rtpANDrtcp(1),
rtpOnly(2)
Integer
Integer
0-65535
Integer
0-65535
Integer
1-64
DisplayString
A range is defined by
- or ,
where  is the Start
Port of the range and 
is the End Port. If only
 is specified the range
is -. The value
of  and  are
between 0 and 65535.
The user can add several
ranges using a comma to
separate between ranges.
Example: 10-26,99,987-900.
BreezeACCESS 4900 System Manual
191
Appendix E - Supported MIBS and Traps
MIB Parameter
Description
Value/Range
*UdpPortRangeDelete
(*UdpPortRangeConfig 5)
Applicable to all units.
Delete port range(s) from
UDP Port Ranges Table.
Get operation will return an
empty string.
*UdpPortRangeDeleteAll
(*UdpPortRangeConfig 6)
Applicable to all units.
Delete all entries form UDP
Port Ranges Table. Get
operation will return 1
UDP Port Range
parameters. Applicable to all
units.
Applicable to all units.
RTP/RTCP ports
prioritization option for TCP
packets.
rtpANDrtcp(1): the possible
RTP and RTCP packet with
destination port in the
defined port ranges will get
High priority.
rtpOnly(2): only possible
RTP packet (packet with
even destination port) with
destination port in the
defined port ranges will get
High priority.
Applicable to all units. Readonly. The number of entries
in the TCP Port Range
Table.
Applicable to all units. Not
accessible. A table of TCP
port ranges used for
prioritization. The user can
define up to 64 ranges. An
entry is empty if start is
65535 and end is 0.
Applicable to all units. Not
accessible. A TCP Port
Ranges Table entry.
Applicable to all units. Readonly. Start port of an TCP
Port Range
Applicable to all units. Readonly. End port of an TCP
Port Range
Applicable to all units. Readonly. Index of an TCP Port
Range entry
DisplayString
A range is defined by
- or ,
where  is the Start
Port of the range and 
is the End Port. If only
 is specified the range
is -. The value
of  and  are
between 0 and 65535.
The user can delete several
ranges using a comma to
separate between ranges.
Example: 10-26,99,987-900.
Integer
deleteAll(1),
cancelOperation (2)
*TcpPortRangeConfig
(*TrafficPriUdpTcpPortRange 3)
*TcpPortPriRTPRTCP
(*TcpPortRangeConfig 1)
*TcpPortRangeNum
(*TcpPortRangeConfig 2)
*TcpPortRangeTable
(*TcpPortRangeConfig 3)
*TcpPortRangeEntry
(*TcpPortRangeTable 1)
*TcpPortRangeStart
(*TcpPortRangeEntry 1)
*TcpPortRangeEnd
(*TcpPortRangeEntry 2)
*TcpPortRangeIdx
(*TcpPortRangeEntry 3)
Integer
rtpANDrtcp(1),
rtpOnly(2)
Integer
Integer
0-65535
Integer
0-65535
Integer
1-64
BreezeACCESS 4900 System Manual
192
breezeAccessVLMib
MIB Parameter
Description
Value/Range
*TcpPortRangeAdd
(*TcpPortRangeConfig 4)
Applicable to all units. Add
port range(s) to TCP Port
Ranges Table.
Get operation will return an
empty string.
*TcpPortRangeDelete
(*TcpPortRangeConfig 5)
Applicable to all units.
Delete port range(s) from
TCP Port Ranges Table.
Get operation will return an
empty string.
*TcpPortRangeDeleteAll
(*TcpPortRangeConfig 6)
Applicable to all units.
Delete all entries form TCP
Port Ranges Table. Get
operation will return 1
DisplayString
A range is defined by
- or ,
where  is the Start
Port of the range and 
is the End Port. If only
 is specified the range
is -. The value
of  and  are
between 0 and 65535.
The user can add several
ranges using a comma to
separate between ranges.
Example: 10-26,99,987-900.
DisplayString
A range is defined by
- or ,
where  is the Start
Port of the range and 
is the End Port. If only
 is specified the range
is -. The value
of  and  are
between 0 and 65535.
The user can delete several
ranges using a comma to
separate between ranges.
Example: 10-26,99,987-900.
Integer
deleteAll(1),
cancelOperation (2)
E.2.8
User Filtering Parameters
MIB Parameter
Description
*UserFilterParams
(breezeAccessVLMib 8)
*UserFilterOption
(*UserFilterParams 1)
Applicable to SU/RB. User
filtering parameters.
Applicable to SU/RB.
Defines user-filtering
options.
disable: No filtering.
iPOnly: Only IP protocol
packets pass.
userDefinedAddrOnly: Only
IP frames from/to user
defined IP addresses pass.
pPPoE Only: Only PPPoE
frames pass.
Applicable to SU/RB. A
table of up to 8 user defined
addresses, or address
groups, to be used if the
User Filtering Option
(*UserFilterOption) is
userDefinedAddrOnly. Not
accessible.
*IpFilterTable
(*UserFilterParams 2)
Value/Range
Integer
disable (1)
ipOnly (2)
userDefinedAddrOnly (3)
pPPoEOnly (4)
na (255)
BreezeACCESS 4900 System Manual
193
Appendix E - Supported MIBS and Traps
MIB Parameter
Description
*IpFilterEntry
(*IpFilterTable 1)
Applicable to SU/RB. An IP
Filter table entry. Not
accessible.
Applicable to SU/RB. An IP
address in the IP Filter
table.
Applicable to SU/RB. An IP
mask for the IP Filter entry.
Either a mask or a range,
but not both can be used to
define an address group. If
the range is other than 0,
than the mask is ignored
and only the range value is
used to define the address
group.
Applicable to SU/RB. An
address range for the IP
Filter entry. The first
address in the range is the
IP address (*iPID). O means
that the range is not used.
Either a mask or a range,
but not both can be used to
define an address group. If
the range is other than 0,
than the mask is ignored
and only the range value is
used to define the address
group.
Applicable to SU/RB.
Read-only. A table index for
the IP Filter entry.
Applicable to SU/RB.
Deletes a single selected
entry from the IP Filter table.
*IpID
(*IpFilterEntry 1)
*MaskID
(*IpFilterEntry 2)
*IpFilterRange
(*IpFilterEntry 3)
*IpFilterIdx
(*IpFilterEntry 4)
*DeleteOneUserFilter
(*UserFilterParams 3)
*DeleteAllUserFilters
(*UserFilterParams 4)
Applicable to SU/RB.
Deletes all entries from the
IP Filter table.
*DHCPUnicastOverrideFilter
(*UserFilterParams 5)
Applicable to SU/RB.
Enables or disables the
unicast DHCP messages,
overriding the IP Filtering
option.
Value/Range
IP Address
IP Address
Integer
0 - 255
Integer
1-8
Integer
deletefirstEntry (1)
deletesecondEntry (2)
deletethirdEntry (3)
deletefourthEntry (4)
deletefifthEntry (5)
deletesixthEntry (6)
deleteseventhEntry (7)
deleteeighthEntry (8)
cancelOperation (9)
na (255)
Integer
deleteAll (1)
cancelOperation (2)
na (255)
Integer
disable (1)
enable(2)
na (255)
BreezeACCESS 4900 System Manual
194
breezeAccessVLMib
E.2.9
Security Parameters
MIB Parameter
*SecurityParams
(breezeAccessVLMib 9)
*AuthenticationAlgorithm
(*SecurityParameters 1)
*DefaultKey
(*SecurityParameters 2)
*DataEncryptionOption
(*SecurityParameters 3)
*DefaultMulticastKey
(*SecurityParameters 4)
*SecurityMode
(*SecurityParameters 5)
*PromiscuousAuthenticationMode
(*SecurityParameters 6)
*Key1
(*SecurityParameters 7)
*Key2
(*SecurityParameters 8)
*Key3
(*SecurityParameters 9)
*Key4
(*SecurityParameters 10)
Description
Value/Range
Applicable to all units.
Enables/disables the
authentication encryption
option.
openSystem: Authentication
messages are not encrypted.
sharedKey : Authentication
messages are encrypted.
Applicable to SU/RB. The ID
of the key to be used for
encrypting/decrypting the
authentication messages.
Applicable to all units.
Enables/disables the data
encryption option.
Applicable to AU/RB. The ID
of the key to be used for
encrypting/decrypting
multicasts.
Applicable to all units. The
encryption algorithm to be
used for authentication
messages and/or data
encryption
Applicable to AU/RB.
Enabling/disabling the
promiscuous mode, where
any SU can be authenticated
by and communicate with the
AU.
Applicable to all units. Key
number 1. Accessible only
with SNMP Write Community
String (administrator
password).
Applicable to all units. Key
number 2. Accessible only
with SNMP Write Community
String (administrator
password).
Applicable to all units. Key
number 3. Accessible only
with SNMP Write Community
String (administrator
password).
Applicable to all units. Key
number 4. Accessible only
with SNMP Write Community
String (administrator
password).
Integer
openSystem (1)
sharedKey (2)
Integer
Range: 1 to 4.
Integer
disable (1)
enable (2)
Integer
Range: 1 to 4.
Integer
wep (1)
aesOCB (2)
aesCCM (3)
Integer
disable (1)
enable (2)
DisplayString
32 hexadecimal digits
DisplayString
32 hexadecimal digits
DisplayString
32 hexadecimal digits
DisplayString
32 hexadecimal digits
BreezeACCESS 4900 System Manual
195
Appendix E - Supported MIBS and Traps
MIB Parameter
Description
Value/Range
*SecurityModeSupport
(SecurityParameters 12)
Applicable to all units. Returns
types of encryption that are
supported
Integer (0..7)
No encryption (0)
WEP (1)
AES/OCB (2)
WEP + AES/OCB (3)
AES/CCM (4)
WEP + AES/CCM (5)
AES/OCB + AES/CCM (6)
WEP + AES/OCB
+AES/CCM (7)
E.2.10 Performance Parameters
MIB Parameter
*PerformanceParams
(breezeAccessVLMib 10)
*RTSThreshold
(*PerformanceParams 1)
*MinContentionWindow
(*PerformanceParams 3)
*MaxContentionWindow
(*PerformanceParams 4)
*MaximumModulationLevel
(*PerformanceParams 5)
Description
Value/Range
Applicable to SU and AU. Not
applicable to BreezeNET B
products. The minimum frame
size that requires an RTS/CTS
handshake.
Integer
20-4032 (bytes)
(20-1600 for
units running SW
version below
3.0, 20-3400 for
units with SW
version 3.0)
na (65535)
Integer
0, 7, 15, 31, 63,
127, 255, 511,
1023.
na (65535)
Applicable to SU and AU. Not
applicable to BreezeNET B
products. The initial value to be
used by the contention window
calculation algorithm. A value of
0 disables the back-off
algorithm and should be used
only in point-to-point
applications.
Applicable to SU and AU. Not
applicable to BreezeNET B
products. The maximum value
to be used by the contention
window calculation algorithm.
Applicable to all units. If the
Adaptive Modulation algorithm
is enabled, it sets the maximum
modulation level to be used. If
The Adaptive Modulation
algorithm is disabled, it set the
fixed modulation level to be
used.
Integer
7, 15, 31, 63,
127, 255, 511,
1023
na (65535)
Integer
Range: 1 to 8*
*Range depends
on HW version
and Min/Max
Modulation
Levels as
defined by SubBand.
BreezeACCESS 4900 System Manual
196
breezeAccessVLMib
MIB Parameter
Description
Value/Range
*MulticastModulationLevel
(*PerformanceParams 6)
Applicable to AU/BU. The
modulation level for multicast
and broadcast data frames.
Integer
Range: 1 to 8*
*AvgSNRMemoryFactor
(*PerformanceParams 7)
*HardwareRetries
(*PerformanceParams 8)
*AdaptiveModulationParams
(*PerformanceParams 9)
*AdaptiveModulationAlgorithmOption
(*AdaptiveModulationParams 1)
*SoftwareRetrySupport
(*AdaptiveModulationParams 2)
*NumberOfSoftwareRetries
(*AdaptiveModulationParams 3)
*MinimumIntervalBetweenAdaptiveModulation
AlgorithmMessages
(*AdaptiveModulationParams 4)
*AdaptiveModulationDecisionThresholds
(*AdaptiveModulationParams 5)
*BurstMode
(*PerformanceParams 10)
Applicable to all units. The
weight of history in average
RSSI calculation for the ATPC
(AU only) and Adaptive
Modulation algorithm. The
higher is the value, the higher is
the weight of history
Applicable to all units. The
maximum number of trials to
transmit an unacknowledged
frame in each Hardware
Retrials phase.
Adaptive Modulation
Parameters
Applicable to all units.
Enabling/disabling the Adaptive
Modulation algorithm.
Applicable to all units.
Read-only for units with version
2.0. Not applicable for units with
SW version 3.0 and higher. The
status of the Software Retry
mechanism.
Enabled when the Adaptive
Modulation algorithm is enabled
and the Burst Mode Option is
disabled. Otherwise it is
disabled.
Applicable to all units.
Read-only for units with version
2.0. Not applicable for units with
SW version 3.0 and higher. The
maximum number of times to
use the Software Retry
mechanism when it is enabled.
Applicable to all units. The
minimum interval between two
consecutive adaptive
modulation algorithm messages
carrying information on the
SNR of received signals.
Applicable to all units. Defines
the setting of thresholds for the
rate decision algorithm. high (2)
should typically be used when
the SNR is lower than 13 dB.
Burst Mode Parameters.
Applicable to all units.
*Range depends
on HW version
and Min/Max
Modulation
Levels as
defined by SubBand.
DisplayString
-1 (Disregard
History) to 32
Integer
1-15
Integer
disable (1)
enable (2)
Integer
disable (1)
enable (2)
na (255)
Integer
0-14
Integer
1-3600
(seconds)
Integer
normal (1)
high (2)
na (255)
BreezeACCESS 4900 System Manual
197
Appendix E - Supported MIBS and Traps
MIB Parameter
Description
Value/Range
*BurstModeOption
(*BurstMode 1)
Applicable to all units.
Applicable only if Burst Mode
Option is supported by the SubBand. Enabling/disabling burst
mode operation. blocked (3)
value is returned when trying to
enable Burst Mode when it
should not be used due to the
configuration of certain other
parameters. These limitations
depend on HW revision and
unit type.
Applicable to all units. The burst
interval in milliseconds.
Integer
disable (1)
enable (2)
blocked (3)
na (255)
*BurstInterval
(*BurstMode 2)
*ConcatenationParameters
(*PerformanceParams 11)
*ConcatenationOption
(*ConcatenationParameters 1)
Concatenation Parameters.
Applicable to all units.
Applicable to all units.
Enabling/disabling the
concatenation mechanism.
*ConcatenationMaximumNumberOfFrames
(*ConcatenationParameters 2)
Applicable to all units.
Defines the maximum number
of data frames that can be
concatenated.
Integer
1-the maximum
value as defined
in the Sub-Band.
(milliseconds)
na (255)
Integer
disable (1)
enable (2)
na (255)
Integer
2–8
E.2.11 Site Survey Parameters
MIB Parameter
*SiteSurvey
(breezeAccessVLMib 11)
*AverageReceiveSNR
(*SiteSurvey 1)
*TrafficStatistics
(*SiteSurvey 2)
*ResetTrafficCounters
(*TrafficStatistics 1)
*EthCounters
(*TrafficStatistics 2)
*TotalRxFramesViaEthernet
(*EthCounters 1)
*TxWirelessToEthernet
(*EthCounters 2)
*WirelessLinkCounters
(*TrafficStatistics 3)
*TxFramesToWireless
(*WirelessLinkCounters 1)
Description
Value/Range
Applicable to SU/RB. Readonly. The average Signal to
Noise Ratio of received frames.
Applicable to all units. Traffic
statistics parameters.
Applicable to all units. Resets
the traffic counters.
Integer
Applicable to all units. Ethernet
counters.
Applicable to all units.
Read-only. Total number of
frames received via the
Ethernet port.
Applicable to all units.
Read-only. Total number of
frames transmitted to the
Ethernet port.
Applicable to all units. Wireless
link counters.
Transmitted frames counters
Integer
reset (1)
cancel (2)
Counter 32
Counter 32
BreezeACCESS 4900 System Manual
198
breezeAccessVLMib
MIB Parameter
Description
Value/Range
*AUBeaconsToWireless
(*TxFramesToWireless 1)
Applicable to AU/BU. Readonly. The number of Beacon
frames transmitted to the
wireless medium.
Applicable to AU/BU.
Read-only. The number of data
and other management frames
(excluding beacons)
transmitted to the wireless
medium. The count includes
multicasts/broadcasts and one
count for each unicast frame
transmitted successfully
(excluding retransmissions).
Applicable to all units.
Read-only. The number of
frames transmitted to the
wireless medium. The count
includes one count for each
data frame transmitted
successfully (excluding
retransmissions), and the
number of transmitted control
and wireless management
frames.
Applicable to AU. Not
applicable to BreezeNET B
products. Read-only. The total
number of unicast frames
successfully transmitted to the
wireless medium, excluding
retransmissions.
Applicable to all units Readonly. The total number of
double concatenated frames
that were successfully
transmitted to the wireless
medium, excluding
retransmissions.
Applicable to all units Readonly. The total number of single
concatenated frames that were
successfully transmitted to the
wireless medium, excluding
retransmissions.
Applicable to all units Readonly. The total number of
concatenated frames with more
than two data frames that were
successfully transmitted to the
wireless medium, excluding
retransmissions.
Counter 32
*DataAndOtherMngFramesToWireless
(*TxFramesToWireless 3)
*TotalTxFramesToWireless
(*TxFramesToWireless 4)
*TotalTransmitted Unicasts
(*TxFramesToWireless 5)
*TotalTransmittedConcatenatedFramesDouble
(*TxFramesToWireless 6)
*TotalTransmittedConcatenatedFramesSingle
(*TxFramesToWireless 7)
*TotalTransmittedConcatenatedFramesMore
(*TxFramesToWireless 8)
Counter 32
Counter 32
Counter 32
Counter 32
Counter 32
Counter 32
BreezeACCESS 4900 System Manual
199
Appendix E - Supported MIBS and Traps
MIB Parameter
Description
Value/Range
*TotalRxFramesFromWireless
(*WirelessLinkCounters 2)
Applicable to all units.
Read-only. The total number of
frames received from the
wireless medium. The count
includes data and control and
wireless management frames,
including beacons received
from the AU. The count does
not include frames discarded
internally, bad frames and
duplicate frames.
Applicable to all units.
Read-only. The total number of
retransmissions of data frames
(counts all unsuccessful
transmissions/retransmissions).
Applicable to all units.
Read-only. The number of
dropped frames. The frames
retransmitted to the maximum
allowed number of
retransmissions without being
acknowledged.
Submitted frames counters
Counter 32
Applicable to all units.
Read-only. The number of data
frames submitted to the
internal bridge via the high
priority queue for transmission
to the wireless medium.
Applicable to all units.
Read-only. The number of data
frames submitted to the
internal bridge via the mid
priority queue for transmission
to the wireless medium.
Applicable to all units.
Read-only. The number of data
frames submitted to the
internal bridge via the low
priority queue for transmission
to the wireless medium.
Applicable to all units.
Read-only. The total number of
data frames submitted to the
internal bridge for transmission
to the wireless medium.
Applicable to all units.
Read-only. The total number of
data frames received from the
wireless medium, including
duplicate frames.
Applicable to all units.
Read-only. The number of
frames received from the
wireless medium with errors
(CRC errors).
Counter 32
*TotalRetransmittedFrames
(*WirelessLinkCounters 3)
*FramesDropped
(*WirelessLinkCounters 4)
*DataFramesSubmittedToBridge
(*WirelessLinkCounters 5)
*DataFramesSubmittedViaHighQueue
(*DataFramesSubmittedToBridge 1)
*DataFramesSubmittedViaMidQueue
(*DataFramesSubmittedToBridge 2)
*DataFramesSubmittedViaLowQueue
(*DataFramesSubmittedToBridge 3)
*TotalNoOfDataFramesSubmitted
(*DataFramesSubmittedToBridge 4)
*TotalRecievedDataFrames
(*WirelessLinkCounters 6)
*RecievedBadFrames
(*WirelessLinkCounters 7)
Counter 32
Counter 32
Counter 32
Counter 32
Counter 32
Counter 32
Counter 32
BreezeACCESS 4900 System Manual
200
breezeAccessVLMib
MIB Parameter
Description
Value/Range
*NoOfDuplicateFramesDiscarded
(*WirelessLinkCounters 8)
Applicable to all units.
Read-only. The number of
frames discarded due to
receiving multiple copies.
Applicable to all units.
Read-only. The number of data
frames received from the
Ethernet port that were
discarded by the MIR/CIR
mechanism to avoid exceeding
the maximum allowed
information rate
Applicable to all units Readonly. The total number of
double concatenated frames
that were received from the
wireless medium, including
duplicate frames.
Applicable to all units Readonly. The total number of single
concatenated frames that were
received from the wireless
medium, including duplicate
frames.
Applicable to all units Readonly. The total number of
concatenated frames with more
than two data frames that were
received from the wireless
medium, including duplicate
frames.
Applicable to all units. Wireless
link event counters.
Applicable to all units.
Read-only. Tx event counters.
Applicable to all units. The
number frames that were
dropped because they were
retransmitted to the maximum
allowed number of
retransmissions without being
acknowledged.
Applicable to all units. Not
applicable for units running SW
version 3.0 and higher. The
number of frames that were
delayed because the SW retry
algorithm was activated on a
previous frame designated for
the same recipient.
Applicable to all units. The
number of frames whose
transmission was aborted
because the rate of submitting
frames for transmission
exceeds the available
transmission capability.
Counter 32
*InternallyDiscardedMirCir
(*WirelessLinkCounters 9)
*TotalRxConcatenatedFramesDouble
(*WirelessLinkCounters 10)
*TotalRxConcatenatedFramesSingle
(*WirelessLinkCounters 11)
*TotalRxConcatenatedFramesMore
(*WirelessLinkCounters 12)
*WirelessLinkEvents
(*TrafficStatistics 4)
*TxEvents
(*WirelessLinkEvents 1)
*DroppedFrameEvents
(*TxEvents 1)
*FramesDelayedDueToSwRetry
(*TxEvents 2)
*Underrun Events
(*TxEvents 3)
Counter 32
Counter 32
Counter 32
Counter 32
Counter 32
Counter 32
Counter 32
BreezeACCESS 4900 System Manual
201
Appendix E - Supported MIBS and Traps
MIB Parameter
Description
Value/Range
*OtherTxEvents
(*TxEvents 4)
Applicable to all units. The
number of Tx events due to
problems other than those
represented by the other Tx
Events counters.
Applicable to all units. The total
number of Tx events.
Applicable to all units.
Read-only. Rx errors counters.
Applicable to all units. Readonly. Applicable only when
DFS is enabled. The number of
unidentified signals.
Applicable to all units. Readonly. The number of frames
received from the wireless
medium containing CRC errors.
Applicable to all units. Readonly. The number of frames
that were discarded because
the receive rate exceeded the
processing capability or the
capacity of the Ethernet port.
Applicable to all units. Readonly. The number of frames
that were not received properly
due to a problem in the data
decryption mechanism.
Applicable to all units. Readonly. The total number of Rx
events.
Per Modulation Level
Counters.
Applicable to all units. Resets
the Per Modulation Level
Counters
Counter 32
*TotalTxEvents
(*TxEvents 5)
*RxEvents
(*WirelessLinkEvents 2)
*PhyErrors
(*RxErrors 1)
*CRCEvents
(*RxEvents 2)
*OverrunEvents
(*RxEvents 3)
*RxDecryptEvents
(*RxEvents 4)
*TotalRxEvents
(*RxEvents 5)
*PerModulationLevelCounters
(*TrafficStatistics 5)
*ResetPerModulationLevelCounters
(*PerModulationLevelCounters 1)
*SUPerModulationLevelCountersTable
(*PerModulationLevelCounters 2)
*SUPerModulationLevelCountersEntry
(*PerModulationLevelCountersTable 1)
*SUPerModulationLevelCountersTableIdx
(*PerModulationLevelCountersEntry 1)
*SUPerModulationLevelCountersApplicable
ModulationLeve
(*PerModulationLevelCountersEntry 2)
*SUPerModulationLevelCountersTxSuccess
(*PerModulationLevelCountersEntry 3)
Applicable to SU/RB. Not
accessible. The Per Modulation
Level Counters Table.
Applicable to SU/RB. Not
accessible. An entry in the Per
Modulation Level Counters
Table.
Applicable to SU/RB. Readonly. The index of an entry in
the Per Modulation Level
Counters Table.
Applicable to SU/RB. Readonly. The modulation level
applicable for the entry in the
Per Modulation Level Counters
Table.
Applicable to SU/RB. Readonly. The total number of
successfully transmitted
unicasts at the applicable
modulation level.
Counter 32
Counter 32
Counter 32
Counter 32
Counter 32
Counter 32
Integer
resetCounters
(1)
cancel (2)
Integer
Range: 1 to 8*
*Level 8 is not
applicable to
devices with HW
revision A
Counter 32
BreezeACCESS 4900 System Manual
202
breezeAccessVLMib
MIB Parameter
Description
Value/Range
*SUPerModulationLevelCountersTxFailed
(*PerModulationLevelCountersEntry 4)
Applicable to SU/RB. Readonly. The total number of
failures to successfully
transmit a unicast frame during
a HW Retry cycle at the
applicable modulation level.
Applicable to SU/RB. Readonly. The average modulation
level for successful
transmission (rounded to
nearest integer) since last reset
of the Per Modulation Level
counters.
MAC Address Database
Counter 32
*AverageModulationLevel
(*PerModulationLevelCounters 3)
*MacAddressDatabase
(*SiteSurvey 5)
*AUMacAddressDatabase
(*MacAddressDatabase 1)
*AdbResetAllCounters
(*AUMacAddressDatabase 1)
*AUAdbTable
(*AUMacAddressDatabase 2)
*AUAdbEntry
(*AUAdbTable 1)
*AdbIndex
(*AUAdbEntry 1)
*AdbMacAddress
(*AUAdbEntry 2)
*AdbStatus
(*AUAdbEntry 3)
*AdbSwVersion
(*AUAdbEntry 4)
*AdbSNR
(*AUAdbEntry 5)
*AdbMaxModulationLevel
(*AUAdbEntry 6)
*AdbTxFramesTotal
(*AUAdbEntry 7)
Integer
1-8.
AU MAC Address Database
Applicable to AU/BU. Resets
all the counters for all SUs in
the MAC Address Database.
Applicable to AU/BU. Not
accessible. The AU MAC
Address Database Table.
Applicable to AU/BU. Not
accessible. An entry in the AU
MAC Address Database Table.
Applicable to AU/BU. Readonly. The Index of an entry in
the AU MAC Address
Database Table.
Applicable to AU/BU. Readonly. The MAC Address of an
SU entry in the AU MAC
Address Database Table.
Applicable to AU/BU. Readonly. The wireless status of the
relevant SU.
Applicable to AU/BU. Readonly. The SW Version of the
relevant SU.
Applicable to AU/BU. Readonly. The average Signal to
Noise Ratio in dB of frames
received by the AU from the
relevant SU.
Applicable to AU/BU. Readonly. The value configured in
the relevant SU for the
Maximum Modulation Level
parameter.
Applicable to AU/BU. Readonly. Counts the total number
of frames (excluding
retransmissions) that were
transmitted by the AU to the
relevant SU.
Integer
reset (1)
noReset (2)
Integer
MAC Address
Integer
associated (1)
authenticated (2)
notAuthenticated
(3)
Display String
Integer
0-60
Integer
Range: 1 to 8*
*Level 8 is not
applicable to
devices with HW
revision A.
Counter 32
BreezeACCESS 4900 System Manual
203
Appendix E - Supported MIBS and Traps
MIB Parameter
Description
Value/Range
*AdbDroppedFramesTotal
(*AUAdbEntry 8)
Applicable to AU/BU. Readonly. Counts the total number
of intended to the relevant SU
that were dropped because
they were retransmitted by the
AU to the extent of the
maximum allowed number of
retransmissions without being
acknowledged.
Applicable to AU/BU. Readonly. Counts the total number
of unicast frames (excluding
retransmissions) that were
successfully transmitted to the
SU over the wireless link using
modulation level 1.
Applicable to AU/BU. Readonly. Counts the total number
of unicast frames (excluding
retransmissions) that were
successfully transmitted to the
SU over the wireless link using
modulation level 2.
Applicable to AU/BU. Readonly. Counts the total number
of unicast frames (excluding
retransmissions) that were
successfully transmitted to the
SU over the wireless link using
modulation level 3.
Applicable to AU/BU. Readonly. Counts the total number
of unicast frames (excluding
retransmissions) that were
successfully transmitted to the
SU over the wireless link using
modulation level 4.
Applicable to AU/BU. Readonly. Counts the total number
of unicast frames (excluding
retransmissions) that were
successfully transmitted to the
SU over the wireless link using
modulation level 5.
Applicable to AU/BU. Readonly. Counts the total number
of unicast frames (excluding
retransmissions) that were
successfully transmitted to the
SU over the wireless link using
modulation level 6.
Applicable to AU/BU. Readonly. Counts the total number
of unicast frames (excluding
retransmissions) that were
successfully transmitted to the
SU over the wireless link using
modulation level 7.
Counter 32
*AdbTxSuccessModLevel1
(*AUAdbEntry 9)
*AdbTxSuccess ModLevel2
(*AUAdbEntry 10)
*AdbTxSuccess ModLevel3
(*AUAdbEntry 11)
*AdbTxSuccess ModLevel4
(*AUAdbEntry 12)
*AdbTxSuccess ModLevel5
(*AUAdbEntry 13)
*AdbTxSuccess ModLevel6
(*AUAdbEntry 14)
*AdbTxSuccess ModLevel7
(*AUAdbEntry 15)
Counter 32
Counter 32
Counter 32
Counter 32
Counter 32
Counter 32
Counter 32
BreezeACCESS 4900 System Manual
204
breezeAccessVLMib
MIB Parameter
Description
Value/Range
*AdbTxSuccess ModLevel8
(*AUAdbEntry 16)
Applicable to AU/BU. Not
applicable to units with HW
revision A. Read-only. Counts
the total number of unicast
frames (excluding
retransmissions) that were
successfully transmitted to the
SU over the wireless link using
modulation level 8.
Applicable to AU/BU. Readonly. Counts the total number
of failures to successfully
transmit a unicast frame
intended to the SU during a
HW Retry cycle using
modulation level 1.
Applicable to AU/BU. Readonly. Counts the total number
of failures to successfully
transmit a unicast frame
intended to the SU during a
HW Retry cycle using
modulation level 2.
Applicable to AU/BU. Readonly. Counts the total number
of failures to successfully
transmit a unicast frame
intended to the SU during a
HW Retry cycle using
modulation level 3.
Applicable to AU/BU. Readonly. Counts the total number
of failures to successfully
transmit a unicast frame
intended to the SU during a
HW Retry cycle using
modulation level 4.
Applicable to AU/BU. Readonly. Counts the total number
of failures to successfully
transmit a unicast frame
intended to the SU during a
HW Retry cycle using
modulation level 5.
Applicable to AU/BU. Readonly. Counts the total number
of failures to successfully
transmit a unicast frame
intended to the SU during a
HW Retry cycle using
modulation level 6.
Applicable to AU/BU. Readonly. Counts the total number
of failures to successfully
transmit a unicast frame
intended to the SU during a
HW Retry cycle using
modulation level 7.
Counter 32
*AdbTxFailed ModLevel1
(*AUAdbEntry 17)
*AdbTxFailed ModLevel2
(*AUAdbEntry 18)
*AdbTxFailed ModLevel3
(*AUAdbEntry 19)
*AdbTxFailed ModLevel4
(*AUAdbEntry 20)
*AdbTxFailed ModLevel5
(*AUAdbEntry 21)
*AdbTxFailed ModLevel6
(*AUAdbEntry 22)
*AdbTxFailed ModLevel7
(*AUAdbEntry 23)
Counter 32
Counter 32
Counter 32
Counter 32
Counter 32
Counter 32
Counter 32
BreezeACCESS 4900 System Manual
205
Appendix E - Supported MIBS and Traps
MIB Parameter
Description
Value/Range
*AdbTxFailed ModLevel8
(*AUAdbEntry 24)
Applicable to AU/BU. Not
applicable to units with HW
revision A. Read-only. Counts
the total number of failures to
successfully transmit a unicast
frame intended to the SU
during a HW Retry cycle using
modulation level 8.
Applicable to AU Only. Not
applicable to BreezeNET B
products. Read-only. The value
configured in the relevant SU
for the CIR: Uplink parameter.
Applicable to AU/BU. Readonly. The value configured in
the relevant SU for the MIR:
Uplink parameter.
Applicable to AU. Not
applicable to BreezeNET B
products. Read-only. The value
configured in the relevant SU
for the CIR: Downlink
parameter.
Applicable to AU/BU. Readonly. The value configured in
the relevant SU for the MIR:
Downlink parameter.
Applicable to AU. Not
applicable to BreezeNET B
products. Read-only. The value
configured in the relevant SU
for the Maximum Delay
parameter.
Applicable to AU/BU. Readonly. The measured distance
between the relevant SU/RB
and the AU/BU (In Kilometers).
Applicable to AU/BU. Readonly. The HW Revision of the
relevant SU/RB.
Counter 32
*AdbCirTx
(*AUAdbEntry 25)
*AdbMirTx
(*AUAdbEntry 26)
*AdbCirRx
(*AUAdbEntry 27)
*AdbMirRx
(*AUAdbEntry 28)
*AdbCirMaxDelay
(*AUAdbEntry 29)
*AdbDistance
(*AUAdbEntry 30)
*AdbHwRevision
(*AUAdbEntry 31)
*AdbCpldVer
(*AUAdbEntry 32)
*AdbCountryCode
(*AUAdbEntry 33)
*AdbBootVer
(*AUAdbEntry 34)
*AdbAtpcOption
(*AUAdbEntry 35)
Applicable to AU/BU. Readonly. The CPLD Version of the
relevant SU/RB.
Applicable to AU/BU. Readonly. The Country Code of the
relevant SU/RB.
Applicable to AU/BU. Readonly. The Boot Version of the
relevant SU/RB.
Applicable to AU/BU. Readonly. The current ATPC Option
of the relevant SU/RB.
Integer
Integer
Integer
Integer
Integer
Integer
1 means any
distance below
2 km
Integer
HwRevisionA
(1),
HwRevisionB
(2),
HwRevisionC
(3),
na(255)
DisplayString
Integer
DisplayString
Integer
disable (1),
enable (2),
na(255)
BreezeACCESS 4900 System Manual
206
breezeAccessVLMib
MIB Parameter
Description
Value/Range
*AdbAdapModOption
(*AUAdbEntry 36)
Applicable to AU/BU. Readonly. The current Adaptive
Modulation Option of the
relevant SU/RB.
Applicable to AU/BU. Readonly. The current Burst Mode
Option of the relevant SU/RB.
Integer
disable (1),
enable (2),
na(255)
Integer
disable (1),
enable (2),
na(255)
Integer
disable (1),
enable (2),
na(255)
Integer
wep (1),
aes (2),
na(255)
Integer
openSystem(1),
sharedKey (2),
na(255)
Integer
disable (1),
enable (2),
na(255)
Integer
*AdbBurstModeOption
(*AUAdbEntry 37)
*AdbConcatenationOption
(*AUAdbEntry 39)
*AdbSecurityMode
(*AUAdbEntry 41)
*AdbAuthOption
(*AUAdbEntry 42)
*AdbDataEncryptOption
(*AUAdbEntry 43)
*AdbAge
(*AUAdbEntry 44)
*AdbUnitName
(*AUAdbEntry 45)
*UpLinkQualityIndicator
(*SiteSurvey 6)
*MeasureUpLinkQualityIndicator
(*UpLinkQualityIndicator 1)
*ReadUpLinkQualityIndicator
(*UpLinkQualityIndicator 2)
*UpLinkQualityIndicatorStatus
(*UpLinkQualityIndicator 3)
*MacPinpoint
(*SiteSurvey 7)
Applicable to AU/BU. Readonly. The current
Concatenation Option of the
relevant SU/RB.
Applicable to AU/BU. Readonly. The current Security
Mode of the relevant SU/RB.
Applicable to AU/BU. Readonly. The current
Authentication Algorithm
Option of the relevant SU/RB.
Applicable to AU/BU. Readonly. The current Data
Encryption Option of the
relevant SU/RB.
Applicable to AU/BU. Readonly. The time in seconds
elapsed since receiving the last
packet from the relevant
SU/RB.
Applicable to AU/BU. Readonly. The Unit Name of the
relevant SU/RB.
UpLink quality Indicator (LQI)
parameters. Applicable only to
SU/RB.
Applicable to SU/RB. Starts
calculation of LQI. The
calculation will be for a period
of 10 seconds.
Applicable to SU/RB. Readonly. The results of the last LQI
calculation.
Applicable to SU/RB Only.
Indicates the test conditions.
fullTest means that there are
no limitations on the range of
available modulation levels,
and that all modulation levels
from 1 to 8 can be used.
limitedTest indicates that the
results may not indicate the
true quality since the available
range is limited - by HW (HW
Revision A), or by the
applicable parameters in the
country code, or by the
configurable Maximum
Modulation Level parameter.
Applicable to AU/BU. MAC
Pinpoint parameters.
DisplayString
Integer
start (1),
cancel (2)
Integer
1-8.
Integer
fullTest (1),
limitedTest (2)
BreezeACCESS 4900 System Manual
207
Appendix E - Supported MIBS and Traps
MIB Parameter
Description
Value/Range
*MacPinpointTable
(*MacPinpoint 1)
*MacPinpointEntry
(MacPinpointTable 1)
Applicable to AU/BU. MAC
Pinpoint table. Not accessible.
Applicable to AU/BU. An entry
in the MAC Pinpoint table. Not
accessible. Each entry
contains an Ethernet station
MAC address and the MAC
address of the wireless device
used to connect it to the
wireless network
Applicable to AU/BU only.
Read only. The MAC address
of the Ethernet station. It is
used as an index in the MAC
Pinpoint Table.
Applicable to AU/BU only.
Read only. The MAC address
of the wireless device used by
the station with the MAC
Address from the index in order
to access the wireless network
MAC address
MptEthernetStationMACAddress
(*MacPinpointEntry 1)
MptUnitMACAddress
(*MacPinpointEntry 2)
MAC address
BreezeACCESS 4900 System Manual
208
Supported Traps
E.3
Supported Traps
NOTE
An * is used instead of the brzaccVL prefix.
E.3.1
Trap Variables
MIB Parameter
Description
Value/Range
*Traps
(breezeAccessVLMib 14)
*TrapSUMacAddr
(*Traps 1)
Applicable to AU/BU. An
SU/RB MAC address.
MAC address
*TrapText
(*Traps 3)
*TrapToggle
(*Traps 4)
Applicable to all units. Textual
string for future use.
Applicable to all units. An
On/Off toggle status.
DisplayString
*TrapParameterChanged
(*Traps 5)
Applicable to all units. A
modification to one of the
parameters related to IP
Filtering, MIR/CIR or VLAN.
Applicable to all units. The
access rights used for login.
*TrapAccessRights
(*Traps 6)
*TrapLog
(*Traps 7)
*TrapTelnetUserIpAddress
(*Traps 8)
*TrapRTx
(*Traps 9)
*TrapFtpOrTftpStatus
(*Traps 10)
*TrapDFSMoveFreq
(*Traps 11)
Applicable to all units. Login
or logout to the Monitor
program Telnet.
Applicable to all units. The IP
address of a Telnet user.
Applicable to AU/BU.
Retransmissions rate.
Applicable to all units.
The status of the last
FTP/TFTP loading process.
Applicable to AU/BU with HW
revision B and lower (for units
with HW revision C and
higher replaced by
*TrapDFSMoveFreq New to
support a resolution of 0.5
MHz). The new frequency in
MHz after detecting radar on
a previous channel.
Integer
on (1)
off (2)
Integer
cirOrMir (1)
ipFilter (2)
vlan (3)
Integer
notLoggedIn (1)
readOnly (2)
installer (3)
administrator (4)
factory (5)
Integer
telnetLogin (1)
telnetLogout (2)
IP address
successful (1)
failed (2)
Integer
BreezeACCESS 4900 System Manual
209
Appendix E - Supported MIBS and Traps
MIB Parameter
Description
Value/Range
*TrapDFSMoveFreqNew
(*Traps 12)
Applicable to AU/BU. The
new frequency in MHz after
detecting radar on a previous
channel. (Replaces
*TrapDFSMoveFreq to
support a resolution of 0.5
MHz for units with HW
revision C and higher).
Applicable to all units. The
number of packets that were
dropped by the Ethernet
broadcast/multicast limiter.
Applicable to AUS only. The
type of subscriber that was
rejected by the AUS (AUS
can serve up to SUs. Only
SU-3 and SU-6 are
supported).
DisplayString
*EthBroadcastThresholdExceeded
(*Traps 13)
*TrapSubscriberType
(*trap 14)
E.3.2
Integer
Integer
unknownSubscriberType(0),
su-3(3)
su-6(6),
rb-14(14),
su-24(24),
rb-28(28),
su-54(54)
Private Traps
Trap (Number)
Description
Variables
*SUassociatedAUTRAP (2)
An AU/BU trap
indicating a new
association with an
SU/RB.
An AU/BU trap
indicating that an SU/RB
has been disassociated
from the AU/BU. The
AU/BU decides that an
SU/RB has been
disassociated from it
and remove it from the
ADB after receiving from
another AU/BU a SNAP
frame with the SU/RB
MAC address. The
SNAP frame indicating a
network topology
change where the
SU/RB has associated
with another AU/BU will
be received if both
AUs/BUs are connected
to the same Ethernet
backbone.
*TrapSUMacAddr
*AUdisassociatedTRAP (3)
*TrapSUMacAddr
BreezeACCESS 4900 System Manual
210
Supported Traps
Trap (Number)
Description
Variables
*AUagingTRAP (4)
An AU/BU trap
indicating that an SU/RB
aged out and was
removed from the
Associations database
following its failure to
acknowledge a specified
number of consecutive
frames.
An SU/RB trap
indicating association
with an AU/BU. In
addition to the MAC
address information of
the AU/BU, the trap also
includes information on
the average SNR of
frames received from
the AU/BU.
An AU/BU trap,
indicating that the
quality of the wireless
link has changed and
dropped below (Off) or
increased above (On) a
threshold defined by the
*WirelessTrapThreshold.
An AU/BU trap
indicating power up after
reset.
Applicable to all units. A
trap indicating that a
log-in or log-out has
been performed via
Telnet. Includes the
login access right and
the IP address of the PC
performing Telnet.
Applicable to all units. A
trap indicating a change
in CIR/MIR, IP Filter or
VLAN parameter.
Applicable to all units. A
trap indicating the
results (successful or
failed) of the last
FTP/TFTP loading
process.
An AU/BU trap
indicating that
promiscuous mode was
enabled (on) or disabled
(off)
An AU/BU trap
indicating that radar was
detected
An AU/BU trap
indicating the new
frequency after radar
was detected.
*TrapSUMacAddr
*SUassociatedTRAP (6)
*AUwirelessQualityTRAP (20)
*PowerUpFromReset (101)
*MonitorStatusTRAP (102)
*ParameterChangedTRAP(103)
*LoadingStatusTRAP(104)
*PromiscuousModeTRAP (105)
*DFSRadarDetectedTRAP (106)
*DFSFrequencyTRAP (107)
*AssociatedAU
*TrapToggle
*TrapRTx
*UnitMacAddress
*TrapLog
*TrapAccessRights
*TrapTelnetUserIpAddress
*TrapParameterChanged
*TrapFtpOrTftpStatus
*UnitMacAddress
*TrapToggle
*UnitMacAddress
*UnitMacAddress
*UnitMacAddress
*TrapDFSMoveFreq
BreezeACCESS 4900 System Manual
211
Appendix E - Supported MIBS and Traps
Trap (Number)
Description
Variables
*DFSNoFreeChannelsExistTRAP
(108)
An AU/BU trap
indicating that radar was
detected and there is no
free channel.
Applicable for all units.
The trap is send if the
Ethernet broadcast filter
threshold is exceeded
and it contains the
number of packets that
were dropped since the
last trap.
Applicable to AUS only.
This trap is generated
when a subscriber unit
that is not supportedt
tries to associate with
the AUS. The AUS
supports only up to 5
SU-3 and/or SU-6 units.
*UnitMacAddress
*EthBroadcastMulticatLimiterTRAP
(109)
*USUnsupportedSubscriberTypeTRAP
(110)
*UnitMacAddress
*EthBroadcastThresholdExceeded
*TrapSUMacAddr
*TrapSubscriberType
BreezeACCESS 4900 System Manual
212
F
Appendix F - Parameters Summary
In This Appendix:
The tables provide an at a glance summary of the configurable parameters,
value ranges, and default values. In addition, each parameter entry also
includes an indication as to whether the parameter is updated in run-time or
whether the unit must be reset before the modification takes effect.
Appendix F - Parameters Summary
F.1
Unit Control Parameters
Parameter
Unit
Range
Default
Run-Time
Change Unit Name
AU, SU
None
Yes
Change Read Only
Password
Change Installer
Password
Change
Administrator
Password
FTP SW Version
File Name
AU, SU
Up to 32 printable ASCII
characters
Up to 8 printable ASCII
characters
Up to 8 printable ASCII
characters
Up to 8 printable ASCII
characters
public
No
user
No
private
No
VxWorks.bz
Yes
Configuration File
Name
AU, SU
config.cfg
Yes
Operator Defaults
File Name
AU, SU
operator.cmr
Yes
FTP Source Dir
AU, SU
None (empty)
Yes
FTP Client IP
Address
FTP Client IP Mask
FTP Server IP
Address
FTP Gateway IP
Address
FTP User Name
AU, SU
Up to 20 printable ASCII
characters. An empty string
is not allowed.
Up to 20 printable ASCII
characters. An empty string
is not allowed.
Up to 20 printable ASCII
characters. An empty string
is not allowed.
Up to 80 printable ASCII
characters. Use “.” to clear.
IP address
1.1.1.3
No
AU, SU
AU, SU
IP address
IP address
255.255.255.0
1.1.1.4
No
No
AU, SU
IP address
0.0.0.0
No
AU, SU
vx
No
FTP Password
AU, SU
Vx
No
FTP Log File Name
AU, SU
logfile.log
Yes
FTP Log File
Destination
Directory
Event Log Policy
AU, SU
Up to 18 printable ASCII
characters
Up to 18 printable ASCII
characters
Up to 20 printable ASCII
characters
Up to 80 printable ASCII
characters. Use “.” to clear.
None (empty)
Yes
Warning
Yes
Yes
AU, SU
AU, SU
AU, SU
AU, SU
Message
Warning
Error
Fatal
Log Out Timer
AU, SU
Log None
1-999 minutes
BreezeACCESS 4900 System Manual
214
Unit Control Parameters
Parameter
Unit
Ethernet Port
Negotiation Mode
AU, SU
Range
Force 10 Mbps and
Half-Duplex
Default
Run-Time
Auto Negotiation
No
None
Yes
None
No
Force 10 Mbps and
Full-Duplex
Force 100 Mbps and
Half-Duplex
Force 100 Mbps and
Full-Duplex
Change System
Location
Manual Feature
Upgrade
AU, SU
AU, SU
Auto Negotiation
Up to 34 printable ASCII
characters
License string: 32 to 64
hexadecimal digits
BreezeACCESS 4900 System Manual
215
Appendix F - Parameters Summary
F.2
IP Parameters
Parameter
Unit
Range
Default
Run-Time
IP Address
Subnet Mask
Default Gateway
Address
DHCP Option
AU, SU
AU, SU
AU, SU
IP address
IP address
IP address
10.0.0.1
255.0.0.0
0.0.0.0
No
No
No
Disable
No
AU: From Ethernet
Only
No
AU, SU
Disable
DHCP Only
Automatic
Access to DHCP
AU, SU
From Wireless Only
From Ethernet Only
From Both Wireless and
Ethernet
SU: From Wireless
Only
BreezeACCESS 4900 System Manual
216
Air Interface Parameters
F.3
Air Interface Parameters
Parameter
Unit
Range
Default
Run-Time
ESSID
AU, SU
Up to 31 printable ASCII
characters
ESSID1
No
Operator ESSID
Option
AU
Enable
No
Operator ESSID
AU
ESSID1
No
Best AU Support
SU
Disable
No
Number of
Scanning
Attempts
Preferred AU
MAC Address
Scanning Mode
Cell Distance
Mode
Maximum Cell
Distance
SU
Enable
1 – 255
No
SU
MAC Address
Yes
SU
AU
Passive, Active
Automatic, Manual
00-00-00-00-00-00
(no preferred AU)
Passive
Automatic
No
No
AU
0-54 (Km)
0 means no compensation
0 (no compensation)
Yes
Fairness Factor
Arbitration InterFrame Spacing
AU
AU, SU
0 – 100 (%)
100 (%)
2 time slots
No
Yes
Wireless Trap
Threshold
Maximum
Number of
Associations
AU
30 (%)
Yes
AU
1-512 (1-124 if Data
Encryption Option is
enabled).
512
Yes
Sub-Band
Select*
Frequency
AU, SU
1, 2
No
AU
4947.5 MHz
No
Frequency
Subset Definition
(in SU)
SU
4947.5 - 4982.5 MHz,
5MHz steps
According to the Sub-Band.
A list of frequency indexes
or A for all frequencies
supported by the Sub-Band
A (All)
No
Country Code
Learning by SU
AU
Enable
Yes
Tx Power For
Modulation
Levels 1 to 5
Tx Power For
Modulation Level
Tx Power For
Modulation Level
AU, SU
The highest allowed
value
Yes
The highest allowed
value
Yes
The highest allowed
value
Yes
AU, SU
AU, SU
Disable
Enable
Up to 31 printable ASCII
characters
Disable
1 time slot
2 time slots
1-100 (%)
Disable
Enable
-10 dBm to a value
determined by Sub-Band
-10 dBm to a value
determined by the SubBand.
-10 dBm to a value
determined by the SubBand
BreezeACCESS 4900 System Manual
217
Appendix F - Parameters Summary
Parameter
Unit
Range
Default
Run-Time
Tx Power For
Modulation Level
Max Tx Power
For Modulation
Levels 1 to 5
Max Tx Power
For Modulation
Level 6
Max Tx Power
For Modulation
Level 7
Max Tx Power
For Modulation
Level 8
ATPC Option
AU, SU
-10 dBm to a value
determined by the SubBand
-10 dBm to a value
determined by the SubBand
-10 dBm to a value
determined by the SubBand
-10 dBm to a value
determined by the SubBand
-10 dBm to a value
determined by the SubBand
The highest allowed
value
Yes
The highest allowed
value
Yes
The highest allowed
value
Yes
The highest allowed
value
Yes
The highest allowed
value
Yes
Enable
Yes
Delta from
Minimum SNR
Level
Minimum SNR
Level
Minimum
Interval Between
ATPC Messages
ATPC Power
Level Steps
Tx Control
AU
Enable
4-20 (dB)
11 dB
Yes
AU
4-60 (dB)
28 (dB)
Yes
AU
1-3600 (seconds)
30 (seconds)
Yes
AU
1-20 (dB)
Yes
On
Yes (unit is
reset
automatically)
Antenna Gain
AU,
SU***
No
Spectrum
Analysis
Channel Scan
Period
Spectrum
Analysis Scan
Cycles
Automatic
Channel
Selection
AU, SU
2 – 30 seconds
AU: According to the
antenna supplied with
the unit.
SU-E: NA
5 seconds
No
AU, SU
1 – 100 cycles
2 cycles
No
Disable
No
(Configured
per analysis)
Lost Beacons
Watchdog
Threshold
AU
218
Yes
SU
SU
SU
SU
AU, SU
AU
AU
Disable
Off
On
0 – 50 (dB)
Disable
Enable
100 – 1000, 0 means Not
Used
*** Configurable only in units without an integral antenna.
BreezeACCESS 4900 System Manual
218
Network Management Parameters
F.4
Network Management Parameters
Parameter
Unit
Access to
Network
Management
AU, SU
Range
From Wireless Link Only
Default
Run-Time
From Both Ethernet
and Wireless Link
No
Disable
No
0.0.0.0
(all 10 entries)
No
0.0.0.0 TO 0.0.0.0
(all 10 entries)
No
Disable
Yes
0.0.0.0
(all 10 entries)
public
(all 10 entries)
No
From Ethernet Only
From Both Ethernet and
Wireless Link
Network
Management
Filtering
AU, SU
Disable
Activate Management IP
Filter On Ethernet Port
Activate Management IP
Filter On Wireless Port
Set Network
Management
IP Address
Set/Change
Network
Management
IP Address
Ranges
Send SNMP
Traps
AU, SU
SNPM Traps
IP Destination
SNMP Traps
Community
AU, SU
AU, SU
AU, SU
AU, SU
Activate Management IP
Filter On Both Ethernet
and Wireless Ports
IP address
 to 
or,
 mask 
Disable
Enable
IP address
Up to 14 printable ASCII
characters
No
BreezeACCESS 4900 System Manual
219
Appendix F - Parameters Summary
F.5
Bridge Parameters
Parameter
Unit
Range
Default
RunTime
VLAN ID-Data
VLAN ID –
Management
VLAN Link Type
SU
AU, SU
1 – 4094
1 – 4094, 65535
65535 (no VLAN)
No
No
Hybrid Link
No
Disable
No
Empty list
No
Disable
No
AU, SU
Hybrid Link
Trunk Link
VLAN Forwarding
Support
VLAN Forwarding
ID
VLAN Relaying
Support
VLAN Relaying ID
VLAN Priority –
Data
VLAN Priority –
Management
Ethernet Broadcast
Filtering Options
AU, SU
AU, SU
AU
AU
Access Link (only in SU)
Disable, Enable
1 – 4094
(up to 20 entries)
Disable, Enable
Empty list
No
SU
1 – 4094
(up to 20 entries)
0–7
No
AU, SU
0–7
No
Disable
Yes
Disable
Yes
Disable
Yes
Enable
Yes
Disable
Yes
50
Yes
SU
Disable,
On Ethernet Port Only
On Wireless Port Only
On Both Wireless and
Ethernet Ports
DHCP Broadcast
Override Filter
SU
PPPoE Broadcast
Override Filter
SU
ARP Broadcast
Override Filter
SU
Ethernet
Broadcast/Multicast
Limiter Option
AU, SU
Disable
Enable
Disable
Enable
Disable
Enable
Disable
Limit only Broadcast
Packets
Limit Multicast Packets
that are not Broadcasts
Ethernet
Broadcast/Multicast
Limiter Threshold
AU, SU
Limit All Multicast
Packets (including
broadcast)
0 – 204800 (packets/second)
BreezeACCESS 4900 System Manual
220
Bridge Parameters
Parameter
Unit
Range
Default
Run-
Ethernet
Broadcast/Multicast
Limiter Send Trap
Interval
Bridge Aging Time
Broadcast Relaying
Unicast Relaying
AU, SU
1 – 60 (minutes)
5 (minutes)
Yes
AU, SU
AU
AU
20 – 2000 seconds
Disable, Enable
300
Enable
Enable
No
No
No
None (empty)
Yes
Disable
No
Enable
Yes
Time
MAC Address
Deny List
Roaming Option
AU
Disable
Enable
Up to 100 MAC addresses
SU
Disable
Enable
Ethernet Port
Control
SU
Disable
Enable
BreezeACCESS 4900 System Manual
221
Appendix F - Parameters Summary
F.6
Performance Parameters
Parameter
Unit
Range
Default
Run-Time
RTS Threshold
AU, SU
20 – 4032 (bytes)
AU: 4032
Yes
Minimum
Contention
Window
Maximum
Contention
Window
Maximum
Modulation Level
Multicast
Modulation Level
Number of HW
Retries
Average SNR
Memory Factor
Burst Mode
Option
AU, SU
0, 7, 15, 31, 63, 127, 255,
511, 1023
SU: 60
15
Yes
AU, SU
7, 15, 31, 63, 127, 255, 511,
1023
1023
Yes
AU, SU
1-8
Yes
AU
1-8
Yes
AU, SU
1 - 15
10
Yes
AU, SU
-1 to 32
Yes
Enable
No
Burst Mode Time
Interval
Adaptive
Modulation
Option
AU, SU
5 milliseconds
Yes
Enable
No
Minimum Interval
Between
Adaptive
Modulation
Messages
Adaptive
Modulation
Decisión
Threshold
Concatenation
Option
AU, SU
4 (seconds)
Yes
Normal
No
Enable
No
Maximum
Number of
Frames
AU, SU
No
AU, SU
AU, SU
AU, SU
Disable
Enable
1 to 10 (milliseconds)
Disable
Enable
1-3600 (seconds)
Normal
High
AU, SU
Disable
Enable
2 – 8 frames
BreezeACCESS 4900 System Manual
222
Service Parameters
F.7
Service Parameters
Parameter
Unit
User Filtering
Option
SU
Range
Disable
Default
Run-Time
Disable
Yes
0.0.0.0 TO
0.0.0.0
(all 8 entries)
No
Disable DHCP
Unicast
Yes
IP Protocol Only
User Defined Addresses Only
Set/Change
Filter IP
Address
Ranges
DHCP Unicast
Override Filter
SU
MIR: Downlink
SU
PPPoE Protocol Only
 to 
or,
 mask 
SU
Disable DHCP Unicast
Enable DHCP Unicast
MIR: Uplink
CIR: Downlink
No
128-53888 (Kbps)
53888 (Kbps)
128-53888 (Kbps)
53888 (Kbps)
0 (Kbps)
No
SU
No
SU
0-45056 (Kbps)
CIR: Uplink
SU
0 (Kbps)
No
5,000 (ms)
No
Maximum
Delay
Maximum Burst
Duration
Graceful
Degradation
Limit
MIR Only
Option
SU
0-45056 (Kbps)
300 – 10,000 (ms)
AU, SU
0 – 2,000 (ms)
5 (ms)
No
AU
0 – 70 (%)
70 (%)
No
Enable
No
VLAN Priority
Threshold
ToS
Prioritization
Option
AU, SU
No
Disable
No
AU, SU
Enable DSCP (RFC2474)
Prioritization
0–7
No
AU, SU
0 – 63
63
No
Disable
No
IP Precedence
Threshold
DSCP
Threshold
UDP/TCP Port
Ranges
Prioritization
Option
AU
Disable
Enable
0–7
AU, SU
Disable
Enable IP Precedence
(RFC791) Prioritization
AU, SU
Disable
Enable Only for UDP
Enable Only for TCP
Enable for both UDP and TCP
BreezeACCESS 4900 System Manual
223
Appendix F - Parameters Summary
Parameter
Unit
UDP
RTP/RTCP
Prioritization
AU, SU
TCP
RTP/RTCP
Prioritization
AU, SU
Range
RTP & RTCP
Default
Run-Time
RTP & RTCP
No
RTP & RTCP
No
RTP Only
RTP & RTCP
RTP Only
BreezeACCESS 4900 System Manual
224
Security Parameters
F.8
Security Parameters
Parameter
Unit
Authentication
Algorithm*
AU, SU
Data Encryption
Option*
AU, SU
Security Mode*
AU, SU
Range
Open system
Default
Run-Time
Open system
No
Disable
No
WEP
No
Shared Key
Disable
Enable
WEP
AES/OCB
AES/CCM
Default Key
Default
Multicast Key
Key # 1 to Key
#4
Promiscuous
Authentication
SU
AU
1-4
1-4
No
No
AU, SU
32 hexadecimal digits
0…0 (all 0=no
key)
Disable
No
AU
Disable
Enable
Yes
(Disable
after reset)
BreezeACCESS 4900 System Manual
225
G
Appendix G - Using the Feature License
Web Application
Appendix G - Using the Feature License Web Application
G.1
The Feature License Web Application
Certain features of BreezeACCESS 4900 products may be upgraded through
loading special feature license strings. When you receive the invoice for new
license(s) purchased, use the Alvarion web site for getting license strings for
specific products.
To access the Feature License Application:
In the Alvarion web site (www.alvarion.com), select the Customer Service
option.
In the Customer Service page, select the Service Call Entry option.
In the User Login form, enter your User ID and Password and click Login.
Select SSM - Customer Service Area.
Select the Feature License option.
The Get Feature License Key form with the current status of your license(s) is
displayed.
BreezeACCESS 4900 System Manual
228
The Feature License Web Application
To get details on the updated status of your licenses:
Check on the License Key Enquiry button to get the updated status of the
licenses.
The displayed information includes account history with details on all license
strings that were provided.
To get a License Key for a single device:
Check the required feature license entry and click on the Get Key button. The
Enter MAC Address form will be displayed:
Enter the MAC Address of the device you want to upgrade.
Click on the Get Key button. The License Key for the device will be displayed.
NOTE
An error message will be displayed upon requesting a key for a non-valid MAC address.
To get License Keys for multiple devices:
This feature enables you to load a list of MAC Addresses from a pre-prepared
Excel file.
NOTE
The Excel file should contain a single column of MAC addresses (no empty cells). This must be
column A, starting at row 1, which is the title row.
Check the required feature license and click on Upload MAC Address List
from Excel button. The Get MAC Addresses from Excel File form will be
displayed:
BreezeACCESS 4900 System Manual
229
Appendix G - Using the Feature License Web Application
NOTE
You may need to change your Browser security settings. For details press the Change Security
Level link in the form.
Use the browser or enter the path to the MAC addresses file. Enter the MAC
address of the device you want to upgrade.
Click on the Import File button to get a list of License Keys for the devices
included in the Excel file.
NOTE
An error message will be displayed upon requesting a key for a non-valid MAC address.
G.1.1
Loading License Strings to Devices
To upgrade a single device:
There are several methods of loading a feature license string to a single device:
Using Telnet: Use the Feature Upgrade option in the Unit Control menu.
Using TFTP: Use the file with the extension “.fln” for feature license strings.
Refer to Appendix B (File Upload and Download Using TFTP) for more details.
BreezeACCESS 4900 System Manual
230
The Feature License Web Application
Using BreezeCONFIG: Enter the license string in the Feature Upgrade field of
the Unit Control window. Refer to the BreezeCONFIG User Manual for more
details.
To upgrade multiple devices using a feature licenses file:
Using TFTP: Use the file with the extension “.fln” for feature license strings.
Refer to Appendix B (File Upload and Download Using TFTP) for more details.
Note that Feature license files include multiple strings, where each string is
applicable only for a certain unit identified by its MAC address. When
uploading a feature license or a country code file to multiple units, each unit
will accept only the parts that are applicable for it.
Using BreezeCONFIG: Use the File Loading Utility. Refer to the
BreezeCONFIG User Manual for more details.
NOTE
After completing loading process, reset the unit(s) to apply the change. Use the Info Screens menu
(Show Unit Status) to verify that the unit has been upgraded.
BreezeACCESS 4900 System Manual
231
H
Appendix H - Troubleshooting
Appendix H - Troubleshooting
H.1
Ethernet Port Connection Problems
Problem and Indication
Possible Cause
Corrective Action
The Ethernet Integrity Indicator
(the yellow LED embedded in
the Ethernet connector) is off,
and/or the Ethernet Activity
Indicator (the green embedded
LED) does not blink when there
should be traffic on the
Ethernet port.
The unit does not respond to
ping.
Wrong type of Ethernet
cable
If connected directly to PC-use a
crossed cable. Otherwise-use a
straight cable
Faulty Ethernet cable
Replace cable
Wrong IP configuration
Make sure that the PC is on the same
subnet as the unit*.
Wrong Ethernet port
operation mode
Make sure that the speed and duplex
settings in the PC match the
configuration in the unit (the default is
Auto Negotiation)
* If the IP parameters of the unit are unknown, use the Set Factory Defaults utility to
restore the default factory configuration of all parameters (except to Passwords, general
FTP parameters and AU’s Frequency). The IP address of the unit after setting to factory
defaults is 10.0.0.1.
BreezeACCESS 4900 System Manual
234
SU Association Problems
H.2
SU Association Problems
Problem and Indication
Possible Cause
Corrective Action
SU does not associate with AU
Wrong configuration
Check proper configuration of basic
parameters:
ESSID
Sub-band and frequencies subset
Best AU parameters
ATPC Option
Transmit Power
Maximum Transmit Power
Antenna Gain
Access is denied by
AU
Link quality is too low
Security parameters: Authentication
Algorithm, and Default Key. If
necessary-use Promiscuous Mode
in AU.
Verify that the SU is not included in MAC
Address Deny List of the AU.
Verify that unit is in coverage area of
AU according to radio planning.
Verify that antenna is directed
toward the AU
Try to improve location/height of
antenna.
BreezeACCESS 4900 System Manual
235
Appendix H - Troubleshooting
H.3
Low Throughput Problems
Problem and Indication
Possible Cause
Low throughput is suspected
Ethernet link
problems
(Check the dominant
Modulation Level in Per rate
Counters and see expected
throughput in the “Expected
Throughput” table below)
Wrong configuration
of Maximum
Modulation level
Low throughput of
multicast/broadcast traffic
Non-optimal
configuration of
Multicast Modulation
level
High retransmissions rate
Interference
problems
(retransmissions rate
in excess of 15%)
Corrective Action
Verify proper settings of Ethernet
operation mode (actual Ethernet
speed of 100 Mbps).
Check Ethernet counters
Verify that Maximum Modulation level is
not set to a value that is not too low
according to the “Recommended
Maximum Modulation Level” table below.
A value that is too low (see the
“Recommended Maximum Modulation
Level” table below) may degrade
throughput of broadcast and multicast
traffic.
Check for interference using the
Spectrum Analysis Mode. If necessary,
change the operating frequency of the
AU.
Expected Throughput in Mbps, TCP session,
Burst Mode Disabled
Modulation Level
Expected Throughput (Mbps) @ 10 MHz Bandwidth
2.40
3.57
4.69
6.76
8.76
12.02
14.13
14.25
BreezeACCESS 4900 System Manual
236
Low Throughput Problems
Recommended Maximum Modulation Level*
SNR
Maximum Modulation Level
SNR > 23 dB
21 dB < SNR < 23 dB
16 dB< SNR < 21 dB
13 dB < SNR < 16 dB
10 dB < SNR < 13 dB
8 dB < SNR < 10 dB
7 dB < SNR < 8 dB
6 dB < SNR < 7 dB
BreezeACCESS 4900 System Manual
237

---

Source Exif Data:

File Type                       : PDF
File Type Extension             : pdf
MIME Type                       : application/pdf
PDF Version                     : 1.5
Linearized                      : No
Encryption                      : Standard V2.3 (128-bit)
User Access                     : Print, Copy, Extract, Print high-res
Page Count                      : 255
Page Mode                       : UseOutlines
XMP Toolkit                     : XMP toolkit 2.9.1-13, framework 1.6
About                           : uuid:7e58e75a-be4f-40a7-90e5-2ed0c01c2e5e
Producer                        : Acrobat Distiller 6.0 (Windows)
Company                         : Alvarion Ltd.
Source Modified                 : D:20050725132139
Headline                        : 
Create Date                     : 2005:07:25 16:33:38+03:00
Creator Tool                    : (Acrobat PDFMaker 6.0 for Word)
Modify Date                     : 2005:07:25 16:48:45+03:00
Metadata Date                   : 2005:07:25 16:48:45+03:00
Document ID                     : uuid:74629a33-9bdb-406b-8559-945e90c007f2
Version ID                      : 13
Format                          : application/pdf
Title                           : BreezeACCESS 4900 System Manual
Creator                         : Alvarion Ltd.
Subject                         : 
Tagged PDF                      : Yes
Author                          : Alvarion Ltd.

EXIF Metadata provided by EXIF.tools